Skip to main content

Getting Great Vocal Tracks, Part 1: The Vocal Chain

Recording compelling vocal tracks requires more than just putting a mic in front of a singer and pressing the record button. The success of a vocal session hinges on the gear and setup you use as well as psychological aspects such as making the singer (whether it’s you or someone else) relaxed and comfortable. In this article, we’ll take a look at each of these.

Mic It

When famous producers and engineers talk about how they selected a microphone for a particular session, they often mention how they had to make a difficult choice between several expensive vintage models to find the best one for a particular singer. For most home recordists, however, that’s a fantasy scenario. Particularly if you’re new to recording, you probably only have one or two relatively inexpensive mics to choose from.

But don’t despair. While it certainly helps to have high-end gear, you can still get a darn good vocal sound with almost any mic. The most significant X factor is the quality of the singer and the vocal performance.

That said, using the best mic you can will certainly help. (If you can’t afford to buy one, perhaps look into renting one.) Generally speaking, you’re likely to get superior results if you use a large-diaphragm condenser mic to record vocals. These models are designed to provide accurate reproduction and offer good high-end response, which flatters the human voice and helps in enunciation, thus making it easier to hear the lyrics being sung.

These days you can get a serviceable large-diaphragm condenser without spending a ton of money. For example, the Steinberg UR22C Recording Pack bundles an ST-M01 Studio Condenser mic along with a UR22C audio interface and a pair of headphones.

Large-diaphragm condenser microphone.
The Steinberg ST-M01 large-diaphragm condenser microphone.

If you don’t have a large-diaphragm condenser, even a good quality hand-held dynamic mic designed for live performance can work. There have actually been tons of hit records made with such mics!

Place It

Mic placement will affect the vocal sound quite a bit. Ideally, it’s best to position the mic about three to five inches in front of the singer’s mouth, but try to make sure you have a pop filter (sometimes called a “pop screen”) between the mouth and the mic to reduce the pickup of plosives — popped Ps and other consonant sounds. Pop filters are inexpensive and well worth including in your studio arsenal, but if you don’t have one immediately on hand, position the mic so it’s a little above or below the singer’s mouth, and/or encourage them to move their head slightly off to the side when singing “p”s or “t”s.

Recording microphone with a pop filter in a studio with intentional shallow depth of field.
A pop filter should be placed right in front of the mic to reduce plosives.

Most vocal mics pick up audio in what’s called a cardioid pattern, meaning they’re most sensitive to signal coming from directly in front. That’s all well and good, but be aware that cardioid mics are prone to something called the proximity effect, which means that the closer you get to it, the more bass is added, thus accentuating the low end of the singer’s voice and making it sound “bigger.” You can use the proximity effect to your advantage to help beef up an otherwise thin voice.

(Pre)Amp It

The signal coming out of a microphone is very low level and has to be amplified to a higher level (called line-level) before being sent to your DAW. The device that takes care of that task is called a mic preamp. A mic preamp has significant impact on the sound quality and is almost as important as the microphone itself in terms of making a vocal sound rich and clean.

Most people in home studios use the preamp built into their audio interface, rather than a dedicated one. The quality of the preamp will usually be commensurate with the overall quality of the interface. The Steinberg UR Series and UR-RT Series interfaces incorporate Yamaha D-Pre mic preamps, which do an excellent job. UR-RT interfaces also include Rupert Neve transformers (Neve was a legendary analog console designer) which can be switched into the input circuit to add subtle saturation that imbues the signal with a pleasant “warmth.”

Rectangular audio interface with series of inputs, outputs, and knobs.
The Steinberg UR-RT2 audio interface.

The other part of your audio interface that’s critical are its analog-to-digital converters (ADCs for short). When a vocal is picked up by a microphone and passes through a mic preamp, the signal is still analog, but it needs to be digitized to be sent into your computer’s DAW software. Just as with mic preamps, the converters in an interface can vary in quality; generally, the better the interface, the better all its components will be, and therefore the better the sound of the vocals you record with it.

Hang It

Unless your studio has professional acoustic treatment, you’ll probably want to minimize the acoustic reflections when recording vocals. Reflections are created by sound waves bouncing off the walls and coming back into the microphone slightly delayed from the direct sound. These can cause phase issues that degrade the overall quality of the recording.

There are several steps you can take to prevent this kind of problem. You can make your own absorbers by hanging up blankets or comforters in front and in back of the singer. These can be draped over mic stands or hung on the walls or even from the ceiling — whatever works. Alternatively, you can purchase a “reflection filter,” which is a small baffle made of absorbent material that sits on a mic stand behind the microphone.

A portrait of a singer in a recording studio giving the thumbs up a curved screen positioned behind the vocal mic.
A reflection filter positioned behind the vocal mic.

If you can’t purchase one of these in time for your vocal session, or if you aren’t able to set up absorbers or baffles, it’s not the end of the world. I’ve recorded plenty of vocals successfully without them, but they’ll certainly help you get a more professional sound.

Vibe It

Now that we’ve discussed the gear, let’s get to the intangibles, the most important of which is coaxing the best performance out of a singer. One of the best ways to do so is by enhancing the atmosphere, or vibe, in your studio in a way that helps the singer relax. A calm singer is more likely to give a performance that best captures the emotion of the song. Lowering the lighting always helps, and having as few people as possible in the studio during the session is another good way of having the singer avoid nervousness and distractions.

One critical part of helping the singer relax is to create a headphone mix (a “cue mix”) that’s comfortable for them to sing to. In home studios, this is usually accomplished with an app such as the dspMixFX software that comes with Steinberg interfaces. The key is to dial in the right balance between the live vocal and the recorded backing tracks. If your gear allows you to add reverb or a little delay to headphones without it getting recorded, that can also help set the mood for the singer. Spend a little time at the beginning of a session making sure the vocalist is comfortable with the headphone mix, and be willing to tweak it until they are happy.

Last but not least, always ALWAYS make sure to record every word the vocalist sings — whether you’re ready or not. An old producers’ trick is to surreptitiously start recording when you’re ostensibly “still adjusting levels.” Sometimes the singer will be more relaxed and deliver a better performance when they think it’s just a level check and not an actual take.

Produce It

When you’re producing a singer, give only constructive criticism, or better yet, just be encouraging. Too much critique can cause a singer to tighten up and the vocal performance will suffer for it. If you’re recording your own vocals, stay positive.

Thanks to the quality and accuracy of modern pitch correction software such as the Vari-Audio feature built into Steinberg Cubase, a singer no longer needs to nail every note. Better to go for the most exciting, dynamic or emotional performance, and don’t focus too heavily on pitch. You can always tune a vocal after the fact, but you can’t make a low-energy or boring performance more exciting.

DAWs make it easy to put together the best bits from various vocal takes in the form of a “comp.” We’ll cover that process in Part 2.

 

Check out our other Recording Basics postings.

Click here for more information about Steinberg Cubase.

The Ampeg Story

Having a conversation about the greatest bass amplifiers of all time that doesn’t include Ampeg would be like trying to have a serious conversation about the greatest R&B singers without mentioning James Brown.

Ampeg’s influence on the world of bass amps cannot be overstated, but their bold concepts had a humble start. The company was founded back in 1946 when a 42-year-old upright bass player and jazz aficionado named Everett Hull stuck a microphone inside his bass and connected it to a radio. His wife dubbed the invention “Ampeg” because the transducer, or pickup, inside the bass was attached to the peg that supported the instrument. “Amp” + “peg.” Get it? Clever gal.

Patent drawing for a bass pickup, credited to C. E. Hull
Patent drawing for the original Ampeg pickup.

Hull successfully spread the word about his creation to bassists in big bands around New York City, who became intrigued by the idea of using his new-fangled pickup to amplify their sound. Their burgeoning interest meant Hull needed to quickly jump-start his production, leading him to form a short-lived company called Michael-Hull Electronic Labs with an amp designer named Stanley Michael.

In addition to selling Hull’s “Ampeg” pickup, they also sold a product called the “Michael-Hull Bassamp.” Although the company dissolved in 1948, Hull was convinced that he was onto something big and doubled down, expanding his rag-tag operation — now known as the Ampeg Bassamp Company — into a small New York City midtown location that gave him close proximity to numerous nightclubs and studios.

Hull and his new amp designers continued to refine and enhance new, better-sounding and more powerful bass amps. As endorsers signed up for the original pickup and the new amps, up-and-coming players took notice, and by the early 1950s, the Ampeg name began to take root. Interestingly, around the same time, a small number of companies started experimenting with related ideas for an electric bass. But Hull — whose musical taste was far more conventional than his inventions would suggest — didn’t think the electric bass concept had much of a chance. He was a jazz guy, after all.

The initial Michael-Hull Bassamp (aka the Model 770) slowly evolved through the early 1950s, incorporating larger speakers, more power, more expansive tonal control and cabinet porting. Innovative amps for guitarists and accordion players followed, but Ampeg’s first major success came with the arrival of designer Jess Oliver in 1956.

It took a while for Hull and Oliver to hit their stride together, but they knew they were onto something special with the 1960 birth of the Ampeg B-15 Portaflex, with its unique “flip-top” design. The B-15 was an immediate game-changer. Its design and sound relegated all other bass amps that came before it (and arguably many others that came after) to the toy bin.

By today’s high-powered standards, you might think this cute, boxy-looking amp should never leave the bedroom, but as thousands of recording studios and bassists throughout the decades can attest, the B-15 was and still is the gold standard for bass tone.

Although it went through many design changes and derivations between 1960 and 1980, all of the versions of the B-15 generally fit the same basic description: a tuned, double-baffle cabinet with a closed-back, featuring a sweet-sounding heavy-duty 15-inch speaker and a separate, shock-mounted tube laden amp head crouched on top of a dolly.

Vintage-looking speaker with a separate, shock-mounted amp head crouched on top of a dolly.
Ampeg Portaflex.

Still highly sought after by bassists young and old, the B-15 remains an important sonic benchmark in the music world. Today, Ampeg carries on the B-15’s rich legacy with the Portaflex Series of individual heads and cabinets, both of which marry undeniably cool design with an overarching vintage aesthetic.

The B-15, which was soon joined by the less renowned SB-12 and B-18 flip-top models (which provided 12″ and 18″ speakers, respectively), was the most prominent bass amp that Ampeg offered during the 1960s. Thanks to an influx of cash that came from taking the company public in 1963, other innovations for the lower clef were soon to follow.

Some were not exactly stunning successes. The Baby Bass, an upright instrument made from fiberglass that was small enough to be transported in a car seat (rather than tied onto the roof), wasn’t as well received by symphonies as Hull had hoped it might be, though it did meet favor with some Latin bands of the era. Nonetheless, Ampeg continued to dabble with adding instruments to its line, including a series of “horizontal” basses with scroll-shaped headstocks that never gained much traction, though they were used by Rick Danko of The Band and are prized by collectors today. But even after moving into a larger production facility to increase its capacity, the company remained poorly positioned to take advantage of the rock-and-roll craze of the ’60s largely because of Hull’s preference for jazz’s pure tone and his disdain for anything related to the rock genre.

By 1966, Ampeg’s sales and ever-expanding product line were cracking under the pressure caused by the company simply being out of step with the popular music of the era. First, Oliver left, and by the end of 1968, Hull himself had resigned from the company he had founded. New management was in place, new ideas were being bandied about, and in early 1969, a huge one took the music world by storm.

Ampeg bass amp set including bass guitar amplifier head sitting atop large speaker cabinet.
Ampeg Heritage 50th Anniversary SVT.

The Super Vacuum Tube amp, or SVT™ for short, was a 300-watt behemoth designed to sit atop a massive 8 x 10″ cabinet to deliver one of the most breathtaking bass sounds imaginable. Prior to the SVT, Ampeg’s most powerful amp had been the 55-watt B-25 (a tone monster in its own right), but when the SVT debuted, all conceptions of power and volume were shattered. The SVT was the first bass amp truly capable of handling arena rock volume and tone, and it remains synonymous with that ethos today, as seen and heard in Ampeg’s Heritage 50th Anniversary SVT as well as the Heritage SVT-CL amp paired with an SVT-810E cabinet. In addition, the Ampeg Classic Series offers a number of amp heads and cabinets inspired by the original SVT.

There probably aren’t two amps that could be more different than the B-15 and the SVT — designed nearly a decade apart by two entirely different teams — yet both are legendary in their own right. It’s a circuitous path from Everett Hull’s mic on a stick inside his upright bass in 1946 to the luscious B-15 of the early ’60s to the massive grinding sound of a modern-day SVT, but that path is a glorious one.

Ampeg changed corporate hands various times throughout the decades, and in 2018 the company became part of the Yamaha Guitar Group family. Yet the thread running through from 1946 to today remains intact. Ampeg’s history is one of building top-quality, innovative amps for serious bassists. You see it in the older amp designs just as you see it today in Ampeg’s modern SVT Pro Series. It’s the same unwavering focus on pure tone and power that has my basement loaded with new and vintage Ampeg gear, and I know I’m not alone. That would probably make Hull quite proud … just as long as no one told him we are all using his amps to play loud rock music. Savages.

Want to know more about the history of Ampeg? Check out the video:

Check out Michael’s other blog posts.

Click here for more information about the history of Ampeg, and also check out the book “Ampeg: The Story Behind the Sound,” by Gregg Hopkins and Bill Moore.

Click here for more information about Ampeg products.

The Element of Surprise

One of the most overlooked — you could even say underused — aspects of music is the element of surprise. This topic came up when I was interviewing Nashville producer Kyle Lehning some years ago, and xjvznqwrqh … BAM!

See what I did there?

OK, so maybe the element of surprise works better in music than it does in the written word.

Music producer wearing headphones, looking thoughtfully into the distance.
Kyle Lehning.

Anyway, back to my interview with Kyle. We were discussing his observation that producers used to be less technically oriented and more like the listening public. “They would sit in a studio and their input would basically be either “that’s good,” or “that’s not good,” he explained, “and it would be up to the musicians to interpret what “not good” was. Usually getting a thumbs down forced the musicians to come up with something more interesting, more surprising, and/or more energetic.”

To illustrate the point, Lehning shared an experience he’d had. After giving an address to an undergraduate college class about record production, he and colleague Norbert Putnam (Elvis Presley’s one-time bass player and a producer of great renown himself) asked the students, “What is it you’re looking for when you go online?”

“One kid in the front row,” Kyle remembered, “raised his hand and said, “I just want to be surprised.” It was a real “wow” moment for me because, frankly, I’d forgotten that part of the job was to surprise people. All of which returns to the problem of being so technically savvy that you forget that it’s really all about keeping the listener interested enough to want to hear the next section of the song, that it’s all about keeping them wondering what’s going to happen next.”

Oil painting of Joseph Haydn.
Joseph Haydn.

In the world of classical music, the archetypal example is the second movement of Joseph Haydn’s Symphony No. 94 in G Major — often called the “Surprise” Symphony. It begins with a soft “Twinkle, Twinkle, Little Star”-like theme played by the violins, supported by a little bass underpinning. Then the theme is repeated, even more gently … only this time it’s followed by a sudden, fortissimo blast from the entire orchestra, complete with a thwack on the timpani.

Nobody is quite sure why Haydn chose to play this musical joke, but many scholars believe it was intended as a jolt to people in the audience who tended to fall asleep during soothing, slow moments. Whatever the reason, it definitely keeps you on alert during the rest of the piece. You listen closely as the variations unfold, expecting that Haydn is going to trick you again, but it never happens again. And one thing is certain: No one listening to this particular Andante is going to drift off.

In a similar way, it’s safe to assume that many audiences hearing Tchaikovsky’s 1812 Overture for the first time had the living you-know-what scared out of them by the firing of cannons — yes, real-life cannons! — during the over-the-top finale.

When it comes to surprises, maverick composer Charles Ives probably has no peers. He turned out a slew of unorthodox pieces in the early 20th century that are regularly interrupted by circus music, dance hall tunes, hymns, ditties, you name it. In a way, the disruptions are often so pervasive that the element of surprise seems somewhat diluted.

And then there’s jazz. As writer Whitney Balliett so succinctly put it, “Jazz is the sound of surprise.” It’s all about music invented on the spot, juxtaposed on top of the chord changes, sometimes deriving loosely from the theme, sometimes not. Every time a jazz great like a John Coltrane lifted the horn to his lips, listeners never knew quite what to expect … and to a large degree that is the appeal of the genre.

Surprises seem to occur with less frequency in contemporary music. I don’t know why that should be the case, unless it’s down to the pursuit of commercial success (which perhaps presumes that the majority of listeners favor formula over revelation). That said, there are many notable exceptions, such as Brian Wilson’s eccentric orchestration on his masterpiece “Pet Sounds” and the unexpected key modulations in The Who’s “My Generation.” Beatle John Lennon was a big fan of musical surprises, and often sprinkled them in his songs. Take, for example, “I Want to Hold Your Hand” — the group’s first US hit, and a record that inspired countless musical careers, including my own. The Fab Four kick off the song with four and a half bars of the bridge, played instrumentally. What makes it both striking and confusing is that it begins midway through the first measure, with the accent on the last eighth note of that measure instead of the downbeat of the next measure. The first (or even the hundredth) time you hear this, you’re thrown off balance by the ambiguity — you only recognize the beat after the first few seconds pass.

As a composer, Lennon would tease the listener with similar surprises for the rest of his time as a Beatle (interestingly, not so much in his solo career), from the musically unrelated bridge that comes from out of nowhere at the two-minute mark in “I Am the Walrus” to the extra bass drum hit at 3:24 in “Revolution 1” (a bad edit by engineer Geoff Emerick that Lennon insisted be left in) to the occasional 2/4 and 3/4 measures tossed into the otherwise 4/4 “All You Need Is Love” — a song that also begins with the fanfare from the French national anthem, the Marseillaise, and ends with saxophones playing Glenn Miller’s “In the Mood” and strings playing “Greensleeves.”

There are scientific studies for pretty much everything, and it turns out that there’s a reason why we love musical surprises so much. According to a recent article published by Futurity, researchers at Canada’s prestigious McGill University believe that these bits of ear candy actually light up the brain’s reward center, same as traditional rewards such as food or money.

That may be the chemical explanation, but for me it’s a total visceral thing. All I know is that whenever I encounter a musical surprise, it brings a smile to my face. And one thing this world surely needs is more smiles!

Photo courtesy of Kyle Lehning

 

Check out Howard’s other postings.

Trends from CES® 2020

The beginning of any year is filled with promise from every walk of life. In the electronics business, there is no more exciting time thanks largely to one signature event: CES (the Consumer Electronics Show), held annually in Las Vegas. This is where the largest technology companies showcase their newest technologies and debut their soon-to-be-released products.

With more than 4,400 exhibitors and over 170,000 attendees from 160 countries, CES is one of the largest trade shows in the world. If you’re a fan of electronics — or even if you’re just curious about what kinds of new gadgets will be on sale in the coming months — then we’ve got you covered. Here are some of the hottest products to come out of this year’s show.

Get Smart

Back in December, Apple®, Google, Amazon and ZigBee (developer of wireless mesh networks) came together to create a smart home protocol called CHIP (Connected Home IP). This universal standard is meant to make smart devices — even those from different manufacturers — more compatible throughout the home, which is especially meaningful when it comes to Apple devices, since Apple has, up until now, been a closed-source company when it comes to software applications. Shortly before the show, Apple announced that it will release an open-source version of its Home app (which enables control of Home accessories) to accelerate the development of CHIP.

A room showcasing smart home features including smart lights, a smart TV, and several MusicCast audio products.
The Yamaha smart home room.

To demonstrate how the Apple HomeKit can work with a variety of products in a connected home, Yamaha presented a smart home room with Phillips® Hue smart lights, an LG™ smart TV and several MusicCast audio products, including two MusicCast 20 wireless speakers and a MusicCast 50 wireless speaker. The room showcased how a HomeKit hub can be used to create “scenes” throughout the home with customizable voice commands, such as “Hey Siri®, it’s movie time,” which turns on the TV and changes the lighting to set the mood for you to watch your favorite content after a long day at work. You can watch the full demo here.

If you’re in the market for a new TV, there are plenty to choose from on the market. Electronics manufacturer TCL has a TV that lets you integrate with Google apps like Google Maps™. You can search a Google Maps location on your TV and have it transfer seamlessly over to your smart phone once you’re ready to leave.

Samsung® is also launching an 8K Ultra QLED TV this year that has a feature called Multi View. This allows you to instantly cast your smartphone’s display onto the TV (all you have to do is tap it on the side of the TV) so you can, for example, watch a sports event live and see your social feed talking about it in real time, right next to it on the screen. For Apple users who might be concerned about it not working with Apple products, don’t worry — it’s compatible with both iOS and Android™ devices.

Fun and Games

Silver electric concept vehicle with futuristic design.
The Sony Vision-S electric concept car.

During its CES 2020 keynote, Sony™ surprised everyone by introducing its first car — the Sony Vision-S. Don’t get too excited though, as it’s not intended to be sold to the public. Instead, this electric concept vehicle will serve as an internal prototype to test the company’s future technologies and showcase what those technologies can do when utilized in one contained ecosystem. The car includes a panoramic screen built into the dash, as well as the company’s virtual object-based 360 Reality Audio, 33 sensors and a variety of side-view mirrors and 3D camera technology to project a “safety cocoon” — a safe zone surrounding the car thanks to its 360-degree camera views.

On the gaming front, Google has recently introduced Google Stadia™, a cloud-based gaming platform that lets users play without the need for a physical console. All you need are a wireless controller (it can be an official Stadia controller or one from another company) and a Chromecast with Google TV™ device.

Top of the Heap

Speaking of awards, each year, CTA (the Consumer Technology Association, responsible for running CES) gives companies the chance to compete for the CES Innovation Awards. The program honors outstanding design and engineering in consumer technology products. Given how many companies have been trending towards the connected home and the IoT (Internet of Things), we thought it would be helpful to mention some of those winners.

As an extension of its smart home security ecosystem, Arlo™ won an award for its Arlo Floodlight, said to be the first wire-free floodlight on the market. It has an integrated camera to add a layer of security to homes and can connect as part of the smart home through Arlo’s AI subscription-based service Arlo Smart. The camera features a 160-degree diagonal viewing angle and 2K HDR crisp video with color night vision capabilities.

For those looking to do presentations on the go, the Hachi Infinite is a portable short-throw projector that turns any flat surface into an interactive HD touchscreen of up to 100 inches. It lets you project onto a table or against a wall for added versatility, and also features voice control with Amazon Alexa.

That’s CES 2020 in a nutshell. From smart home innovations to gaming on the go and even a new car, it’s safe to say that we are entering an era of exciting possibilities. If you can’t attend CES next year, be sure to check back here for a recap of the latest trends.

Photographs courtesy of the author.

 

Read more related blog posts on how MusicCast can integrate with a smart home:

Five MusicCast App Features You May Not Know

How to Use Yamaha MusicCast with AirPlay 2

How to Use Actions on Google with Yamaha MusicCast

How to Use Alexa with MusicCast

Deconstructing Mallets: Find the Best Mallets for Your Percussion Section

Once upon a time, mallet choices were limited. The hardness of a mallet was the most dramatic way to change the sound of an instrument. Today, a variety of percussion implements are available, which has complicated the selection process.

The age-old “use-a-harder-stick” solution to fix ensemble issues is no longer the only or best option. Mallet manufacturers now consider a range of characteristics, which allows directors and percussionists to make appropriate and nuanced selections for the challenges presented by different music compositions.

The following guide will help illustrate how the different characteristics of mallets affect the sound of a keyboard instrument so that students and conductors can make more informed decisions when purchasing and selecting mallets.

Before we begin, I want to emphasize that mallet choice isn’t the only way to affect the sound of a percussion instrument. I highly recommend reading James Campbell’s chapter — “Teaching Young Percussionists to Make Musical Choices” — in “The Drums and Percussion Cookbook.” He thoroughly covers touch and articulation.

In many cases, going to extremes in mallet choice requires percussionists to use touch to negotiate undesired sounds, which can create challenges. In other cases, switching mallets alleviates problems presented by extreme variations of touch and articulation that your students may have. It’s best to consider both touch and mallet choice in tandem when selecting sounds for a piece of music.

Hardness

Yarn-wrapped, ball-shaped mallets with wood handles
Yarn-wrapped, ball-shaped mallets with wood handles

Mallet hardness affects how overtones will sound and largely controls how bright the overall sound will be. Harder mallets are brighter, and softer mallets are darker. This is largely due to the dampening effect softer sticks have on the higher frequencies of an instrument. For this same reason, harder sticks tend to obscure the fundamental pitch while softer mallets can lack clarity in busy textures.

It is common for percussionists and conductors to go to a harder mallet when they need more volume. This usually leads to a brittle sound that, although more audible, isn’t always the most appropriate. Harder mallets also run the risk of introducing a “click” that isn’t usually considered a desired tone. Additionally, harder mallets can lead to premature wear and intonation problems with the instrument over time. For these reasons, many players avoid brass mallets on crotales (antique cymbals) or bell kits made from aluminum; instead, they favor aluminum or hard plastic mallets.

Always remember that the mallet should never be harder than the bar of the instrument. For example, on rosewood xylophones, use plastic, not metal.

Core Material

Unwrapped rubber mallets
Unwrapped rubber mallets

The mallet head consists of a core and, in the case of wrapped mallets, a wrapping. The material of the core can influence the sound independently of its hardness. Cores are usually categorized as rubber (also known as latex) or plastic (also known as synthetic). Overall, synthetic cores tend to have a brighter and clearer attack with a more staccato sound, while rubber cores tend to have a warmer, more blended attack with a more tenuto sound.

Unwrapped mallets come in an ever-increasing number of materials, but ultimately fall into the following categories: plastic, rubber, wood and metal. Rubber is the considered the softest core material. Wood is typically harder than plastic, but warmer. Metal is the extreme in hardness for mallets and should be limited to steel instruments, in most cases.

Weight

A mallet’s weight largely determines how full the sound of the instrument will be. Lighter sticks tend to produce delicate and legato sounds more appropriate for solo passages. Heavier sticks produce fuller and bolder sounds better suited for ensemble situations. Heavier mallets also have a higher limit to how loud they can sound before being overplayed and creating a distorted sound.

Weight used to be largely an issue of core material, but manufactures have been using brass to add weight to mallet cores, which has led to mallets with very specific balances and weights.

Lift is a large part of a percussionist’s touch and, as you would imagine, heavier mallets require more effort to lift. This can limit how staccato a student can play at first. With younger students, there is a risk of injury due to strain or tension from using heavy mallets.

Head Shape and Size

The size and shape of the mallet head determines the amount of contact the mallet has with the instrument, which affects tone. A wider contact surface usually leads to a less pointed attack while a narrower contact surface tends to lead to a more pointed attack. If the shape stays the same (ball, barrel or disc), larger mallets naturally have more contact area as well as more weight. For marimba and vibraphone mallets, the shape applies to the core, but can usually still be seen through the wrapping.

Ball: The most popular mallet shape is ball. Most marimba mallets and many vibraphone mallets have a ball-shaped core. Consider this the middle ground for mallet shapes.

Mushroom: Mushroom-shaped mallets are often used with the vibraphone. They tend to provide a slightly more pointed sound than ball-shaped mallets.

Disc: Percussionists who want the most pointed sound usually choose disc-shaped mallets. Some manufacturers shape disc heads for specific effects. Due to their short stature, disc-shaped heads are often used to reduce a mallet’s weight without changing the contact area.

Barrel: Barrel- or egg-shaped mallets tend to have very broad sounds. Due to their typically large size, these shapes are often used to add weight to the mallet and are often paired with a hard material to generate an aggressive, full sound.

Wrap

Cord-wrapped, mushroom-shaped mallets with fiberglass handles
Cord-wrapped, mushroom-shaped mallets with fiberglass handles

The wrap around mallets intended for marimba, vibraphone and cymbals affects the contact sound of the mallet. Different wraps used to be associated with specific instruments, but that is no longer the case.

Yarn: Yarn softens the contact sound, yielding a slightly more legato or open sound. Mallets wrapped in yarn are best for solo playing. In ensemble settings, they may help blend the instrument into the ensemble or smooth out rolls. Percussionists should also consider how tightly wrapped the yarn is. Looser wrapping exaggerates the softening effect of the yarn and allows for a “multi-tonal” effect. Tighter wrapping creates a clearer sound. Some manufactures use different types of yarn to create different nuances. The variety of possible sounds is numerous, but fairly subtle in the ensemble context. Beware that yarn is prone to wearing quickly when overplayed or used on metal instruments like vibraphone and cymbals.

Cord: Cord tends to create a more immediate sound with slightly brighter overtones because it is harder and usually wrapped much tighter than yarn. Cord-wrapped mallets are often used with marimba and vibraphone in ensemble settings as the instrument opens up faster and sounds clearer without the need for a harder mallet. This material also holds up longer and can elicit sounds from a wider range of instruments.

Rubber: Rubber, a less common wrapping material, tends to produce the most immediate response and most noticeable contact sound. Rubber-wrapped mallets can be extremely helpful in particularly thick orchestrations. They also can be used to emulate the sound of traditional xylophones and marimbas.

Cloth: “Parachute” or cloth wrap is a style of mallet where a sheet of cloth is draped over the mallet head and tightly tied. This type of mallet usually falls somewhere between rubber and cord in sound production.

Handle

Many percussionists debate whether the handle of a mallet influences the sound. The main concern with handles is the feel of the mallet when playing.

Wood: Wood handles provide more control, particularly when playing with four mallet grips. Due to the rigidity of wood, it is often used to make longer handled mallets, which can provide more leverage or reach.

Rattan: Rattan, a material similar to bamboo, provides more give and tends to feel softer in the hands. This give is thought to make rattan more forgiving to a wider range of touches and techniques without compromising sound. Due to its flexibility and the presence of nodes, rattan’s practical length is shorter than wood’s. It is also prone to warping over time. This can be undone, but it does introduce an additional concern.

Fiberglass: Fiberglass provides even more flex than rattan but doesn’t warp. Fiberglass handles usually are built in a two-step design comprising a plastic or rubber handle and a fiberglass shaft. These are either loved or hated by players. In the band room, you may need to worry about splinters if the mallets are abused.

My Choices

In my experience instructing ensembles, I have found that the most useful wrapped mallet is a medium vibraphone mallet with cord wrapping and a rubber core. Vibraphone mallets tend to be heavier than marimba mallets, generating a sound that can be heard over the winds and other percussion instruments. The cord wrapping maintains a clear articulation without going to a harder core.

Medium or medium-soft yarn mallets of a fairly heavy weight may be the second most useful as they blend the sound of the keyboards more during ballads and moments with thin orchestration.

When expanding the mallet collection of your percussion section, I recommend buying contrasting mallets rather than several hardnesses of the same type. Teaching students to use their touch to get brighter and darker sounds helps fill the gaps in your inventory. From a musical perspective, you are more likely to have an appropriate tool for the moment if your collection consists of contrasting rather than similar mallets. From an educational perspective, you are giving your students a larger tool box, which makes the challenge of selecting the right sound more intellectually rigorous and musical than pairing hard and soft with loud or quiet, which is painfully common in band rooms.

Marching through Time

Marching bands are ingrained in our culture. You see them regularly at football games, school and college events, parades, military ceremonies and in organized competitions against each other. But how did they originate? In this article, we’ll take a closer look.

Two Varieties

Today in the United States, marching bands fall into two broad categories. One, referred to simply as “marching bands,” is what you’re likely to find at high schools, colleges, the military and in the competitive Bands of America program, which culminates annually in the BOA Grand National, Regional and Super Regional Championships.

Marine band participating in Memorial Day parade.
A military marching band.

The other is the drum and bugle corps (aka “drum corps”). Since 1972, this has mainly manifested itself in an organization called Drum Corps International (DCI), which has an extensive roster of corps nationwide and similarly holds annual championships every year.

Carolina Crown marching band performs at the 2019 DCI World Championship.
Carolina Crown at the 2019 DCI World Championship.

Ancient Origins

The juxtaposition of musical instruments and the military goes back to ancient times. Armies used percussion and woodwind instruments as signaling devices that could cut through the din of a battlefield and transmit basic commands to soldiers.

The earliest military marching bands that historians have documented were from the Ottoman Empire in the 13th century. The Ottomans conquered vast swaths of territory in Northern Africa, the Middle East and southern Europe and brought their marching band tradition with them.

Miniature painting depicting an Ottoman military marching band.
A depiction of an Ottoman military marching band.

In the centuries that followed, the concept of military marching bands spread into northern Europe and eventually made its way to the new world.

Revolutionary Ensembles

In the 1700s, military marching bands appeared in Revolutionary-era America in the form of fife and drum corps. Fifes are high-pitched wind instruments whose piercing tones are audible at a great distance. The drummers in these corps used rope-tension drums, which were large compared to contemporary marching drums.

A costumed fifer marches in July 4 parade.
The fife has a shrill tone that can be heard from far away.

Fife and drum corps usually consisted of just a handful of musicians — often teenagers too young to fight — and provided not only battlefield communication, but music for drills and for when soldiers were on the march.

By the time of the American Civil War, fife and drum corps added the bugle as an additional melodic instrument. In addition, the rope-tension drums of that era were smaller, making them easier to march with at faster tempos. In those days, tempos ranged between 92 and 110 bpm.

Paging Mr. Sousa

A modern Yamaha sousaphone.
A Yamaha sousaphone.

Thanks in large part to famed composer and conductor John Phillip Sousa, marching band music expanded in terms of repertoire and instrumentation towards the end of the 1800s. Sousa wrote many iconic marches, including “Semper Fidelis,” the Marine Corps’ official song. He’s also credited with inventing the Sousaphone, a variant of the tuba, but with a wider bell, and a body shape that’s easier to march with.

Sousa conducted such ensembles as the Marine Band, the President’s Own Band — which played at presidential inaugurations and other state occasions — and later his civilian marching band, the Sousa Band. During Sousa’s era, marching tempos got faster. A good example is his iconic composition, “Stars and Stripes Forever,” which features a 120 bpm tempo.

Into the 20th Century

Around a hundred years ago, competitive drum corps were born in the form of programs sponsored by the American Legion and Veterans of Foreign Wars® (VFW). The first such corps, called the Senior Corps, was open to any age so that World War I veterans could participate. Later, in the 1930s, Junior Corps were formed, which had a maximum age of 21. “From after World War I until the mid to late 1960s, drum corps didn’t change very much,” says Dennis DeLucia, the color commentator for DCI broadcasts and one of the first musicians elected to the DCI Hall of Fame.

Loosening Up

By around the late 1960s, many who were arranging the music and designing the shows for drum and bugle corps were starting to become frustrated by the restrictions of key, instrumentation and tempo in the drum corps world. “Under the rules of the American Legion and VFW, you could only play what you could carry,” explains DeLucia. “Mallet percussion instruments were banned prior to the formation of DCI.”

But things were beginning to change. “Starting in 1974,” says DeLucia, “DCI allowed you to use one marching xylophone and one set of marching bells. In 1978, they allowed a marching marimba and a marching vibraphone.”

A contemporary Yamaha marching xylophone.
A Yamaha marching xylophone.

In the early ’80s, DCI made a rule change that ushered in the era of pit percussion. This allowed corps to supplement their marching instrumentation with a group of stationary musicians, called the “front ensemble.” Initially, the so-called “pit” was limited to large percussion instruments that couldn’t be carried while marching, but amplification was legalized in 2004, opening the gates to instruments that needed to be miked to be loud enough, such as marimbas. Electric guitars, electric and upright basses, and other “rhythm section” instruments were also approved at that time, followed in 2009 by electronic instruments such as synthesizers.

Enter Yamaha

Yamaha became a force in the marching band market in the United States in the 1980s. One of the reasons was the company’s “air-seal system” for drum construction. It offered superior consistency for making drum shells perfectly round — important for the drums to be easy to tune and to keep their tuning. For school band directors, those were critical attributes.

A silver Yamaha marching snare drum.
A Yamaha marching snare drum.

Another milestone occurred in the late 1980s, when bands and drum corps started to adopt a new type of snare drum head made of Kevlar or other types of laminated fabric — an innovation that also allowed the snares to be tuned much higher. However, these heads put more stress on the drums themselves, causing issues with breakage. In response, Yamaha was one of the leaders in developing a new drum design that could handle the higher-tension heads.

Drummers in elaborate costumes with matching drums march through stadium.
Yamaha pioneered color-coordinated drums to match uniforms.

The company also made a considerable effort to find out what marching musicians needed out of their gear and developing products to match those needs — an initiative that continues to this very day. “They would bring some of their leading marching artists to the factory for two or three days at a time and literally work on shell depths for the tenor drums,” DeLucia says. “Does a 6″ tenor shell work better than a 6 1/2″ shell? What’s the best head configuration? All of those kinds of things were developed with useful input from the best marching instructors and players.”

In 1992, Yamaha became the first drum manufacturer to release drums in a variety of colors. Now, bands and corps had the option to purchase drums that matched the color of their uniforms. With the increased importance of the show aspects of marching music, particularly during competitive events, the ability to color-coordinate the instruments with uniforms was, and is, extremely important.

Want to learn more? Check out these related blog postings:

History of Drum Corps and Yamaha

Madison Scouts and Yamaha — Marching Together Since 1985

Preparing for a Drum Corps International Audition

Nine Things To Know Before Buying a Drumline

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha marching instruments.

Preparing Your Tracks for Mastering

People often ask me how I got into mastering. I was a guy that played in bands my whole life, plus when I turned 18, I started working for IBM because I was also really fascinated by computers. The two interests led me to become involved in early computer audio.

What really sealed the deal for me was when I first saw a vinyl lacquer being cut, some 20 years ago. It really blew my mind. A friend took me to see the great Richard Simpson at his mastering studio in LA. It changed everything and I feel lucky that he let me be part of the whole experience. I went back there later that same week and basically begged him to teach me how to master. Later on, he came to work at Infrasonic, my mastering studio, and eventually I inherited his 1956 Neumann lathe. I spent a couple of years restoring it and that is the lathe we use in our Nashville studio now.

My mastering process today uses a combination of analog and digital gear. My main digital software is Steinberg WaveLab, which I’ve been using for decades. Up until recently I’ve been primarily running it on PC, but in our studios we have so many machines that we now run it on a combination of Macs® and PCs. I love the fact that it’s easy to use and works seamlessly on both platforms.

I use a significant amount of analog gear as well, and integrate it directly into Wavelab. A common scenario is that I will assemble the record there, do subtractive or corrective EQ in the digital world, and then send the signal to my favorite analog EQ processors. It’s a perfect combination for my needs.

Mastering engineer in studio using Wavelab 10 to master audio.

So I got into mastering the old school way, first by cutting lacquers, and then adding computers into the process, along the way doing some audio engineering as well, both recording and mixing. A lot of people ask me what the differences are between mastering, recording and mix engineers. Well, typically, when you’re recording and mixing you’re working on one song at a time and concentrating on making that the best it can be. The mastering engineer’s job is to compile all of the individual mixes, knit them into a cohesive listening experience and deliver the final result for vinyl cutting, CD duplication and digital streaming. A mastering engineer is working on the project as a whole, trying to envision the listening experience rather than just focusing on an individual song.

That’s the background. Now let’s take a closer look at a topic that comes up often: how you should prepare your tracks for mastering.

Bus Processing

As a guy that used to be a mixing engineer, I love bus processing. I’m all about EQ and compression on the master bus. With that in mind, my philosophy is that you shouldn’t overprocess the mix. If you’re unsure about anything, do a mix without that processing. For instance, if you decide that you want to use limiting or compression on the bus and are not entirely sure if it’s right, it’s good to do a version without it … just in case. And if you are using mix bus compression and EQ, you should turn those on relatively early in the mixing process, because they will affect the sonic choices you make.

The same applies to bus limiting. I usually don’t recommend applying brickwall limiting when mixing, although I work with a number of top-notch mix engineers who almost always do so, and they do a really good job with it too. Typically, though, they are working in expensive rooms using high-end gear and listening through really great monitors. If you’re relatively new to mixing and your gear isn’t top-of-the-line — or if you’re mixing really hot — you might be tying the mastering engineer’s hands by preventing them from applying any necessary corrective measures to make the track sound good because everything is already cooked into the mix. My mantra is: don’t make it too loud, just make it sound good.

To Stem or Not to Stem?

The use of stems for mastering is another hot button for me. I typically don’t recommend creating stems [i.e., a set of submixes instead of a single overall mix] for mastering sessions. I feel a mixing engineer simply needs to create the best mix they can, and that a mastering engineer’s job is not to recreate the mix — it’s to enhance it and bring it to its fullest potential. Sure, I’ve mastered from stems when needed, but that’s usually a case where the artist needs to do a radio edit or something. But all in all, I don’t feel you should do stem mixing unless you absolutely have to.

 Photographs courtesy of the author.

 

Check out Pete’s other blogs.

Click here for more information about Steinberg WaveLab.

Ultra Hi-Fi, Part 4: Going Beyond Perfection

Surrealist artist Salvador Dali once said, “Have no fear of perfection. You’ll never reach it.”

When Yamaha product manager Susumu Kumazawa was tasked with designing the two-channel Yamaha Flagship Hi-Fi 5000 Series, he began with the intent of aiming for perfection. What he soon discovered would change his own definition of what perfection was.

The “perfect” audio system is mostly subjective and is largely based on the individual taste of the listener and the type of music being listened to. That said, there are a number of key factors that must be taken into consideration when creating any Hi-Fi audio system: clarity, timbre, dynamics, definition, range and envelopment. From the electrical design to the aesthetic to the final sound quality, each element of an audio system must be scrutinized over and over until the direction is clear — not to mention the need to differentiate the system from those being offered by competitors. But sometimes you have to look beyond perfection to achieve your goal.

In this fourth and final installment of the Ultra Hi-Fi blog series of postings, we’ll explore the process that Kumazawa and the engineering team followed from concept to design to final product to create the Flagship Hi-Fi 5000 Series.

The Price of Perfection

Man in professional attire gives presentation on Hi-Fi 5000 series.
Yamaha product manager Susumu Kumazawa explains his concept for the 5000 Series.

One of the key concepts Kumazawa knew the system had to deliver was True Sound — the idea that there should be no barrier between the listener and the music, and that the listener should be able to hear the music just as the artist intended. To achieve this, he felt that he had to first identify his own personal connection to music. Accordingly, he turned his ear to the past and tapped into his own personal nostalgia.

In 2006, Yamaha introduced the A-S2000 amplifier and CD-S2000 CD player — products managed by Kumazawa, who took them to Europe as part of the official launch. However, the fruits of his labors did not meet with unqualified approval. “Some European reviewers said, “Your sound is perfect. But it’s not enjoyable. It doesn’t have musicality,”” Kumazawa recalls.

“Before I was an engineer, when I was a student, I loved music,” he continues. “[The philosophy was] “no music, no life.” I struggled with how to express enjoyment in music through products. But I’m an engineer, so I tried with technology to express musicality. So, before I design equipment, the concept is very, very important.”

Inspired by Music

To better understand how people get enjoyment from listening to music, he spoke with the chief Yamaha piano designer about sound and music from their respective viewpoints. “He said something interesting about openness,” Kumazawa remembers. “If there is a classical pianist playing in a huge concert hall, and you’re sitting at the top row of the hall, you should be able to hear them play pianissimo [very softly] but still have the sound reach you perfectly.”

Square black amplifier and preamplifier with five vents on top of each.
The five lines of a stave in sheet music are represented in the vents of the C-5000 (left) and M-5000 (right).

This sense of openness would become one of three keystone ideas that Kumazawa would use to craft his audio goals with the 5000 Series, the other two being emotional connection and groove. He became convinced that the design had to feel special to the end user in the same way playing a musical instrument does when someone plays it. “Since we make musical instruments, touch is very important. This is why our products need to have a tangible interface,” he says. Once those concepts were in place, he was able to determine the necessary design elements. The C-5000 preamplifier and M-5000 amplifier, for example, offer a sense of rhythm with their physical design. The physical embodiment of music is represented by the vents on the top of each unit, which are similar to the lines of a stave in sheet music.

Challenge Accepted

When it came time to fabricate the actual components, it took 19 engineers in total, working closely with the Yamaha Research & Development and Production teams to create the four 5000 Series products.

Square printed circuit board.
C-5000 PCB.

There were several challenges that the engineers faced. One of the most daunting involved the construction of the left and right PCBs (Printed Circuit Boards) in the C-5000 preamp. In the early phase of development, the audio was not representing the soundstage correctly. The team made a breakthrough by unifying the two sides mechanically. This further emphasized the impact componentry can have on sound quality. “If you change the material of the circuit board, the sound changes,” Kumazawa explains. “Any part that is changed alters the sound.”

From initial concept to finished product, it took eight years to complete the NS-5000 speakers, three years for the C-5000 and M-5000, and five years for the GT-5000. And in order to showcase the uniqueness of the concept, no other Hi-Fi components were used as a comparison when building these products.

“Technically, we accomplished a perfect balanced audio transmission circuit, from cartridge to speaker output,” Kumazawa says proudly, “and our being part of a music company is clearly expressed by our system as a whole. Our motivation is that music should be expressed with more musicality. [This is why] we will keep challenging [ourselves].”

 

Check out our Ultra Hi-Fi Series blog articles:

Part 1: The Difference a Tonearm Makes

Part 2: The Difference Made by Speaker Driver Materials

Part 3: The Difference Made by a Balanced Signal Path

 

Click here for more information about the Yamaha 5000 Flagship Hi-Fi Series.

Effective Time Management for Keyboard Practice

Man in button-down shirt and cargo pants practices on an electric keyboard.

Like anything in life, when you are trying to achieve a goal, you need to be organized and have a clear sense of what you want to accomplish, and you have to go about achieving it methodically. It’s not enough to put in your 10,000 hours: you need to be targeted with your time. While we are all different and don’t necessarily share the same musical goals, I’d like to offer a number of suggestions that can help you effectively schedule your practice time and musical activities.

Prepare for Success

Practicing needs to be done with your full concentration, and without distractions. Here are some tips to make sure your situation is conducive to that.

  • Is your music space private, or do people walk through the area? It’s best to be alone. If other people have to be around, can you set things up so that you’re facing a wall, with possible distractions behind you?
  • Can you wear headphones so as to not be disturbed? (This also has the benefit of you not disturbing others.) All digital keyboard instruments provide headphone jacks. Practice time is the perfect time to use them.
  • Are you sitting in front of a computer screen? If so, turn off your email, browser and any sort of notification system that can distract you.
  • Likewise, turn off your phone, or set it to silent. You can return messages and calls later.

I have found — and many experts agree — that consistent dedication to practice on a daily basis is much better than a “cram” session or two per week. Both your fingers and your brain will absorb and master new tasks better when working on them over multiple sessions. So, if possible, try to carve out time every day for your practice regime. You may even find that being able to put in three or four brief practice sessions over the course of a day produces better results than trying to sit at the keyboard for many hours.

The goal is to always be practicing with full concentration and clear purpose, so after working on a repetitive task for a period of time (i.e., playing scales or a specific passage from a piece of music), try to get up for a few minutes and clear your head before moving on to the next phase. You’ll find that taking even short breaks can help you to return to the keyboard with renewed focus and purpose.

Define Your Goals

No matter what technical level you are at, what style of music you like to play, or what musical goals you have, these are the most common tasks that we keyboardists face:

  • Practicing scales, technical exercises and other chop-building activities
  • Learning/practicing compositions chosen to help improve your chops (i.e., Bach Inventions, Chopin Études, Bill Evans jazz transcriptions, etc.)
  • Working on stylistic elements like walking bass lines, chord voicings and inversions, etc.
  • Developing hand independence
  • Learning standards and other general purpose tunes as well as repertoire for specific playing situations (i.e., a new band, a worship service, etc.)
  • Memorizing repertoire
  • Developing transposition skills by playing tunes in different keys (this also helps in truly understanding a song’s harmonic and melodic structures)
  • Learning solos from recordings
  • Developing soloing concepts over chord changes
  • Refining rhythmic skills by playing along with recordings or backing tracks/drum grooves
  • Improving reading/sight-reading

Which of these are you facing? Think about it and write them down as a list. If you just say “all of them!” you need to prioritize and decide on a reasonable number of tasks to start with: You can always adjust your goals and add others later as you improve in some areas. Bear in mind that sometimes a gig (or something in your non-musical life) comes up that takes priority for a week or two; when things return to “normal,” you can return to your ongoing studies.

Establish Your Practice Routine

Now you can take your available practice time each day and break it up into the tasks you need to cover. Don’t forget that every good practice session needs to start with some simple warmup before you even touch the keyboard! This only takes a few minutes, and is well worth the time.

Once warmed up, I like to do some slow to medium exercises to get comfortable. Often I begin by just playing some scales at a moderate tempo. (A previous “Well-Rounded Keyboardist” column offered some suggestions for ways to practice scales.) A common trap you might fall into (I know I do!) is spending too much of my time on this task, so I suggest this take up no more than about 20% of your practice time. I tend to pick a few keys for each scale on a given day, and then play it in a few different keys the next day before returning to the first day’s keys, and so on. This way, I am getting some variety as well as some repetition.

Let’s assume you are approaching learning a new piece of music. This activity is going to change from day to day, as you first need to suss out the piece (learn the notes, the rhythms, fingerings etc.) and then later you will likely divide it into sections that you’ll play repetitively. Obviously you can’t do all this in one session, so I suggest you allot another 30% or so of your available time to this task. That still leaves you with around 50% of your available practice time to spend on other goals in your defined list.

Last but not least, whatever you do in your practice sessions, don’t forget to carve out some time to just play freely and have some fun!

Photo courtesy of the author.

 

Check out our other Well-Rounded Keyboardist postings.

Click here for more information about Yamaha keyboard instruments.

Reimagining the Way Student Violins Are Made

The violin is one of the oldest instruments still in wide use all over the world. In fact, the earliest versions of these stringed instruments closely resemble what you see being played in your community’s orchestra today. The traditions of violinmaking have been passed down for generations, and some of the most sought-after vintage violins are from the 18th and 19th centuries.

Illustration of Antonio Stradivari examining a violin.
Antonio Stradivari, one of the most famous violin-makers.

The growth of school music programs in the 1950s sparked by the post-war baby boom caused greater demand for musical instruments in general, and violins in particular. Unfortunately, the age-old and venerated tradition of skilled luthiers making violins by hand gave way to more automated processes in the form of woodworking machinery to speed production and meet the increased demand. The result of these processes was a flooding of the market with violins that were out-of-tune, hard to play, and fragile. Ever since then, many students — and their parents — have had to choose between a cheap violin that may last only a few years and a very expensive, luthier-made instrument.

Precision-cut student violin with spruce top.

Nearly a decade ago, Yamaha sought to bridge the gap by providing those looking for a high-quality, durable student violin with an affordable instrument that had excellent playability and warm sound to inspire the next generation of young musicians. The result of those years of development is the YVN Model 3 family of violins, which embody the most significant technical advancements in violinmaking since the advent of the instrument hundreds of years ago.

Building upon methods pioneered by Yamaha in the manufacture of percussion and wind instruments, the YVN Model 3 is built with the accuracy normally associated with much more expensive hand-built models … and, as a bonus, they are more environmentally friendly.

Traditional methods of violinmaking involve the carving of solid wood into the tops and backs of the violin, yielding wasted material and inconsistencies caused by climate and material variations. The YVN Model 3utilizes the thickness and arch shape of traditionally made instruments, but its proprietary graduated “press-formed” spruce top offers exceptional resonance, and the three-layer construction of the tops and backs uses just one-third of the amount of wood previously consumed. These techniques give the instrument more consistency as it ages and when experiencing environmental changes such as alterations in temperature and humidity.

Illustration demonstrating Yamaha's proprietary “press-formed” spruce top versus traditional carving.

Whereas luthier-built violins rely on handcrafted techniques to build a violin, the YVN Model 3 is made with computer-assisted craftsmanship. This ensures that these violins are easier to service than traditional string instruments. Because every part — including those that have been historically difficult to repair — is constructed with a high degree of precision, repair and replacement are simple tasks, making it both faster and more cost-effective to keep a Model 3 in playing condition. Gone are the days when custom work was required to fix simple violin mishaps!

 

Click here for more information about the YVN Model 3 family of violins.

Hans Zimmer

There is no bigger name in film scoring than Hans Zimmer. With an Academy Award®, four Grammys® and two Golden Globes® to his name, Hans is the head of the film music division at DreamWorks studios and one of the many music professionals and recording artists worldwide who use Steinberg Cubase. In this video, he describes his custom-built studio and talks about his long relationship with Cubase, focusing on one of its key advantages: giving composers the tools to work with classical orchestras, thus supporting the creation of new orchestral works for film scores.

Check out these related articles.

Click here to learn more about Steinberg Cubase.

Introducing the NX Series

Nylon-string guitars are a completely different animal than steel-string or electric guitars, right?

Well, that’s been the conventional wisdom … until now. But with the recent introduction of the Yamaha NX Series, you may have to reorient your thinking. That’s because these six innovative acoustic-electric nylon-string guitars have been developed with the needs of today’s performer in mind, with contemporary body styles and modern preamp and pickup systems.

Light wooden, nylon string guitar.
Yamaha NTX5.

If you’re an electric or steel-string player looking to explore the beauty of nylon-string sounds, you’ll want to check out the three NTX models — the NTX1, NTX3 and NTX5. They all have a slimmer neck profile, narrower nut width and thinner body than a typical classical guitar, thus providing a more familiar playing experience. In addition, their 22-fret necks (24 frets in the case of the top-of-the-line NTX5) extend their range beyond that of standard nylon-string instruments.

Light wooden, nylon string guitar.
Yamaha NCX5.

If you’re already used to playing classical guitar, the three NCX models — the NCX1, NCX3 and NCX5 — have a traditional neck profile and width, along with a standard nylon-string guitar body depth, but their advanced electronics ensure superior amplified sound.

All NTX and NCX guitars come in a variety of finishes and have solid tops of selected woods, including solid European spruce on the NTX5 and NCX5 models:

Two sets of 3 acoustic guitars.
The Yamaha NTX1 (left) and NCX1 (right) in various finishes.

The NTX3, NTX5, NCX3 and NCX5 models incorporate the Yamaha Atmosfeel™ preamp / pickup system, which provides consistently balanced and natural sound even at full performance volumes. It’s accessed via three small knobs on the side of the guitar (Mic Blend, Master Volume and Treble EQ), allowing you to quickly dial in the desired settings, but under the hood there are three distinct components:

– An integrated undersaddle piezo pickup with individual string sensors that capture only the mid and low frequencies, thus eliminating the characteristic brittleness of piezo pickups.

– A unique synthetic sheet transducer that captures the highs.

– An internal microphone that captures overall body resonance and “airiness”.

NTX1 and NCX1 models incorporate the same integrated piezo pickup, along with preamps featuring 3-band equalizers with adjustable mid frequencies. But whichever model you choose, Yamaha craftsmanship ensures that all NX Series guitars have exceptional playability and tone.

Want to know what top guitarists Tim Pierce, Tariqh Akoni, Andy Abad, Mike Adams, Trev Lukather and Destiny Petrel think of the new NX Series? Check out the video:

Click here to learn more about Yamaha NX Series guitars.

 

Stay up to date with Yamaha Guitars:

Facebook

Instagram

Twitter

Yamaha Guitar Development site

Childlike Wonder

“Why don’t you grow up?”

I think we’ve all had this disparaging remark (or something similar) hurled at us by a friend, foe, relative or significant other at one time or another.

Well, there’s actually a good reason why at least part of you shouldn’t grow up.

It turns out that the childlike sense of wonder we all enjoy in our growing years can help us in our work and creativity by keeping things fresh and fun.

How do you actually go about taking that wonder and turning it into something you can use as an adult? It’s not complicated: Slow it down. Keep things uncomplicated. Be playful. And, perhaps most importantly, keep learning.

Slow It Down

We all know how fast our world moves. But by purposely slowing your mind down, you can more easily open it up to new ideas. A Psychology Today article by Greg Levoy entitled 7 Ways to Spark Your Sense of Wonder recommends that the reader do exactly that, citing a book called Wanderlust, that, in the author’s words, “talks about a peculiar fashion in mid 19th-century Paris, in which strollers sometimes took turtles for walks in the parks, the better to slow their pace and maximize the connoisseurship of their amblings.” While we probably won’t be walking turtles, the point is clear. Just a few days ago I was deeply challenged by a piece of music I was writing, and I made a conscious decision to slow everything down in my mind. Sure enough, it opened me up to go in a successful new direction.

Keep Things Uncomplicated

Children keep things simple because they know no better. It’s an approach I try to take as often as possible, because in the world of writing music for television or film, one of the golden rules is that you can’t step on the dialog, ever. I recently did a session with a co-writer / orchestrator. She wrote a great melody, but I found myself telling her, “Perfect! Now take that and write the same thing with half the notes.” At first she laughed, but you know what? It worked. The final result had a two-note melody that kept the piece spacious and effective … and it achieved the goal of not interfering with the dialog in any way. While it’s not always the case, sometimes less is more.

Be Playful

Multi-ethnic group of school children playing on school playground.
Remember these days?

Kids in a playground are the picture of innocence. They’re simply laughing, running, jumping and playing, with no sense of inhibition or self-consciousness. In the same way, one of the joys of sitting down with an instrument is to be playful. Sometimes I’ll pick up my guitar and just play, without intent or purpose. Similarly, if I’m in a room with some musicians and the idea is fighting us, I find it useful to step back from the seriousness and just play — usually some heavy riff like “Whole Lotta Love” or “Walk This Way,” just to lighten up the energy and break the tension. More often than not, we can then go back to our mission and get the work done … and with a happier, more positive feel.

Keep Learning

Children are sponges for information and knowledge from those who are smarter than they are. Levoy’s article recommends that you “seek out displays of mastery and genius. Immerse yourself in the works of anyone who’s won a Pulitzer, Nobel, Tony, Grammy, Oscar, Olympic or MacArthur award. Stop and stare whenever you enter grand lobbies and atriums. Get a season pass to the art museum. Put the Astronomy Picture of the Day website on the toolbar of your computer.”

A 2018 Time magazine special edition on “The Science Of Creativity” included an article by renowned Leonardo DaVinci biographer Walter Isaacson entitled Learning from Leonardo. In it, Isaacson notes that, “At a certain point in life, most of us quit puzzling over everyday phenomena. We might savor the beauty of a blue sky, but we no longer wonder why it is that color. Leonardo (DaVinci) did. So did Einstein, who wrote to a friend, “You and I never cease to stand like curious children before the great mystery into which we were born.” We should be careful to never outgrow our wonder years or to let our children do so.” Seems to me that DaVinci and Einstein were onto something!

Sometimes we need to be reminded that life, music and playing an instrument can and should be fun. While many of us take our jobs and careers seriously, there’s always room to simplify, to be playful and to keep learning. By retaining that childlike sense of wonder and applying it to our individual crafts, we can push forward while looking backwards.

 

Check out Rich’s other postings.

Using Solo During Live Mixing

You may have noticed that your mixing console has buttons labeled PFL, AFL, SOLO or CUE. All have the basic function of allowing you to hear a single channel (or bus) in isolation (something called soloing), but they also differ in important ways and have multiple usages. In this article, we’ll describe each, and tell you how to use them in live sound.

PFL

PFL is an abbreviation for “Pre Fader Listen” (or “Pre Fader Level”), and it’s a feature found on most mixing consoles designed for live sound. You’ll usually find a PFL button located near the fader of every input channel. When you press it, the sound from that one channel is routed to the headphone jack (often summed to mono, even if it’s a stereo channel), and all other signals are muted in the headphones. (If the mixer has a “monitor” or “cue” output jack, the PFL signal can usually be routed there, either instead of, or in addition to, the headphone jack.)

There’s also normally an LED associated with each PFL button so you can see at a glance which channels are being soloed; some consoles even have a warning light that blinks whenever one or more PFL buttons are pressed, so that you’ll know what you’re hearing in your headphones is different from what’s being heard in the main FOH (Front of House) mix. Turning off PFL is easy: All you have to do is press the button(s) a second time.

The key thing to remember is this: PFL does not isolate the channel in the main left/right mix; it only does so in the headphones (and/or a “monitor” or “cue” output). In other words, the sound coming from the PA during a show won’t be affected if you hit one of these buttons.

Pre Fader Listen buttons and associated LED lights.
PFL buttons and associated LEDs.

PFL can be helpful in a variety of situations. For one thing, it allows you to instantly identify whether or not a particular microphone or instrument is connected to your mixer. Simply put on your headphones and press the associated channel’s PFL button. If you don’t hear anything and the musician is playing or singing, there’s nothing connected there. PFL is also a great way to check wireless microphones before a show to make sure they are working!

Or suppose you’re mixing a show and you suddenly hear a hum through the PA system. As the old saying goes, “the show must go on,” so you can’t just stop the musicians and listen to each channel separately in an effort to find the problem. However, if you PFL each channel one at a time, you’ll be able to quickly find the source of the noise — and without interrupting or interfering with the show in any way.

Most mixers, including Yamaha MG and MGP Series models, allow you to PFL more than one channel at a time, which can be useful if you need to hear how two channels are interacting with each other. But remember that the signal you’ll hear in your headphones is pre-fader — so there’s no point in trying to create a mix by pressing PFL on a bunch of channels.

PFL also helps with setting input gains correctly — an important part of live sound called gain staging. Here’s how it works: The input channels on many mixers (including Yamaha MG Series models) provide a two-color LED to show input signal, where you’ll see green for “signal present” and red for “overload.” That’s useful, but there may be times when you want a more detailed view of the input level, like when you’re setting the gain on the microphone for a dynamic lead vocalist. Pressing the PFL button on a channel temporarily “borrows” the main left/right meter and reassigns it to that input channel, giving you a more accurate way to set the input gain. When you turn off PFL, the main left/right meter reverts to showing signal for the main left/right mix.

PFL channel’s input level indicated on the main meter with LED lights.
Pressing a PFL button enables you to see that channel’s input level on the main meter. (Note the indicator at the bottom of the meter.)

By the way, since PFL is pre-fader, you can actually have a channel fader all the way down while you set the input level, then raise it when you are confident that the input level is set properly.

AFL

AFL, which stands for “After Fader Listen” (or “After Fader Level”), is a function related to PFL, though it’s less commonly used and is usually applied to output buses (that is, collections of outputs) such as subgroups, aux send masters and stereo or mono master outputs, as opposed to individual channels. AFL, which is found on Yamaha MG and MGP Series mixers, is a great way to hear which channels are contributing to an output bus. For example, if you press AFL on the Aux 1 output of a Yamaha MGP32X, you’ll hear all of the channels that are being sent to Aux 1, which is really handy when you want to preview a monitor mix. Similarly, pressing AFL on a subgroup will allow you to hear all of the signals that have been assigned to that subgroup.

AFL function shown for the aux, subgroup, mono, and stereo masters.
Yamaha MGP24X mixers provide AFL for the aux, subgroup, mono, and stereo masters.

SOLO

Some mixing consoles simply offer buttons labeled “SOLO” instead of “PFL” or “AFL.” In those cases, you need to carefully check the documentation to determine if these are PFL or AFL. A word of caution: If channel solo buttons are AFL, they operate post-fader, meaning that the channel fader must be raised in order to hear the isolated signal in the headphones — which also means that the associated signal might be heard in the house mix.

In addition, if channel soloing on a particular console is AFL, pressing the SOLO button temporarily shows that channel’s input level on the main left/right meter, but the meter will be accurate only if the channel fader is set to “0” — that is,“unity” gain. (See our Tools of the Trade blog on gain staging for more information.)

CUE

Yamaha TF Series mixers provide CUE buttons for all input and output channels instead of PFL, AFL or SOLO. Pressing CUE on an input channel works the same as PFL, but you can choose pre- or post-fader listen (i.e., PFL or AFL) for the output channels. This gives you the option of listening to an output bus either before or after the output fader, enabling you to preview a monitor mix in your headphones before you send the signal to an onstage monitor. There’s also a choice of Mix Cue (where multiple channels can be cued at the same time) or Last Cue (where only one channel may be cued at a time).

Cue function shown beneath each channel on the monitor.
Yamaha TF Series mixers provide a Cue function on every channel.

SIP

Last but not least, be aware that some mixers (mostly those designed for recording and not live sound) have a feature called “solo-in-place” (SIP), which, unlike PFL, does affect the main left/right mix. If you’re doing a live show and you see buttons labeled that way, approach with extreme caution!

 

Check out our other Tools of the Trade postings

NAMM 2020 Highlights

Every January, the entire musical instruments industry — manufacturers, dealers, artists, fans and the merely curious — convenes in Anaheim, California for the annual event.

If you weren’t able to make it to the 2020 show, these were some of the hottest new offerings from Yamaha.

YC61 Stage Keyboard

Reproducing authentic organ sound, control and expressiveness in a mobile package has long been a Holy Grail for keyboard players. The YC61 Stage Keyboard summons this spirit into the 21st century, with a newly developed Virtual Circuitry Modeling (VCM) tone generator that models the behavior of vintage electronics for an authentic tonewheel organ sound, along with a new VCM Rotary Speaker effect that replicates the two-speed spinning speaker typically used to amplify these organs. Organists will appreciate familiar controls such as drawbars and percussion switches, as well as the ability to customize “under the hood” parameters such as drawbar leakage, key click and rotor speed for an expressive and unique sound.

But the YC61 goes beyond organ sounds. Two comprehensive “Keys” sections offer authentic acoustic pianos, soulful electric pianos, realistic strings and brass, analog-style synths and more, plus dedicated effects like delay, chorus and distortion. And thanks to its aluminum construction, the YC61 is as rugged and roadworthy as it is light in weight — under 16 pounds!

Black electronic keyboard.
Open-bodied upright bass.

SLB300SK Silent Bass™

The SLB300SK Silent Bass leads the next generation of electric upright basses, with advancements that allow the bassist to control their sound with the press of a button. The original design of the Silent Bass gave players a true ergonomic feel by including all the touch points of an acoustic upright bass. Newly incorporated Studio Response Technology (SRT) allows the SLB300SK to model an acoustic bass played through different high-end acoustic microphones, ranging from the clear, warm sound of a dynamic microphone to the well-balanced rich timbre of classic vintage vacuum-tube microphones.

The SLB300SK can be broken down into an easily transportable “subway friendly” instrument that can be packed into a TSA case without fear of being damaged en route. It also allows the player to perform in places where they may have previously feared to bring an expensive acoustic instrument, such as an outdoor gig on a hot, humid day.

NX Series Guitars

NAMM saw the debut of the new NX Series of nylon-string acoustic-electric guitars. The three NTX models (NTX1, NTX3 and NTX5) are designed to make it easy for electric and steel-string acoustic guitar players to add the warmth and beauty of nylon-string sounds to their tonal palettes. They have slimmer bodies, shallower neck profiles, narrower fingerboards and longer necks than most classical guitars, providing a more familiar playing experience. The three NCX models (NCX1, NCX3 and NCX5) have classical-style neck profiles and fingerboards and are designed for experienced nylon-string players in search of superior amplified sound.

Two spruce acoustic-electric guitars.
Yamaha NCX5 (left), NTX5 (right).

The NTX3, NTX5, NCX3 and NCX5 models incorporate the Yamaha Atmosfeelpreamp / pickup system for consistently balanced and natural amplified sound. An integrated undersaddle piezo pickup with individual string sensors captures only the mid and low frequencies (eliminating the characteristic brittleness of piezo pickups), while a unique synthetic sheet transducer captures the highs and an internal microphone captures overall body resonance and “airiness.” NTX1 and NCX1 guitars incorporate the same integrated piezo pickup, along with preamps featuring 3-band equalizers with adjustable mid frequencies. Careful wood selection combined with renowned Yamaha craftsmanship results in instruments of exceptional playability and tone, and all NX guitars have solid tops, including solid European spruce on the NTX5 and NCX5 models.

SBP0F4H Stage Custom Hip Drum Set

The new SBP0F4H Stage Custom Hip drum set is a compact version of the Yamaha Stage Custom Birch, one of the most popular venue backline kits the world over. Designed for use in multiple genres and by a wide variety of drummers (such as street performers, educators, hybrid players using DJ/electronic gear and home recording studio musicians), this set is also a great at-home practice solution with low volume setups.

Black drum set with bass drum, two tom drums, snare drum, two cymbals & a hi-hat.

The Stage Custom Hip utilizes 100% birch 6-ply shells and includes a 20″ x 8″ bass drum for a deep low end as well as smaller footprint, a 13″ x 5″ snare, a 10″ x 5″ rack tom and a 13″ x 8″ floor tom that can be used as a snare tom, allowing drummers to explore new sounds with this one-of-a-kind drum set configuration. Additional features include steel triple flange hoops and a compact single tom holder for easy transportation. Stage Custom Hip Series drum kits are available in three beautiful finishes: Natural Wood, Raven Black and Matte Surf Green.

P22 SILENT Piano™

NAMM saw an announcement from Yamaha about several innovative upgrades to the company’s venerable P22 Upright Piano, which has been widely used by schools and music educators for nearly half a century. For one thing, a redesigned music rack area allows the entire width of the P22 to support sheet music — vital when an instructor or student is juggling multiple pieces. In addition, the fallboard now incorporates a soft-close mechanism to prevent dropping; instead, it slowly glides to the closed position even if someone attempts to slam it on purpose, thus protecting both errant fingers and the piano itself.

In addition, the P22 can now be fitted with optional Yamaha SC2 SILENT Piano technology, ideal for quiet practice or in a lab where multiple pianos are located in the same room. When activated, the sound no longer comes from the strings being struck but instead comes from a high-quality digital tone generator featuring the voices of the world-class Yamaha CFX and legendary Bösendorfer Imperial concert grand pianos, with accurate reproduction of all internal resonances, ensuring realism. The SC2 SILENT Piano system can also record performances internally or onto a USB thumb drive — a perfect way to evaluate students’ progress — and can interface to computers as well as the Yamaha Smart Pianist app. Dual headphone jacks make side-by-side practice possible, and the P22 SC2 can also output audio to a music lab system such as the Yamaha MLC-200.

Upright studio piano.

PSRSX900/700 Arranger Workstations

Incorporating both content and powerful features from the flagship Yamaha Genos Digital Workstation keyboard, the new PSR-SX700 and PSR-SX900 Arranger Workstation keyboards are affordable all-in-one instruments ideal for composing, arranging and performing. They offer a brilliant 7-inch color touchscreen, along with six assignable buttons and a joystick controller for maximum expressive possibilities. There’s instant access to a huge variety of international content, as well as new Voices and effects inherited from Genos. Arrangements created with the built-in 16-track sequencer can be output as studio-quality audio files that can be played back on smart devices or computers.

The PSR-SX900 is equipped with a newly designed bi-amped Expansive Soundfield Speaker system that delivers full, balanced sound for both the player and the audience. It comes with 4GB of internal memory, 1337 instrument Voices, 56 Drum/SFX kits and 480 XG Voices, as well as 329 Multi Pad banks. In addition, there are eight insert effect slots, a Chord Looper function, Bluetooth® audio and Main L&R line outputs, plus Sub L&R line outputs and two USB ports. The PSR-SX700 includes many of the same features at a lower price point, with 1GB of internal memory, 986 instrument Voices, 41 Drum/SFX kits and 480 XG Voices, as well as five insert effect slots, 226 Multi Pad banks, Main L&R line outputs and one USB port.

Black digital work station.

YBS-480 Intermediate Baritone Sax

Yamaha baritone saxophone

Yamaha intermediate baritone saxophones are used by thousands of schools in the United States and around the world. They have earned a stellar reputation for their outstanding playing characteristics, intonation and durability, and are sought after by scholastic marching, jazz and concert band programs. The YBS-480 Intermediate Baritone Saxophone unveiled at NAMM is the company’s first new baritone saxophone in 35 years.

The YBS-480 offers updated ergonomics to make it easier to hold. Also added is the ability to use a detachable peg, making the instrument more accessible to players of all sizes. The redesigned bore and neck are modeled after YBS-62 professional model Yamaha saxophones, which improve the intonation of the horn.

Gen III Chicago and New York Artist Trumpets

The Generation III Chicago and New York Artist Model trumpets are the latest and most advanced instruments in the renowned line of Yamaha Xeno Artist Model trumpets.

Intended to meet the critical demands of today’s top trumpet players, these instruments are celebrated for their responsive playing feel, nuanced sound characteristics and accurate, even intonation. The new Generation III models feature a redesigned two-piece construction valve casing, along with unified parts such as the water-key set-up and tuning slide radius. These design alterations create an improved upper register and sound throughout the range, and more stable intonation for players at all levels, especially those performing in the most critical situations. There are two Bb and three C models to choose from — the YTR-9335CHS III, YTR-9335NYS III, YTR-9445CHS III, YTR-9445NYS-YS III and YTR-9445NYS-YM III — making them ideal for a large variety of players, from those looking for a more modern style to those who prefer a more traditional feel and resistance.

Silver trumpet.

THR-II Desktop Amps

These three new Yamaha THR-II desktop amplifiers provide guitarists with a perfect combination of professional-quality tones, convenient wireless operation, and stylish good looks — whether they are practicing, recording, or playing along with their favorite music.

Employing Virtual Circuitry Modeling (VCM) technology to deliver the tone, feel and expressive nuances of boutique tube amplifiers, all provide 15 different amp tones, three modeled microphone sounds for acoustic-electric guitars, three bass amp models, and three flat voicings for use with other instruments, as well as stompbox-style modulation effects and studio-quality reverbs and delays. There’s also a USB port for direct recording and playback, and bundled Steinberg software allows desktop and mobile recording. Bluetooth support allows wireless audio playback from paired devices, and the THR30II WL Wireless and THR10II WL Wireless models even come with a built-in rechargeable battery and an integrated wireless receiver which, when combined with an optional Line 6® Relay® G10T transmitter, offer players a fully cable-free experience. For more information, see our blog article “Spotlight on THR-II.

Three small rectangular portable guitar amplifiers.

Steve Gadd Signature Snare

Tattooed man with white hair holding snare drum, sitting next to drum kit in front of purple curtains.

The new Steve Gadd Signature Snare Drum commemorates a relationship of more than 40 years with renowned Yamaha Artist Steve Gadd, who has recorded with an array of distinguished artists, including Aretha Franklin, Stevie Wonder, Barbra Streisand, Paul McCartney, Al Jarreau, James Brown, Joe Cocker, Nancy Wilson, Bob James, Stanley Clarke, Al DiMeola, George Benson, Chick Corea, Steely Dan and Paul Simon.

To celebrate this milestone, Yamaha and Gadd worked together to release a signature snare drum with a 14″ x 5.5″ steel shell and a new Steve Gadd 10-strand wire, which enhances the snare articulation. Limited to only 200 to be sold in the U.S., the drum’s steel shell exterior and aluminum die cast hoops are set in a distinctive black nickel. Additional features include a Steve Gadd signature badge that accompanies the shell, a black tuning key and a special certification card.

DZR/DXS-XLF / CZR/CXS-XLF White Speakers

Yamaha also announced at NAMM that it is adding a white finish version for its powered DZR/DXS-XLF and passive CZR/CXS-XLF professional loudspeakers and subwoofers. These cabinets fit a broader range of sound system requirements, especially in spaces where aesthetics and design are equally important as sound coverage and performance, such as churches, museums and upscale environments like high-end retail or hospitality venues.

The DZR line of powered speakers, along with the DXS-XLF powered subwoofers, use high-performance components and the latest DSP to provide superior audio quality, with minimal latency and phase distortion. Both lines are available with optional Dante integration for flexible routing and easier system configuration and setup. The CZR series of passive speakers are ideal for installations using remote power amplifiers. Adding the companion CXS-XLF subwoofers extends a sound system’s bottom end down to 29Hz for bass-heavy content. All models are housed in a lightweight, durable, 15mm-thick plywood cabinet, coated with military-grade polyurea to withstand the rigors of travel, handling and weather.

Set of six white rectangular speakers.

 

See you at next year’s NAMM — and remember, if you can’t make the show in person, you can always catch the highlights here!

 

Click here to learn more about the full line of Yamaha products.

The Power Of Five

As an online guitar instructor and Yamaha guitar clinician, I like to share ideas and concepts with students that they can apply quickly to their own playing, with a minimum of technical effort.

I recently spent several days in Nashville filming two new guitar courses. One course focuses on the art of looping rhythm and lead guitar phrases, while the other demonstrates how to apply major and minor pentatonic scales (i.e., five-note scales) over modal progressions.

Robbie Calvo playing an electric guitar in front of a camera.

Both will be available for downloading in the near future, but in the meantime, I want to give you a taste of what’s to come with a lesson on evoking Dorian mode with the minor pentatonic scale — a shape every guitar player knows and loves.

Start Harmonizing

Let’s begin in the key of G and break down the notes, harmony and resulting modalities.

The G major scale consists of the notes G, A, B, C, D, E and F#.

As discussed in a previous posting, every major scale consists of seven tones, and those tones are used to build chords — a process known as harmonization. The G major scale harmony chords are Gma7, Ami7, Bmi7, Cma7, D7, Emi7 and F#mi7(b5). G major scale modes are created by simply inverting the notes to start on each scale degree (that is, step), as follows:

G Ionian = G A B C D E F# G with a tonal center of Gma or Gma7

A Dorian = A B C D E F# G A with a tonal center of Ami or Ami7

B Phrygian = B C D E F# G A B with a tonal center of Bmi or Bmi7

C Lydian = C D E F# G A B C with a tonal center of Cma or Cma7

D Mixolydian = D E F# G A B C D with a tonal center of Dma or D7

E Aeolian = E F# G A B C D E with a tonal center of Emi or Emi7

F# Locrian = F# G A B C D E F# with a tonal center of F#Dim or F#mi7(b5)

(Note: Modes are simply alternate scales created by starting at different steps within a scale. For more information, see my two-part blog series about major scale modes.)

I’m going to use the chords Ami, C and D from the G harmonized major scale to build an A Dorian chord progression. Typically, the first chord of the progression will be the tonal center resolution point of the progression. The tonal center chord determines the modality, as shown here:

A Dorian chord progression using the Ami, C and D chords.

Creating Melodies and Solos

Now that we have an A Dorian chord progression, we can assign the A Dorian mode (that is, the G major scale) to create melodic lines and solos. However, rather than using the seven-note Dorian mode, let’s use the five-note A minor pentatonic scale instead. This will give us all the chord tones of Ami7, plus the perfect 4th — a scale choice that’s going to sound extremely strong and powerful.

Using the A minor pentatonic scale alone won’t give us the characteristic note of the A Dorian mode (F#), but we can easily add that note … or we can simply play a B minor pentatonic scale by shifting the shape at the fifth fret up to the seventh fret. The notes we get by doing this are:

B = 9th of the Ami9 chord

D = Perfect 4th (this exists in the A minor pentatonic scale as well, although it’s not a chord tone)

E = Perfect 5th of the Ami9 chord

F# = Major 6th (the A Dorian characteristic note)

A = Root note of the Ami9 chord

As you can see, we get three chord tones of the Ami9 chord, as well as the Major 6th characteristic note, so a great approach would be to glide between the same minor pentatonic shapes at the two fretboard locations (fifth fret and seventh fret).

To give you even more options, try playing the same minor pentatonic shape at the twelfth fret (E minor pentatonic). Here are the notes of the E minor pentatonic scale:

E = Perfect 5th of the Ami9 chord

G = Minor 7th (b7) of the Ami9 chord

A = Root note of the Ami9 chord

B = 9th of the Ami9 chord

D = Perfect 4th (not a chord tone)

As you can see, the E minor pentatonic scale gives us four chord tones of the Ami9 chord.

The cool result of using all three fretboard locations is that playing the same lick in each location will yield varying notes, and therefore, different musical results. Give it a try! I think you’ll like being able to expand your musical palette simply by shifting the same information to a new location on the guitar neck.

The Video

In this video, fellow guitarist Brett Papa and I demonstrate how to use the three minor pentatonic scales described above to create beautiful Dorian-flavored solos:

It’s a great lesson that lasts about an hour, but I think you’ll enjoy the banter and the value of the tips and tricks being shared.

The Guitar

Yamaha Revstar 502TFM electric guitar with a subtle flame maple top in a Vintage Japanese Denim finish.

The guitar I’m using in this video is a Yamaha Revstar 502TFM that features a subtle flame maple top in a Vintage Japanese Denim finish. The body and neck are solid mahogany, and the fretboard is rosewood with jumbo frets and a 13-inch fretboard radius. The pickups are Yamaha P90 single coils; I especially like the tone of the neck pickup, which I think sounds really warm and bluesy. The guitar is running into a Line 6 Helix, and all the tones were recorded directly to Brett’s digital audio workstation.

The Wrap-Up

It’s easy to expand the potential and value of the pentatonic-based licks that are commonly used in improvisations simply by shifting them into different fretboard locations. Playing the same licks in new locations will yield fresh musical ideas that work independently or in combination with other locations. It’s a great way to improve instantly … by working smarter (not necessarily harder) on your craft.

Photographs courtesy of the author.

 

Check out Robbie’s other postings.

Click here for more information about Yamaha Revstar guitars.

Click here for more information about the Line 6 Helix guitar processor.

Stream These 2020 Oscar® Nominees in the Comfort of Your Home

It’s the most exciting time of the year for movie buffs. The 2020 Academy Award® nominations have just been announced, and you can start marking your ballot. If you didn’t make it to the theater to watch these nominated movies, not to worry: You can rent or buy them from your favorite streaming service … and have a much more relaxed viewing experience in the comfort of your home. Time to begin planning your watch parties!

Joker

This DC Comics origin story about Batman’s nemesis garnered 11 nominations to lead the field. Star Joaquin Phoenix’s gripping portrayal of the tortured villain gives nuance to the legend. For you audiophiles out there, this film’s nominations for score, sound editing and sound mixing make it a must for watching on your 5.1-channel surround sound setup. (Note that this movie may be disturbing to some viewers.) Nominations include: Best Picture, Best Director (Todd Phillips), Best Actor (Joaquin Phoenix). Available on Amazon Prime, Google Play, Vudu and YouTube.

Parasite

This recent Golden Globe Awards winner for Best Motion Picture – Foreign Language tells the story of two Korean families at opposite ends of the social scale and an intruder who threatens the delicate balance of their fabricated relationships. Nominations include: Best Picture, Best Director (Bong Joon-ho), Best Foreign Language Film. Available on Amazon Prime, Vudu and Google Play.

Pain and Glory

Director Pedro Almodóvar’s autobiographical tale of an aging director looking back over key events that shaped his life features an outstanding performance by Antonio Banderas. Nominations include: Best Foreign Language Film, Best Actor (Antonio Banderas). Available on Amazon Prime and Vudu.

Once Upon a Time in Hollywood

This movie set in the 1969 Los Angeles film industry features the first pairing of stars Leonardo DiCaprio and Brad Pitt, with Quentin Tarantino at the helm. Nominations include: Best Picture, Best Director (Quentin Tarantino), Best Actor (Leonardo DiCaprio), Best Supporting Actor (Brad Pitt). Available on Amazon Prime,  Google Play, Vudu and YouTube.

The Irishman

This subtly powerful depiction of the events surrounding the infamous disappearance of labor leader Jimmy Hoffa features living legends Robert De Niro, Joe Pesci, Al Pacino and director Martin Scorsese. Nominations include: Best Picture, Best Director (Martin Scorsese), Best Actor (Robert De Niro), Best Supporting Actor (Joe Pesci, Al Pacino). Available on Netflix.

Marriage Story

This compassionate look at a family’s emotional journey through the trauma of divorce features gripping performances and deft direction. Nominations include: Best Picture, Best Actor (Adam Driver), Best Actress (Scarlett Johansson), Best Supporting Actress (Laura Dern). Available on Netflix.

The Two Popes

The Catholic church is at a crossroads in this tale of outgoing conservative Pope Benedict and incoming liberal Pope Francis. Nominations include: Best Picture, Best Actor (Jonathan Pryce), Best Supporting Actor (Anthony Hopkins). Available on Netflix.

Judy

Renee Zellweger steps up to the challenge of playing screen legend Judy Garland. Nominations include: Best Actress (Renee Zellweger). Available on Amazon Prime, Google Play, Vudu and YouTube.

Rocketman

This fantasy biopic of pop icon Elton John recounts his flamboyant early years. Nomination: Best Original Song ([I’m Gonna] Love Me Again). Available on Amazon Prime, Google Play, Vudu and YouTube.

A Beautiful Day in the Neighborhood

Who better than Tom Hanks, recipient of the Cecil B. deMille award at this year’s Golden Globes, to play TV’s Mister Rogers in this tale of a skeptical reporter’s redemption through decency and kindness? Nomination: Best Actor in a Supporting Role. Available on Amazon Prime.

Knives Out

This entertaining old-school murder mystery from writer/director Rian Johnson (Star Wars: Episode VIII – The Last Jedi, Looper), features an all-star cast and plenty of plot twists and turns to keep you guessing till the very end. Nomination: Original Screenplay. Available on Amazon Prime.

 

Looking for more ways to enjoy your home theater? Check out these blog posts:

Five Reasons Why Home Theater is Better Than Going to the Movies

MusicCast Wireless Surround Sound for Your 5.1 Home Theater

How to Get the Best Audio from Netflix

Destination Unknown

Smiling older caucasian male in front of abstract painting.
Wise Al.

Recently, my father-in-law, Al Gorgoni, shared the notion that an artist doesn’t know where they’re going until they get there. Wise Al is well-acquainted with the mysterious thing we call creativity. He played guitar on hundreds of sessions in the ’60s, including one where he came up with the iconic riff on Van Morrison’s “Brown Eyed Girl.”

This observation stuck with me, and the next day I asked Al to elaborate. “I was reflecting on how we start from scratch a lot of the time,” he explained, “and think we’re writing about one thing but then it turns out to be another. We have to be open to where the journey takes us. Sometimes we just start and have no idea what’s going to happen.”

I concur. And that means if we’re feeling like our plate is empty, we songwriters may have to eeny-meeny-miny-moe a starting point: Perhaps we’re eight years old, standing at the kitchen counter helping Grandma bake muffins, only to find 20 minutes later we’re swimming in the ocean with a high school crush.

It reminds me of a well-known creative exercise where a writer is instructed to put pen on paper (with eyes closed) or fingertips on computer keyboard (with screen dark) and just begin writing whatever it is that comes to mind, stream-of-consciousness. (If it’s a melody you’re creating, as opposed to words, then a device should be used to record your humming or playing.) The point is that we should let our mind meander and enjoy the swerves, curves and speed bumps, and not concern ourselves with sentence structure, grammar, syntax or, more importantly, why we’re entering unexplainable, random or seemingly senseless territory. Unfinished business, or business that wants to be re-examined? Hard to know, but we felt a pull and we followed. And that’s good because writers write. Even when we think we have nothing to say. Even when we think we have no story.

All of which brings to mind an experience I had not long ago, when I spoke with a class of songwriting students at Cal Poly Pomona University. One student approached me afterwards and confessed that he was concerned with a new assignment: to write a song that tells a story. He asked me what he should do if he has no stories.

My first inclination was to suggest he change his major. But I reconsidered. He’s just learning how to tap into himself. Everyone has stories.

So we have a choice to make: We can avoid this leap of faith (like the reluctant student) or we can welcome the adventure. If we’re willing to travel, if we follow our muse unconditionally and trust in her guidance, we may stumble upon delicious (or uncomfortable) feelings we didn’t even know existed. We may be pleasantly surprised, or we may be horrified. Either way, all destinations matter. They’re all fodder, ingredients, material for stories.

Of course, sometimes we wind up writing about the same ex-love twenty songs in a row (lots of unfinished business!). It’s possible that each tale has a different ending, which makes sense because there are many nuances to a relationship: exhilaration in one song, heartbreak in another. (Side note: If you realize you’re writing countless songs about the same ex, you could call one of them “All Roads Lead To You.” Hey, I actually like that title … and, what’s more, I didn’t know it would fall out of my head until I got there!)

Or, as Wise Al put it: “Real art happens when we get out of our own way and let it come and go wherever it takes us, without thinking too much about it. Or not thinking at all. It’s like riding a joyous kind of vibration.”

It’s a sentiment that should give hope to every student of song, especially on those days they swear their well is dry. You’ve gotta get in the car, enjoy the ride … and have faith in the destination.

Young woman travels outside a railroad car with wind in the curly hair, motion and movement on the road discovering new places during a nice sunset.
Photo courtesy of Al Gorgoni.

 

Check out Shelly’s other postings.

What’s the Difference Between a Grand Piano and an Upright Piano?

A piano is a piano, right?

Not exactly. In fact, there are several kinds of pianos. For one thing, there are digital pianos, and there are acoustic ones. Digital pianos create their sounds electronically, and require power as well as speakers or headphones in order to be heard. Most digital pianos, in fact, play back samples — that is, digital recordings — of acoustic pianos. Acoustic pianos, on the other hand, create their sounds in air, by means of strings being struck by hammers and a wooden soundboard that serves to amplify the sound so that it can be easily heard, without the benefit of any electronic components, and therefore without the need for electricity, speakers or headphones.

As you might guess, the acoustic piano came first — in fact, nearly 300 years before the digital variety. The first pianos were large and therefore called “grand” pianos. But there’s a second, smaller variety of acoustic piano too: the upright, invented some 80 years after the grand. It has a lot in common with its forebear, but there are some significant differences too. In this article, we’ll take a look at both the similarities and differences.

The Grand Piano

As mentioned, grand pianos are the largest type, and frequently the most expensive as well. They offer a wide dynamic range, rich resonance, diverse tonality and responsive touch and for those reasons are generally the choice of professional musicians, particularly those playing classical music or jazz.

Yamaha CFX grand piano on wooden stage.
Yamaha CFX grand piano. The holes to the right are part of the metal frame; to their left (beneath the strings) is the wooden soundboard.

Grand pianos vary in size, from “Baby grand” models that can be as little as 5′ in length, all the way up to “Concert grand” models, which can be 9′ or more. One thing they all have in common are massive frames made of cast metal and horizontally mounted soundboards made of thin wood. Dampers lie on top of the strings, adjacent to the hammers, which are also horizontal, and the lid can be raised up to further project the sound. All grand pianos provide 88 ivory, wood or ivory-covered wood keys, and include a retractable cover that contains a sheet music stand and slides over, or folds down on the keys.

Yamaha offers a wide variety of grand piano models, from the GB1K and GC Series baby grands to the flagship CF Series concert grands, all providing a perfect blend of craftsmanship and innovation.

The Upright Piano

The term “upright piano” is somewhat confusing. It is sometimes used synonymously with “vertical,” although technically speaking, an upright is a type of vertical piano. Uprights take up much less space and tend to be less expensive than grand pianos. They are a favorite of music students and a staple of schools and conservatories all over the world, and their compact design allows them to be conveniently placed next to a wall or in a corner, making them a popular addition to many living rooms as well.

Like the grand, upright pianos vary in terms of size, materials and construction, but they all have wooden soundboards that are mounted vertically, with strings that stretch downward and are struck (and muted) by horizontal hammers and dampers. Upright sizes range from small “Spinet” models (popular up until the mid-twentieth century but rarely made today) of as little as 3′ in width, through “Console” and “Studio” models that vary in height but are generally 5′ wide. They may be smaller than their grand cousins, but all upright pianos offer the same 88 keys, usually made of wood or ivory-covered wood.

Yamaha makes a broad range of upright pianos, from the compact, entry-level b series to the U Series — the world’s most popular upright — to the YUS Series, which shares many of the features of CF Series pianos for a broad range of sonic tonalities more reminiscent of a grand piano than a traditional upright.

Young girl plays upright piano in living room.
Yamaha U Series upright piano.

Differences Between Grand Pianos and Upright Pianos

As we have seen, two major differences are their size and the mounting of the soundboard and strings (horizontal in grands and vertical in uprights). But these factors have additional implications. For one thing, the larger size of grand pianos means that they have longer strings and larger soundboards, which impart a different tonality than do uprights. This also results in grand pianos having a greater dynamic range (that is, the difference between the softest sounds and the loudest sounds it can produce) than uprights. In addition, grand pianos emit sound from above, while upright pianos emit sound from the back end, which is usually placed against a wall. For those reasons, grand pianos can be much louder than uprights.

Another significant difference between the two is their “action” — the mechanism that causes hammers to strike the strings when a key is pressed — which is why they often feel so different to play. Because the strings are mounted horizontally in grand pianos, the hammers return to their rest position due to the force of gravity, under their own weight. In addition, grand pianos utilize a double escapement mechanism that allows keys to be played rapidly in succession, without first letting the key return all the way to its starting position. In upright pianos, where the strings are mounted vertically, the hammers rely on springs to return to the at-rest position. As a result, key repetition (i.e., when a player repeats notes quickly, such as when playing trills) is much smoother and faster in grand pianos than it is in upright pianos — to a maximum of roughly 15 times per second in grands, versus seven times per second in uprights.

Finally, while both grand pianos and upright pianos offer three foot pedals, they have slightly different functions. In a grand piano, the pedals are:

Three piano pedals, with a foot depressing the right pedal

– Shift pedal (left pedal): Also called the soft pedal or una corda pedal. When depressed, this shifts the entire action assembly to the right, changing not only the volume of the sound, but also making slight changes to the tone.
– Sostenuto pedal (middle pedal): This keeps the dampers raised and away from the strings of any keys played just before depressing the pedal, making it possible to sustain selected notes.
– Sustain pedal (right pedal): Also called the damper pedal. When depressed, the dampers remain lifted even if the fingers are taken off the keys, thus sustaining all played notes.

In an upright piano, the pedals are:

– Soft pedal (left pedal): When pressed, all the hammers are moved closer to the strings, reducing the volume of the sound.
– Muffler pedal (middle pedal): Also called the practice pedal. When pressed, a thin piece of felt is dropped between the hammers and strings, greatly muting the sound.
– Sustain pedal (right pedal): Functions the same way as in a grand piano—when depressed, the dampers remain lifted even if the fingers are taken off the keys, thus sustaining all played notes.

 

This posting is excerpted from the Yamaha Musical Instrument Guide. For more information about Yamaha pianos, click here.

Q&A with Yamaha Master Educator Cheryl Floyd

Cheryl Floyd is a retired Director of Bands at Hill Country Middle School in Austin, Texas and a flute instructor, music consultant and mentor at the Leander Independent School District.

She was one of the first females and the first middle school band director to be elected to the American Bandmasters Association. Floyd has served as co-principal flute with the Austin Symphonic Band since 1985. She is a Yamaha Master Educator.

Q. When did you know that you were going to make music the focus of your professional life?

A. Initially, I chose the flute as my instrument because of a program the Dallas Symphony had for elementary schools in the area. I was in love with the woodwind quintet and wanted very much to play the flute so that I could play the flute part in their arrangement of “Peter and the Wolf!” In high school, I was thrilled to realize that I could teach and make music as a career for the rest of my life. Prior to that, I wanted to be an astronaut!

Q. Other than music, what brings you inspiration?

A. Reading, yoga, walking on the treadmill, good friends.

Q. What book is on your nightstand right now?

A. “Bad Girls Throughout History” by Ann Shen and a daily devotional book. I also recently finished “Educated” by Tara Westover, which was so powerful!

Q. What is the most embarrassing moment of your life that you can share?Yamaha Master Educator Cheryl Floyd

A. There are a few. Once I wore one blue shoe and one black shoe for a concert. Another time while talking about intonation at Murchison Middle School, instead of saying “pitch,” I said the “b” word! The kids laughed so hard! And finally, I can’t believe I actually rented “The Blues Brothers” to show at a middle school band pizza party. Luckily, no one complained!

Q. What piece of music do you wish you had written and why?

A. Hard to say. I love “Candide Suite” by Leonard Bernstein. I love to listen to it, and I love to perform it as well!

Q. Why is music important to humanity?

A. Because it is! Mothers sing lullabies to their babies. Children sing nursery rhymes. Students learn important mathematical/ historical facts to music. Countries have national anthems. Every civilization has made music to celebrate good times and lift up those who have fallen on bad times.

Q. What is your favorite guilty pleasure food?

A. Sunday champagne brunch at the Four Seasons Hotel Austin with my hubby.

Q. Which person from history, dead or alive, would you want to have lunch with and what would you discuss?

A. My grandmother, Hazel Chisum. But she would want to fix the lunch, I’m certain! We would talk about when she and my grandfather first married, all the wonderful things that have happened in my life, and her great grandson, Weston Floyd. I just recently discovered that she played guitar!

Q. What is your biggest pet peeve?

A. People who say mean things, and people who park poorly!

Q. Why is it important to protect access to music education?

A. Everyone is inherently musical. It’s crucial to develop that talent in every person. There are so many studies that validate the importance of music education for every child. Music is a language I believe everyone should be comfortable with in their daily lives. 

Building the Ideal Home Theater

When some people think of a home theater, they picture a dark, secluded room with a large projection system and lifelike 3D audio. When others envision the space, they simply see a flat-panel TV mounted to the wall and a basic soundbar attached underneath. The two are distinctly different, and so is the overall experience.

As the selection of audio and video equipment grows at a blistering pace, the definition of what constitutes a genuine home theater has become fuzzier. Is that simple, basic system occupying a portion of the living room a real home theater? Does it provide a sufficient level of performance to make it seem as if you have stepped into an actual movie theater? Are you totally immersed in the action? Do you feel transported to a new dimension of home entertainment? If you answered “no” to any of these questions, it may be time to rethink your current home theater setup.

Go for Quality Over Convenience

Thanks to the wide array of pre-packaged, turnkey “home-theater-in-a-box” (HTIB) solutions on the market, it’s become easy to purchase and set up a system in just about any room of the house. Modern TVs are slim and smart, speakers are small and often wireless, and with streaming services like Netflix®, you no longer need a media player to enjoy recent releases. It’s a convenient and straightforward solution, but unfortunately lacks the power and performance of AV gear engineered and designed for purpose-built rooms dedicated to the enjoyment of entertainment content. Bottom line: It takes high-quality products to create a high-quality entertainment experience — an experience that conjures all of the emotion and energy of a commercial cinema, and one that befits the classic definition of a “home theater.”

Immersive Audio is the Answer

Surround sound is a critical part of any home theater, and formats range from a basic 5.1 configuration (five speakers and one subwoofer) all the way up to the latest, object-oriented formats: DTS:X™ and Dolby Atmos®, which add overhead audio channels for height cues. Surface-mount speakers such as the Yamaha NS-IC800 can be placed on the ceiling to create the sensation that objects in the film, such as airplanes or rainfall, are coming from (and shifting) overhead. Combined with main speakers that “move” objects side to side as well as forward and backwards in the room, the sound becomes thoroughly lifelike and three-dimensional, immersing the home theater audience completely in the middle of the action — the goal of any high-quality cinema. Add in a technology like Surround:AI (a feature unique to Yamaha AVENTAGE receivers such as the RX-A3080), and the audio becomes even more impactful. This innovation analyzes movie scenes and adjusts the playback to optimize the effect of dialogue, background music and ambient sounds.

AV receiver front view with controls and display screen.
Yamaha RX-A3080.
Tall freestanding floor speaker.
Yamaha Soavo NS-F901.

The audio impact you get from basic home theater systems designed for easy installation in a living room pales in comparison. You hear the airplane and rainfall clearly, but do you really “feel” them? It takes more than a modest speaker setup to reproduce the complexities of a Dolby Atmos or DTS:X surround sound format. For one thing, you need to select quality speakers built for use in a home theater. As an example, you might consider a pair of Yamaha Soavo NS-F901 floor-standing line speakers for the front left and right channels, augmented by Yamaha NS-333 bookshelf speakers for the rear and side channels. The all-important center channel (which mostly carries dialog) should be routed to a speaker specifically designed for that purpose, such as the Yamaha NS-C444.

Ns 333 375 X 350
Yamaha NS-333 bookshelf speakers.
Nsc444 375 X350
Yamaha NS-C444 center channel speaker.

This brings up another point: How best to integrate speakers with the room design. If you thought it was tough to blend the speakers of a basic 5.1-channel surround sound system into the décor of a family room, the additional speakers of an advanced setup (such as the one being described here) can throw a real monkey wrench into the appearance of a typical living room or den. Plain and simple, the kind of high-quality audio system we’re talking about not only works better, it looks better in a room dedicated to the enjoyment of movies. Without the typical accoutrements of a family room to work around — light fixtures, artwork, furniture, etc. — speakers can be placed precisely where they should go for the optimal listening experience.

Lifelike, Larger-than-Life Video

Today’s slim flat-panel displays can be situated just about anywhere, and with screens large enough to pull viewers into the action, they offer a great alternative to two-piece projection systems … until you reach screen sizes upwards of 100 inches. Then, the solution becomes cost-prohibitive for most people, not to mention difficult to find the space to mount such a screen in an average family room. Installed in a dedicated home theater, however, 100-inch-plus screens and their companion projectors really shine. Those kinds of spaces afford plenty of real estate for a huge screen and video projector, and the price tags for these products are actually way less expensive than comparably sized flat-panel displays.

Perfect Viewing Conditions

There are many other variables that impact the quality of a home theater, such as seating, lighting, and control. A “true” home theater that’s purposely designed to provide the best viewing environment has no windows (or at least completely covers any windows that do exist) and provides the right amount of space for proper seating alignment. This prevents sunlight from washing out the image as well as the viewing fatigue that can occur from sitting too close or too far away from the screen — both common hurdles encountered in family room environments. And forget about becoming completely immersed in movies presented in a space other than a dedicated home theater: There are simply too many distractions. On the other hand, a custom-designed room set apart from the rest of the house makes it easy to escape and immerse yourself in your favorite movies … and it happens easily and naturally. You see, when it comes to home theater, “good” isn’t necessarily good enough.

For more information, see our blog article “Four Benefits of Having a Professional Do Your Home Theater Installation

 

To find a Yamaha dealer, use our dealer locator here. If you’re looking for a custom installer for a specific brand like Yamaha, we recommend you search locally (with a search engine or social community website) using the terms “home theater custom installers.” Availability of custom installers may vary based on region.

Mix Automation

Automation is a powerful feature that’s available in all contemporary DAWs. It allows you to record the movements of a fader, knob or button that’s controlling a parameter in a track or plug-in. Those movements are then written into the file so they will recur the same way, at precisely the same time, each time you play back your song.

Screenshot of Cubase software showing automated volume changes on an audio track.
Automated volume changes on an audio track.

Using automation, you can fine-tune any track — both audio and MIDI — by making adjustments, large or small, one at a time. The most common application is to “ride” levels or pan a signal from left to right, but there are lots of other usages. For example, you could automate a delay plug-in to go into bypass on the last beat of a song so it doesn’t repeat after the track ends. Or you could change the vocal reverb to a different room size when a song gets to the chorus and then back again on the verses, or automate a filter on a soft synth to create a sweep. The possibilities are virtually endless.

Automation curve on MIDI track in Cubase software.
An automation curve for Modulation EFX depth on a MIDI track.

Automation adds a level of precision to your mixing that was unheard of back in the analog days, when all mix moves had to be made by hand. Crazy as it sounds today, you’d often see several people gathered around a studio’s mixing console, each tasked with moving a fader or turning a knob or pressing a button at a specific point in the song because the engineer’s two hands were not enough to handle all the needed adjustments in real time! With automation, it’s like having an almost unlimited number of 100% accurate hands available to you.

Real-Time or Offline

You can record (aka “write”) automation in two different ways. The first is by turning on your DAW’s automation-write button for the target track (or tracks) and initiating playback of the song, then making whatever changes you like in real time. Steinberg Cubase, like most DAWs, offers track-specific automation read and write buttons in both the Project (edit) window and MixConsole window:

Screenshot of Automation Read and Write buttons for a track.
Automation Read and Write buttons in Cubase’s MixConsole.

After you’ve written automation to a track, your DAW will either show you the automation data underneath it in a dedicated “lane” or overlaid on top of the track waveform. (In some DAWs you might have to manually open the automation view to see and edit it.) In Cubase, an automation lane opens up right under a track in the Project window as soon as you write any data to it. You’ll see the data in the form of editable “breakpoint” lines, which are also referred to as “automation curves.”

Not only do you get a Write button for automation, but a Read button as well. After you’ve recorded or entered automation data on a track, the Read button enables it on playback. If you turn off the Read button, the automation data will be ignored by the track until you turn it back on. Being able to toggle the automation on and off with a Read button is handy for comparing the automated version of a track against the original.

Touch / Latch Modes

Although there are some variances in how different DAWs implement automation, all offer a choice of automation modes, which govern how the fader, knob or button will respond when you release it. Two of the most common are touch and latch modes.

Touch mode is used when you want a parameter to go back to the previous level after you finish adjusting it. This would be used, for example, when automating a vocal track that has a volume level that’s mostly correct in the mix but needs a few tweaks because some words were sung too loudly or softly.

Screenshot of Touch mode.
Touch mode is best for short-duration adjustments.

In that situation, you’d put your automation into touch mode, and when you got to a section you needed to fix, you’d move the fader to the desired point for as long as required, and then release it. As soon as you let go of your mouse button, the volume would revert to its previous level.

Latch mode (called “Auto-Latch” in Cubase) will instead keep the fader, knob or button at the value you change it to when you release it. This mode is useful when you want to alter a parameter and have it remain at the new value until or unless another automation change is made.

Screenshot of Latch mode.
Latch mode retains the current level when you release the control.

Let’s say you want to make the drums a little louder from the last chorus all the way through to the end of the song. In that case, you’d choose latch mode and simply push the drums fader up at that chorus, then release it. The volume would then stay at its new value unless you moved the fader again before the end of the song.

Luck of the Draw

An alternate method of writing automation data — one that’s particularly useful for extreme fine-tuning — is to manually draw changes using your DAW’s drawing tools. This method can be used both for entering automation data where none exists, or for editing existing automation curves. Typically, DAWs have both freehand line tools and tools that let you draw straight lines or specific shapes. The shapes are often useful for creating effects when automating effect or virtual-instrument parameters.

Screenshot of triangular-shaped automation curve.
A triangular-shaped automation curve controlling a filter plug-in.

When you’re drawing automation, you’ll typically see little dots on the line, called breakpoints. These can be selected and dragged to change the shape or level of the automation line. The closer they are together, the finer the resolution of the line will be. If you have the “snap to grid” function turned on in your DAW, it will usually constrain your manipulation of automation curves to the selected grid value.

In any DAW, it can take a little while to get used to manipulating automation data graphically, but once you master the technique, you’ll be rewarded with extremely accurate control of all your mix parameters. In all likelihood, you’ll wonder how you ever mixed without it!

 

Check out our other Recording Basics postings.

Click here for more information about Steinberg Cubase.

The Modern Drum Set, Part 2: The Bass Drum

In this multi-part series, we take a closeup look at each of the components of the modern drum set.

In The Modern Drum Set, Part 1, we learned about the origins of the snare drum and how it became an important part of contemporary music. In this installment, we’ll take a look at the Big Daddy of Bottom End, the bass drum. Also known as a “kick” drum, the bass drum is usually the largest drum in a set and the only one played with a foot pedal. It typically sits on the floor, laid on its side, with the front head facing the audience.

Drum set.
The bass drum is front and center.

Bass drums are used in just about every musical style, from jazz and classical to death metal — though they are used differently depending upon the genre. In contemporary music, the bass and snare drums are the most important components of the drum set, with the bass drum providing the “downbeat” on the one and three while the snare drum counters on the two and four. In jazz, the bass drum is often played very lightly to provide a pulse that is more felt than heard, but is also used to drop “bombs” (strong accents). In classical music, the bass drum provides dramatic thunder, and marching bands use it as a means of setting the tempo of the march.

Bass-ic History

The bass drum is a descendant of the davul or tabl turki (Turkish drum) dating back to the 1300s, making it one of the oldest percussion instruments. The davul was a double-headed, rope-tensioned drum with a diameter of 26 to 28 inches and was played with a wood stick or by hand. It was used by Ottoman military bands, but was also an important part of non-military music in that part of the world.

In the 18th century, Turkish troops and military bands made their way into Europe, where the davul was incorporated into music written by Gluck, Mozart and Haydn. Eventually, composers such as Berlioz and Verdi used the bass drum in their works, and it became an important part of the orchestral percussion section.

At the beginning of the 20th century, the invention of the foot pedal revolutionized drumming by making it possible for one drummer to simultaneously play a bass drum, a snare drum and a cymbal. The idea of having a single drummer in a band spread from the Big Band era and continues today — though there have been popular bands with two drummers simultaneously playing separate kits.

Bass drum foot pedal with red bass drum on white background.
The foot pedal revolutionized drumming.

Construction Boom

Bass drum shells are typically constructed from multiple plies of wood such as birch, oak or maple. They can also be made from fiberglass, stainless steel and acrylic, but wood is by far the most popular material.

Birch is used to manufacture shells for Yamaha Recording Custom and Stage Custom drums. It emphasizes the low and high frequencies, providing a bright, lively sound with slightly reduced mid frequencies. Birch projects very well and can easily cut through a mix.

Maple is a very popular wood for making drum shells and is used in Yamaha Absolute Hybrid Maple and Tour Custom drums. It yields a warm low end, balanced low and high frequencies, and slightly boosted mid frequencies. Absolute Hybrid Maple shells use an interior layer of wenge, a hard and heavy type of wood that combines with maple to produce a rich, clear tone at all dynamic levels.

Oak, used in Yamaha Live Custom Hybrid Oak drums, produces a round tone, mellow highs and an extended, warm low end with plenty of volume and projection. Live Custom Hybrid Oak shells are made from a sandwich of oak plies surrounding a dense phenolic layer — a design that emphasizes attack while increasing the drum’s dynamic range. In addition, weights studded in the bass drum at the lug points attenuate low-mid frequencies for a tight, focused sound.

Yamaha PHX  (pronounced “phoenix”) drum shells are made from plies of jatoba, kapur and North American maple woods. This unique construction maximizes projection and increases the vibration of the drum head.

Unlike snare drum and tom hoops, bass drum hoops are made from wood and use “claws” or “hooks” to hold the hoop onto the drum. The tension rods used with these claws can have T-handles to facilitate tuning or can be adjusted with a drum key.

Close-up shot of silver bass drum claw on deep read bass drum.
Claws are used to hold wood hoops onto a bass drum.

What’s Your Size?

As is the case with any drum, the fundamental pitch of a bass drum is determined by the diameter and depth of the shell: larger and deeper shells generally produce a lower pitch. Deeper shells also provide increased projection, produce more overtones and add extra “boom” to the sound. In general, shallow shells respond faster and can produce a lighter sound.

Bass drums designed for use in drum sets come in a variety of diameters ranging from 18 to 26 inches, with average depths from 14 to 18 inches. Marching bass drums can be significantly larger, and the bass drums in some compact drum sets feature narrower depths. For example, the new Yamaha Stage Custom Hip bass drum has a depth of only 8 inches, making it easier to transport.

A small portable drum set in natural wood grain.
The Yamaha Stage Custom Hip bass drum is only eight inches deep.

Shell diameters of 18 and 20 inches are popular for jazz, while diameters of 22 and 24 inches are standard for just about every other genre of music (though some heavy metal drummers prefer 26-inch bass drums for their extra low end). Using a bass drum with a large diameter means that your rack toms must be placed higher, so make sure you can get the toms where you want them before you commit to the bass drum size.

TP 10crop2
The Yamaha Stage Custom Bop Kit includes an 18-inch bass drum.

TP 11
This Yamaha Tour Custom drum set has a 22-inch bass drum.

How to Avoid Creep’n’Roll

In addition to lugs, claws or hoops, bass drum shells often have extra hardware mounted on them. Legs or “spurs” attached to each side of the shell serve two purposes: They prevent the drum from creeping away from the player every time the pedal beater hits the head, and also help stabilize the drum so that it doesn’t roll from side to side. Some bass drum legs feature convertible tips, with rubber for use on hard floors and spiked ones for use on carpet.

The bass drum also has the important job of supporting the toms, so many come equipped with brackets mounted at the top of the shell, such as the ones used on Yamaha Live Custom Hybrid Oak drums:

Close-up of mounting bracket at the top of a blue bass drum.
The mounting bracket at the top of a bass drum supports a tom or cymbal holder.

These mounts usually accept a holder for one or two toms, but can also be used to mount cymbal holders. The tom holder is important because it’s the only way to mount two toms centered over the bass drum.

There’s a Hole in My Head!

Many drummers like to cut a hole in the front head of the bass drum, which increases the impact of the sound while at the same time making it easy to place a small blanket or pillow inside to dampen the drum’s resonance. A hole also facilitates microphone placement, and that’s important in situations where the drums are being recorded or amplified through a PA system. Jazz drummers, however, often prefer a pure tone and generally do not opt for a hole or any dampening inside the drum.

Mic placed in hole of bass drum.
A hole in the front head of a bass drum makes mic placement easy.

The bass drum is an important part of your drum set in terms of both the sound and the physical arrangement of the kit. A bit of planning and a visit to your local music shop can help ensure that you choose the right one.

Click here for Part 1: The snare drum.

Click here for Part 3: Toms.

Click here for Part 4: Foot pedals.

Click here for Part 5: Cymbals and hardware.

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha acoustic drum sets.

The Pursuit of Perfection

Whatever sport you follow, it’s your time of year. I’m not a sports fanatic, but I enjoy sitting down in front of a good game every now and then. To me, watching professional athletes in their prime is very similar to watching professional musicians, not just in terms of their often astonishing proficiency but also the degree of dedication they have to their craft.

I’ve had the privilege of getting to know a number of celebrated musicians and take it from me, the old adage about famous people putting on their pants one leg at a time, same as everyone else, is completely true. Granted, these individuals were born with a certain amount of talent that you or I may not possess, but I’m convinced that the main thing that separates them from the rest of us is sheer doggedness.

The pursuit of perfection is an often frustrating endeavor, and one that comes at a price. An acquaintance of mine went to high school with someone who eventually became a major league pitcher, and quite a successful one at that. I once asked him what this person was like as a teenager, and his answer floored me: “I don’t know. I hardly ever saw him.” The reason was that this hurler-in-the-making had apparently spent most of his high school years on the practice field throwing hundreds of pitches all day long, thanks to his coach’s skill in writing notes getting his protégé excused from most classes — something that also left precious little time for social interaction with his fellow students. That hardly made him a well-rounded individual, but it did mean that he was able to impress the scouts when major league teams came a-calling.

Another friend of mine spent years touring with a world-famous rock guitarist. I remember asking him once what this superstar was like when the spotlight wasn’t shining on him. His reply was, simply, “He’s just like the rest of us … only less so.” He didn’t say it to be demeaning — he was just stating a fact. “Look, put a guitar in his hands, and on a good night, no one can match him,” my friend went on to explain. “But send him off to the store to buy a container of milk, and he’ll have no clue.” His point was that this individual spent so much time practicing, rehearsing, recording and performing that he had no hours left in the day to develop what most of us consider trivial living skills.

On the flip side, I know more than a few extremely talented musicians who never became household names despite their having far more ability than some who did. In some cases, this comes down to bad luck or being in the wrong place at the wrong time, but all too often, sad to say, the primary reason is that they gave up. Carving a career in the music business is monumentally difficult — in some respects, as tough a path to traverse as trying to be a successful actor — and it requires not just talent but total commitment, along with an unshakeable belief in oneself. When you add in the pressures of having to pay bills (few of us, after all, have trust funds to live off), it’s easy to see how potentially world-class musicians can fall by the wayside. Sure, some have regrets, but others revel in the freedoms that came as a result of their decision, such as the joys of raising a family — something that’s difficult if not impossible if you’re devoting every waking hour to honing your craft.

So next time you’re watching an exciting game or attending a stirring concert, take the opportunity to reflect on the time expended, dedication required and personal sacrifices made by those athletes or musicians. Then ask yourself: Do I have it in me to do the same? If the answer is yes, go for it!

 

Check out Howard’s other postings.

Going for the Rare Notes

I was just 14 when I discovered what I would end up doing for the rest of my life. And ever since catching my first break, I’ve been in demand as a session player. To me, that qualifies as being blessed.

I’ve literally been playing bass for a living almost every day for more than four decades. I can’t count all the studios I’ve been in, or the live concerts I’ve played. I’ve never stopped to think about what it is that makes people call me for gigs, but maybe it’s my focus on constantly keeping the highest standards for myself. It’s not just about setting standards for playing, either — it’s personal, spiritual, physical, mental and musical, and that includes walking into a studio with an upbeat attitude and good energy.

Nathan East smiling while holding his signature Yamaha bass.

When I was growing up, there were so many great examples of bassists setting the bar high: Jaco Pastorius, Stanley Clarke, James Jamerson, Paul McCartney, Verdine White, Rocco Prestia, Ron Carter, Ray Brown, Anthony Jackson and so many others. I was in awe of how talented they all were, and I wanted to be in their club. Through their playing, they taught me to make every note count, to play something memorable. That was my focus, because doing it meant that maybe one day I might be worthy of being thought of by others in that same company.

Wes Montgomery is still one of my favorite artists of all time because of his choice notes, and the ease with which he played them. He just got to me right from the beginning. His note choices and his use of space — everything about what he did was consummate, and that’s what defines an artist to me.

It definitely affected how I play. My philosophy is more about which notes than numbers of notes. And I like to go for the rare notes. Harmonically, my approach is to figure out the most obvious, simplest, lowest common denominator note, and then I move on to figuring out what substitutions I can come up with. Maybe it’s the third, or the fifth, but whatever choice you make shades the music and gives it a complexion. Once I know the root and chord, I figure out what notes are available to me that will make someone go “ooh.”

It’s all about listening. Rhythmically, I stay conscious of what’s going on with the drums. Lots of drummers I’ve played with say, “When I put that kick drum down, there you are.” That’s because I’m listening.

I have the benefit of having had a musical education and background, but even with all of that, I’m still trying to let the music play me. It’s more of a spiritual approach than an academic one, though I ultimately draw on both. I listen, and then try to let the music tell me what it wants to hear. So it’s from the head, but much more from the heart.

With my background, I can technically play just about anything, but I usually choose instincts and spirit over virtuosity: things that move me emotionally. You don’t have to be a chop-buster to be a heartbreaker. There are some musicians who can’t read a note of music, but when you hear them play, you can tell it’s them. You hear their personality.

A good way for me to keep perspective is to think back to my early days, when I was fortunate enough to get my start with Barry White, playing on all his records back in the late ’70s. His way of putting a hit together meant giving everyone their part, and in those sessions, he had two bassists. He gave me what seemed like a simple part where I waited and played a sliding note; he gave the other player a part that required him to wait, and then play a snap. With him, all you did while recording was listen closely and play that one part, but what you ended up with was an amazingly structured bass foundation.

Those were the sessions where I met guitarists Ray Parker Jr., Melvin Ragin (aka Wah-Wah Watson) and Lee Ritenour, as well as drummers Ed Green and Gene Page, who arranged those records. They were the top guys, and when they heard me, they referred me to other gigs. Then, in the early ’80s, I got introduced to pianists Patrice Rushen and Bobby Lyle by flutist/saxophonist Hubert Laws, and they started going out and recommending me for jazz gigs.

Soon after that, I met Phil Collins and Eric Clapton, which opened up the rock-and-roll side of my playing. I also played on Anita Baker’s records, whose music wasn’t just four-chord pop hits — it was sophisticated and song-based, and that gave me a chance to be heard in the R&B world.

Every day I’m thankful for the path that music has led me down, and the blessed life it’s given me. I used to dream about playing with all kinds of great musicians, and it happened, and it just keeps happening. It’s all been too much fun!

Photographs by Kharen Hill.

For more information, go to nathaneast.com.

 

Click here to learn more about the Yamaha BBNE2 Nathan East Signature Bass.

New Year, New Decade, New Music

Billie Eilish on ABC's "Jimmy Kimmel Live."

Last November, Billie Eilish incited a twitter-storm when she appeared on Jimmy Kimmel Live! and revealed during an impromptu pop-culture quiz that she didn’t know who Van Halen was. The quiz was part of a goofy stunt premised on the fact that Eilish, despite her massive success, had not yet turned eighteen (she would on December 18th, a birthday that, happily, she shares with Keith Richards). Kimmel was seventeen in 1984, so the questions turned on how familiar Eilish was with whatever was big that year (Van Halen, Madonna, Huey Lewis, etc.). The short answer was, not very.

Fine, so far. Everyone over 35 has experienced that stunning moment when a young person has no idea who one of the idols of your youth is. Kimmel, who is fifty-two, was having some fun with this idea, and though she regretted feeling “so stupid,” Eilish was, too. The Internet, not so much. Ridiculously, Eilish was excoriated for being unfamiliar with a band that had its last hit years before she was born. Of course, she also had defenders, but even they didn’t seem to get the point. Judd Apatow, for example, posted, “As someone who has worked with many young people, they are inundated with new music, movies and TV. They don’t have the time to catch up on stuff from earlier decades. Ask a kid if they know what “Mash” is, or “The Odd Couple.” Ask them who Lou Reed is. They’re drowning in content.”

That statement seems to me to be entirely misguided, yet, as this tumultuous decade crashes to a close, it does get at something real about our rapidly fragmenting culture. That fragmentation — and the technology that makes it possible — is the true story of the music of the 2010’s, more so than the work of any particular artist. All you need do is walk through the streets of any city and find yourself dodging people lost in their smartphones, pricey headphones and every other manifestation of personal technology that allows people to disappear into their own private streaming world.

I don’t see anything wrong with that, although, as a native New Yorker, I will confess to missing the elegant choreography of people moving briskly through the streets, intent on their own destinations but efficiently aware of everyone around them. Moreover, I believe that the incredible access to music that our increasingly digital world provides means that we share more music across generations than we ever have before.

One of the key memes of the past year was, “OK, boomer,” the offhand, millennial/Gen Z dismissal of their elders’ patronizing lectures. And just as decades don’t divide as literally as they do on a calendar, “OK, boomer” is directed as much at Generation X — Jimmy Kimmel’s cohort — as baby boomers. Predictably, as soon as they learned they were being flipped off, older people began posting and writing about those selfish, unappreciative, uninformed youngsters — all but proving the point of the “OK, boomer” phenomenon in the first place. But I’ve found that, as long as you’re not condescending about your own tastes, young people are not only willing to be curious about them, but willing to share their own tastes with you.

As Apatow correctly pointed out, young people — and all of us, really — are “drowning in content.” It was recently announced that Netflix® alone had released more new shows in 2019 than all of broadcast and cable television combined had in 2005, and the company is scheduled to release even more next year. But many of those shows will include soundtracks that consist of both old and new songs. My fourteen-year-old daughter didn’t know or care much about Lou Reed when I published a biography of him a couple of years ago, but it definitely meant something to her when Finn Wolfhard, a sixteen-year-old actor on her favorite show, “Stranger Things,” mentioned him as an idol in an interview.

How did Toto’s “Africa,” a song from 1983, become one of the most fun memes of the past few years? Who knows? But one thing digital culture has done is flatten chronology. Young people encounter music from every period in all kinds of contexts without any indication of its provenance. Back in 2011, I remember teaching my writing students at the University of Pennsylvania about synesthesia, or sensory confusion (tasting smells or seeing sounds, for instance). As an example, I quoted Syd Barrett’s lyrics from Pink Floyd’s “Astronomy Domine”: “Lime and limpid green / the sound surrounds / the icy waters underground.” I mentioned that I wished I could play the song for them, but my classroom wasn’t outfitted with all the mod cons. One of my students, a seventeen-year-old freshman, raised his hand. He had Pink Floyd’s first album, The Piper at the Gates of Dawn, downloaded on his phone and was happy to play the song for us.

Pink Floyd remains a rite of passage for young music fans, and there are many others. But as our listening habits become more personalized, those rites of passage and new discoveries will likely become more individual and idiosyncratic. While Billie Eilish knew nothing of Van Halen, she was familiar with Madonna and Cyndi Lauper, which makes a lot more sense. When I took my daughter to see Katy Perry at Madison Square Garden in 2017, the opening act, Noah Cyrus, brought out her sister Miley and her father Billy Ray to play Billy Ray’s 1992 hit, “Achy Breaky Heart.” It was a lovely gesture: Her dad had never gotten to play the Garden when he was a huge star, so his daughters teamed up to give him the chance. He was thrilled. Now, of course, his appearance in the remix of Lil Nas X’s massive “Old Town Road” has made him a star all over again.

I was struck by one of the comments posted on Rolling Stone’s list of the “Best Songs of the 2010’s”: “It’s amazing how many of these songs I barely remember or never heard. I think the streaming age has made it impossible to have a cohesive, shared generational musical experience.” So true. When I speak to my students or to my daughter and her friends, it’s clear that, while they’re all listening to music, with few exceptions they’re all listening to different things. But their tastes shift quickly and so, given the amount of music they hear and have access to, I’m optimistic that the amount of sharing and eventual overlap will grow in the years ahead.

Group of school friends outdoors listening to music on ear buds and headphones.

One development that will help drive the breaking down of boundaries is the continued erosion of genre distinctions. Performances like Beyoncé being backed by an HBCU marching band at Coachella, Justin Timberlake working with Chris Stapleton, and Carrie Underwood teaming up with Ludacris push everyone out of their comfort zone, including fans. In addition, when performed live on stage, such collaborations create the sort of highly desirable social media moments that drive viewership. Musicians, as a rule, are avid listeners, and, like their fans, they are now exposed to a greater array than ever before. That, along with the desire to make a bold move that can attract attention in a crowded marketplace, leads to a willingness to try something new, and I have no doubt we’ll be seeing more such experimentation. I don’t think anyone would ever have predicted that indie icon Bon Iver would become a favorite of the likes of Kanye West, Rick Ross, Travis Scott and Vince Staples!

One other thought: “Globalism” may be a controversial term in the political realm, but in music it’s simply a fact of life. “Despacito,” on which singer Luis Fonsi and rapper Daddy Yankee were joined by Justin Beiber (another collaboration), was perhaps the most popular song of the past decade. Psy’s gigantic dance hit, “Gangnam Style,” and the boy band BTS brought Korean pop music to the international stage in a major way. The borders of the digital world are far more porous than geographical ones, so we can look forward to many more developments along those lines.

Look, I totally get the “OK, boomer” thing. I laughed out loud when I first heard about it, and recalled my own eye-rolling dismissals of old people trying to tell me what “good music” was. Back then, it also depended on who was talking to me. When the Rolling Stones and Eric Clapton discussed the blues artists they revered, I spent a lot of time hunting for music made in the twenties, thirties and forties — tunes that young people now can find online in ten seconds. In 1965, Pete Townshend insisted that “I hope I die before I get old.” Cool. I felt that way, too. But The Who made a terrific album just last year, and I’m glad they’re still doing it and that I’m still around to hear it.

However divided our society may be now in so many ways, as far as music is concerned, I honestly believe that the kids are all right, and the old folks are, too. This past decade may have sent us all off in different directions, but I’m confident that we’ll find each other again — perhaps just in passing, but over and over again. Open minds — and open ears — would help. Hopefully, some of those old people so incensed by Billie Eilish’s ignorance of Van Halen will take the time to listen to her extraordinary music … and maybe she and some of her fans will check out Van Halen in turn. She shares a birthday with Keith Richards, after all — and “Running With the Devil” is a bop!

Photo by Randy Holmes / Contributor, Getty Images

4 Tips to a Stronger Low Saxophone Section

When a saxophone section “clicks,” it’s an awesome musical moment. These musicians are technically proficient, well-balanced, in tune and great communicators across the ensemble.

In any band, an outstanding saxophone section can bring an irreplaceable timbre and depth to the entire group.

One of the factors that contributes to this sound is a robust low saxophone section. Without powerful saxophone presence, the rest of the section can’t bring the same level of magic to the musical moment.

So, how do you bring this sound to your ensemble? Here are four tips to get your low saxes to the next level.

READ: The Importance of Saxophone Mouthpieces

Tip 1: Low Saxes are Heavy, So Good Posture is Key

One of the most common challenges across all young baritone and tenor sax players is learning how to produce a strong sound with the weight of the horn bearing on them. Students need the proper equipment and training to help get them to produce a sound that supports the higher voices in the ensemble. Saxophone harnesses are a necessary tool to distribute the weight of the saxophone to not just the neck but also the larger muscle groups in the back and shoulders. Another important consideration is the possible use of a bari sax peg. In ensembles where the musician is sitting, the addition of a peg to support the saxophone’s weight on the ground can alleviate most, if not all, of the weight of the heavier saxophone.

READ: Beginner’s Guide to the Saxophone

Tip 2: Longer Tube = More Air

The first thing most players notice is that it requires much more breath support to produce sound on the baritone sax than higher-pitched saxes. There are many approaches to solve this challenge, including introducing your baris to your brass section’s breathing exercises and using a harness to allow for better and deeper musical breathing through good posture (see Tip 1 above).

Another factor to consider is the balance between the mouthpiece tip opening and reed hardness.

Perhaps most important to the goal of filling up the instrument with sound is the instrument itself. Design changes in neck and bore design have made considerable improvements in the way a big instrument like the baritone saxophone responds. In the new YBS-480, the redesigned student baritone saxophone in the Yamaha lineup, the horn utilizes the neck and bore design of the professional Yamaha saxophones.

THE YAMAHA EDUCATOR NEWSLETTER: Join to receive a round-up of our latest articles and programs!

Tip 3: Centered, Accurate Pitch 

Tuning the lowest voices sets the intonation for the ensemble, but what if your students in the low saxes are struggling with getting their horns in tune? The first thing to confront (and accept) is that not all notes on the saxophone will be perfectly in tune, regardless of the set-up. To get an accurate pitch, experiment with fingering adjustments, chordal substitutions and having higher voices adjust to lower voices.

Low saxes especially have large variances in the way they play, especially if they’re vintage horns or have been put through years of abuse in band programs.

The YBS-480 was designed with a shorter bell to compensate for the typical tuning challenges of the baritone saxophone and is meant to bring better consistency and accuracy in difficult tuning situations.

Tip 4: What They Play Matters

Move the needle forward on your students’ sound by finding a setup that you know works for the environments your students play in and for the sound you want. However, even with the most careful, best-intentioned students and meticulous repair services, the lower saxophones tend to get beat up in band programs. The YBS-480 is meant to bring your baritone saxophonists the same durability, intonation and response of the last model (the YBS-52) but with notable improvements in pitch accuracy and the option to add a peg. Getting smaller-sized students playing the horn earlier is now a possibility with the option of screwing a peg (sold separately) into the attached receiver.

Click here for more information about the new YBS-480 Baritone Saxophone.

How To Shop For a Surround Sound System

There’s nothing quite like the enveloping experience of a surround sound system. From virtual options offered by sound bars, to 5.1-channel discrete surround, all the way up to 11.2-channel systems, your home theater can be outfitted in a number of ways at a variety of price levels. Whether you choose to go the all-inclusive HTIB (Home-Theater-In-a-Box) route or piece your system together component by component, the audio portion of your favorite blockbuster movies, sporting events, video games and hi-def concert videos will perfectly complement the visuals on your home theater screen. After all, good picture deserves equally good audio.

Let’s explore what you need to know when you start on your quest to give the gift of surround sound.

Sound Bars with Surround Capabilities

The simplest and least expensive way to surround sound is to purchase a sound bar that offers virtual and/or 3D surround options such as DTS Virtual:X™, Dolby Atmos® or DTS:X™, all of which simulate sound effects that seem to move around you — even with a sense of height. Sound bars are relatively inexpensive and since they can be mounted on the wall or placed by your television, they take up very little space. Connectivity is easy too: All you need is a standard HDMI cable to hook up the sound bar directly to your TV. (Just make sure it supports the Audio Return Channel (ARC) feature. If not, you can also connect the sound bar via an optical cable.).

The Yamaha YAS-109 is a good example of an entry-level sound bar. It has Alexa built-in, along with subwoofers for deep bass, plus the ability to create virtual surround sound via DTS Virtual:X.

Black sound bar.
Yamaha YAS-109.

To take the sound bar experience a step further, check out the Yamaha MusicCast BAR 400. Like the YAS-109, it provides support for DTS Virtual:X as well as Wi-Fi®, Bluetooth®, Airplay 2® and Spotify Connect, plus voice control via Alexa and Google Assistant devices or Siri® via AirPlay 2. It includes a wireless subwoofer and because it’s part of the MusicCast family, you can easily create a 5.1-channel home theater by adding a pair of Yamaha MusicCast 20 or MusicCast 50 wireless speakers.

Sound Bar with Wireless Subwoofer.
Yamaha MusicCast BAR 400.

Home-Theater-In-a-Box (HTIB)

The next level up would be a complete integrated HTIB system that includes all the components and speakers necessary for a discrete (that is, non-virtual) surround sound experience. HTIBs come in a variety of sizes at different price points and with varying feature sets, but the Yamaha YHT-595OU provides particularly good value. It comes with five high-quality speakers (front left, center and right, plus rear left and right), a dedicated subwoofer, a MusicCast-enabled AV receiver and all necessary speaker wires. The big advantage here is setup time, which is pretty minimal. With such a system, you could be watching that surround sound movie before the popcorn is even popped!

5.1-Channel Home Theater System.
Yamaha YHT-5950U.

Individual Components

If you’re shopping for a true audio connoisseur, you’ll probably want to purchase individual components so they can create their own custom surround sound system. This isn’t nearly as daunting as it may seem. (There’s a wealth of information on the subject online, and right here on the Yamaha blog: Check out the article “Home Theater Basics” or the four-part “Home Theater on a Budget” series.) The heart of any such system is an AV receiver, and the good news is that most of today’s receivers can output at least a 5.1-channel signal consisting of front left, center and right speakers, plus rear left and right speakers, along with a subwoofer (that’s the “.1” channel, which consists of low frequencies only).

A great example of an entry-level AV receiver is the Yamaha RX-S602. It has a low-profile slimline design and an abundance of features, including voice control via Alexa and Google Assistant devices or Siri via AirPlay 2, as well as full 4K Ultra HD HDMI support, along with Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, AirPlay 2, Spotify Connect and MusicCast multi-room playback options. If you want to avoid having to run cabling to the rear speakers in your setup, simply add a pair of Yamaha MusicCast 20 or MusicCast 50 wireless speakers.

AV receiver.
Yamaha RX-S602.
MusicCast_STEREO_20
Yamaha MusicCast 20 speakers.
MusicCast_STEREO_50
Yamaha MusicCast 50 speakers.

For those who want to take their home theater experience beyond 5.1, you’ll need to start with a receiver that includes more speaker outputs. For example, to play back movies mixed in Dolby Atmos, you need a receiver with outputs for at least seven speakers and two subwoofers, plus, for the best immersive experience, at least two “height” speakers (which can be in-ceiling or upward firing). DTS:X has no official requirement in terms of the number of speakers (it adapts to however many your system has), but the more speakers, the better the experience. The Yamaha RX-A3080 offers 9.2-channel playback (with 11.2-channel processing) for playback of Dolby Atmos- and DTS:X-encoded material. It also features proprietary Yamaha Surround:AI® technology to automatically optimize the surround sound in real time. Like many other Yamaha AV receivers, the RX-A3080 also offers 4K Ultra HD support as well as voice control, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, AirPlay 2, Spotify Connect and MusicCast.

AV Receiver.
Yamaha RX-A3080.

Once you’ve selected the AV receiver, the next step is to choose the speakers for the system. This choice is largely subjective, so listen to as many as possible before making your final decision. Yamaha offers several good options for front and rear speakers, including NS-333 bookshelf speakers (designed specifically for home theater applications), or NS-555 floor-standing speakers, which have a three-way bass reflex design ideal for home theater.

Ns 333
Ns 555

The center channel normally carries dialog instead of music or background effects, and so the speaker you choose to carry that signal should ideally be designed for that purpose. A good option is the Yamaha NS-C444, which incorporates a two-way acoustic suspension and a waveguide horn that allows the sound waves to reach your ears without getting reflected off the walls.

Home Theater Speaker
Yamaha NS-C444 center channel speaker.

Finally, you’ll need to purchase at least one subwoofer (though, depending upon system configuration, sometimes two are required). This is a specialized speaker that has one job, and one job only: to reproduce the low frequencies that put the punch in action such as explosions, fight scenes and car chases. An excellent choice is the Yamaha NS-SW100 powered subwoofer, which features Advanced YST II (Yamaha Active Servo Technology II) for stable and accurate response of everything from the rumble of action movies to the low notes in a favorite movie musical or live concert film.

Powered Subwoofer.
Yamaha NS-SW100 subwoofer.

Check Out the Video

Here’s a video that shows you how to take a surround system to the next level:

Whether you decide to purchase a sound bar, go the all-inclusive HTIB route, or select individual components, shopping for a home theater surround sound system can be fun and, dare we say, binge-worthy too!

 

Ready to learn more about surround sound? Check out these related blog postings:

Home Theater Basics

Home Theater on a Budget, Part 1: Starter System

Home Theater on a Budget, Part 2: Intermediate System

Home Theater on a Budget, Part 3: Advanced System

Home Theater on a Budget, Part 4: Luxury System

MusicCast Wireless Surround Sound for Your 5.1 Home Theater

What Is DTS® Virtual:X™?”

What’s So Good About Dolby Atmos® and DTS:X™?”

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha sound bars.

Click here for more information about Yamaha Home Theater In a Box (HTIB) products.

Click here for more information about Yamaha AV receivers.

Click here for more information about Yamaha speakers and subwoofers.

Home Theater Basics

A quality home theater system is essential if you want to experience your favorite blockbuster movies, TV shows and live concert videos in all their glory. But it can actually be much more than that. With a home theater, you can immerse yourself in the exciting visuals and sound effects of an action-packed video game, or enjoy your favorite music, audiobooks, satellite radio and podcasts in full fidelity for an audio experience like you’ve never heard before. With advanced technology such as Yamaha MusicCast, you can even stream content to several different rooms in your home simultaneously.

For the home theater newbie, all the jargon and tech-talk may seem daunting. But it’s actually not all that complicated. In fact, with a little knowledge and planning, the process of buying and assembling a home theater system is much easier than you may think. Let’s take a look at what you need to know to get started.

Video Options

Every home theater starts with video. For the best visual experience, go for the largest screen TV your budget allows. A 720p (HD) screen resolution is a minimum requirement and acceptable for broadcast content, streaming and DVD movies, but the more common 1080p (“Full” HD) will really bring those Blu-ray Discs™ to life. Taking things up a notch is 2160p 4K Ultra HD technology, which provides up to four times the resolution of 1080p and is the standard for TV. Most 4K sets are available with HDR (Higher Dynamic Range) technology, which further expands the color range and contrast of 4K Ultra HD content.

Recently, several manufacturers have begun to release TV models with 8K resolution, offering four times the number of pixels of 4K, so if you’re comfortable being an early adopter, that’s another option to consider.

Two Audio Approaches

When it comes to the audio side of things, there are two basic approaches you can take. One is to select each audio component individually. Alternatively, you can simply buy a complete system (often referred to as “HTIB” — short for “Home Theater in a Box”) that includes all the components you need. A good example of this is the Yamaha YHT-5950U, which includes a 5.1-channel AV receiver with numerous advanced features, five matched speakers and a 100-watt powered subwoofer.

Set of seven components for audio home theater setup.
Yamaha YHT-5950U Home Theater In a Box system.

Ready to Receive

The center of any home theater — the “brains” of the operation — is the AV (audiovisual) receiver. It provides the inputs and outputs to route signal to and from the various components in your system, such as your television, gaming console, Blu-ray Disc / DVD / CD player(s) and speakers. Some AV receivers even include Bluetooth® capability for wireless operation and connectivity to your mobile devices and Wi-Fi® networks.

There are five main features you should look for in an AV receiver:

1. The number and types of inputs and outputs

2. The number of speaker channels

3. Power rating

4. Wireless capabilities

5. Sound quality

AV receiver front view with controls and display screen.
Yamaha AVENTAGE RX-A3080.

While each receiver is different, some important input/output (I/O) options include HDMI®, optical, coaxial digital and analog ins and outs; USB port connections; headphone outputs; and, of course, speaker outputs. Your I/O and channel needs will depend upon how large or small you want your system to be (and it’s always good to have future expandability in mind), but having at least 5.1 speaker channels is a good starting point. Moving beyond that — up to 7.1, 9.1 and 7.2.4 — you may even want to incorporate a second subwoofer, where you would need a “.2” classified receiver, which features an additional sub output. The Yamaha flagship AVENTAGE RX-A3080 can output 9.2 channels (nine speakers and two subwoofers) and process up to 11.2 channels for those blockbusters released in Dolby Atmos® and DTS:X™. It also provides 4K Ultra HD HDMI support for higher-definition picture viewing.

As for power rating, the output of amplifiers is measured in watts (more specifically, watts per channel). More power doesn’t always translate into better sound, but in general, a 200 watt per channel receiver will be louder than a 50 watt per channel model … though not four times as loud.

View of AV receiver front with controls and display screen.
Yamaha RX-V485.

Another important option in today’s receivers is the ability to wirelessly connect to modern devices such as smartphones, tablets and even speakers, and the Yamaha RX-V485 AV receiver provides options galore. It offers MusicCast as well as standard Wi-Fi (great for connecting to wireless speakers — see below) and even lets you use voice control from Alexa devices, Google Assistant devices, and Siri® via Airplay 2®.

Sound quality is both measurable and subjective, but it’s always a good thing when a receiver offers options to customize the sonics. Many Yamaha receivers offer a feature called YPAO™ (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer), which analyzes your space and components, then calibrates the speaker outputs for optimal listening.

Surround Yourself

Small vertical oval shaped audio speaker. The touchscreen controls on top are displayed.
Yamaha MusicCast 20.

Think stereo is good enough for a home theater? Think again. Once you hear your favorite movies and games coming at you in surround sound, you’ll wonder how you ever got along without it.

As we mentioned, the basic speaker setup for home theater is a 5.1 system. This includes main left and right speakers, a center channel speaker, left and right surround speakers (placed either in the rear of the room, or to the sides of the listening position) and a subwoofer for that extra low end (the sub is the “.1” channel). All these speakers — and more, if you have a 9.1 or 9.2 system — connect to the AV receiver.

There are also wireless speakers available that fit into any space and alleviate the need to run cables or having to drill holes in your walls and/or floor. The compact Yamaha MusicCast 20 is a good example of such a product, offering not only Wi-Fi, but AirPlay 2, Spotify® Connect and Bluetooth connectivity as well.

To the Bar

Long horizontal sound bar sitting on a console right below the large flat screen tv.
Yamaha MusicCast BAR 400.

Another option is to utilize a sound bar instead of front left/right/center speakers (some even contain built-in subwoofers!). A sound bar is typically placed in front of your television or mounted on a wall, and is connected via an HDMI, optical or analog output. Some sound bars can decode Dolby and DTS encoded soundtracks for virtual surround sound, but if you prefer the real thing, you can easily connect a sound bar to a subwoofer and/or rear speakers — even wireless models.

Sound bars are a sleek option where space is at a premium, and, in certain setups, can even replace the need for an AV receiver. As an example, the Yamaha MusicCast BAR 400, with its Bluetooth capability, allows you to connect your smartphone so you can wirelessly stream music from your favorite source.

Subwoofer

The subwoofer is different from the other speakers and is designed to reproduce only low frequencies — the ones that can shake your room with every explosion and jet plane flyover, which is especially important in home theater. Overall, they add a fuller sound to the movies you watch, the games you play, and the music you listen to.

Small square subwoofer.
Yamaha NS-SW1000.

There are two basic kinds of subwoofers: powered and passive. You can connect either to your AV receiver or sound bar, but passive subwoofers need an additional external amplifier to drive them, whereas powered subwoofers (which are the most common type) contain their own built-in amplifier — and one that is properly matched, ensuring optimum performance. The Yamaha NS-SW1000 powered subwoofer, for example, includes an amplifier with a whopping 1,000 watts of digital power for maximum impact.

Unlike full-range speakers, subwoofers can be placed pretty much anywhere in a room. That’s because the human ear isn’t able to discern low frequency sounds as appearing from any particular place — in technical terms, their sound isn’t localized.

Extras

There are a few extra accessories to consider when putting together a home theater. For one thing, you’ll need cables: HDMI cables to get from the TV to the AV receiver, audio cables to connect speakers (unless you’re using wireless speakers), and, in all likelihood, other kinds of analog or digital cables that your various components may need. Some components include cables, but these are generally not of the highest quality, so you may want to invest in premium cables, easily obtained from any dealer or online retailer.

Other add-ons may include speaker stands (for optimum positioning), mounting hardware, and — perhaps most importantly — a comfortable chair for enjoying all the great experiences your home theater can bring.

 

For more information about home theater, check out the following blog articles:

Five Reasons Why Home Theater is Better Than Going to the Movies

Home Theater In Small Spaces

Home Theater on a Budget, Part 1: Starter System

Home Theater on a Budget, Part 2: Intermediate System

Home Theater on a Budget, Part 3: Advanced System

Home Theater on a Budget, Part 4: Luxury System

Four Benefits of Having a Professional Do Your Home Theater Installation

MusicCast Wireless Surround Sound for Your 5.1 Home Theater

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha AV products.

Q&A with Yamaha Master Educator Daniel Berard

Daniel Berard is the Director of Bands at Chatfield Senior High School in Littleton, Colorado. Prior to this, he served at Wakeland High School in Texas, Grain Valley High School in Missouri and Fossil Ridge High School in Colorado.

Berard was part of the team that opened Fossil Ridge in 2004 and oversaw the explosive growth of the award-winning concert and marching band programs there. 

A graduate of the University of Wisconsin-Stevens Point and Colorado State University, Berard also led successful programs at Ponderosa and Douglas County High Schools. He is a sought-after clinician, adjudicator and conductor. Berard is also a Yamaha Master Educator

 

Q. When did you know that you were going to make music the focus of your professional life​?

A. I knew pretty early on in high school when I simply “found my place” in music. My music experiences in band, choir, theater, etc., provided me with a circle of friends, a home and a place to belong, and helped me understand myself and connect me to something larger. I was fortunate to have had incredible teachers and experiences at every level of my music education, and I was able to pursue many opportunities in and out of school.

I discovered so much great music during that time. Everything was interconnected — an album led to an artist who was influenced by so-and-so, and if you liked this then you’re really going to love that, etc.

I didn’t know what I was going to do at the time, but music spoke to me in a way that nothing else in school ever did, so there simply was no way that I couldn’t have music be central to my daily life. I have never regretted that decision for a moment!

Q. What is your favorite guilty pleasure food? Daniel Berard

A. A good old Wisconsin Friday Night Fish Fry.

Q. Why is music important to humanity?

A. Because music does exactly that: Helps us understand our humanity. When we understand our humanity, we understand that all that seemingly divides us pales in comparison to what brings us together. It is our humanity that will bring solutions to our problems, and our humanity is understood through the arts.

Q. Other than music, what brings you inspiration?

A. Growing up on a lake in Wisconsin and having spent most of my adult life in Colorado, the beauty of nature has always been a central, inspirational and grounding force in my life. Aside from that, I am inspired by so many things — art, painting, dance, poetry, athletics, film, design — that the list is too long to enumerate. This may sound cheesy, but I find the most inspiration from people who “live their purpose” by relentlessly pursuing their passion with such conviction that you simply can’t deny their authenticity, vulnerability and impact.

Q. Which person from history, dead or alive, would you want to have lunch with and what would you discuss​?

A. I would be interested in talking to President Barack Obama and hearing what he has to say about a wide range of topics.

Q. What is the most embarrassing moment of your life that you can share​?

A. I called a student by the wrong name for four years! She finally corrected me at graduation. When I told her that I was really proud of her, she finally told me that her name is Catherine not Caitlin. She said that she didn’t have the heart to correct me after the first month or so of her freshman year!

Q. What book is on your nightstand right now​?

A. “All the Light We Cannot See” by Anthony Doerr — I love this book — and “Blue Pastures,” a book of poems by Mary Oliver.

Q. What piece of music do you wish you had written and why​?

A. My “pop music” answer would be anything by the Beatles. Those songs are timeless and still resonate with people.

My “profound” answer is “Mass” by Leonard Bernstein. It is such an eclectic masterwork, combining so many different elements in such a unique way, spanning from comic and satiric to deeply moving and profound, intimate yet gargantuan. It is one of those works that I always discover something new in and moves me on an intellectual, spiritual and emotional level. The themes also resonate today every bit as vividly as they did when it was composed.

Q. What is your biggest pet peeve​?

A. Sitting in traffic.

Q. Why is it important to protect access to music education​?

A. Music and arts education is vital, maybe now more than ever, to our understanding of the human condition, the world around us and how we will forge our future. As John Lennon said, “You may say I’m a dreamer,” but I would love to envision an education system where every student is connected to a group of peers, a positive adult mentor and a community of people striving for a common purpose in an environment that promotes understanding, tolerance and acceptance. Students who participate in music on a regular basis have all this.

I believe the solutions to many of today’s problems could come from investing in students who are every bit as creatively, emotionally and artistically literate as we try to get them to be mathematically or scientifically literate in our school systems. Without access to arts education, a vast portion of the human experience is simply cut off from students in our school systems, and so often it is these artistic endeavors that provide the catalyst for success in other areas of school.

Q&A with Yamaha Master Educator Marcia Neel

Marcia Neel is Senior Director of Education for Yamaha Corporation of America. She is president of Music Education Consultants Inc., and serves as the education advisor to the Music Achievement Council. 

In this capacity, she presents sessions with practical success strategies for music educators at state music conferences, district in-service days and dealer workshops. Neel is also a Yamaha Master Educator. 

 

Q. When did you know that you were going to make music the focus of your professional life?

A. I can’t remember a time when I didn’t know that my life would revolve around music. I started piano lessons in 2nd grade and was selected to be in a city-wide choir in 4th grade, but it was in the 8th grade that my junior high school choral director provided me with opportunities to accompany as well as conduct the school choir. That was it! Fortunately, he was also the high school choir director, so along the way, I was provided with many additional opportunities to expand on those experiences.

Q. What book is on your nightstand right now?

A. “Becoming” by Michelle Obama

Q. Other than music, what brings you inspiration?

A. A high degree of excellence in any field inspires me and motivates me to continue seeking the same in myself. Having said that, I’m especially inspired by young people who have met and surpassed challenges and realized great success as a result of being actively involved in music-making.

Yamaha Master Educator Marcia NeelQ. What is the most embarrassing moment of your life that you can share?

A. On a flight from Columbus to Boston, the plane experienced sudden and extreme turbulence while I was walking in the aisle. The flight attendant sternly told me to sit down and grabbed me by the shoulders and threw me over a man’s lap who was sitting on the aisle. The way I landed on that man’s lap on my way to plopping down in the empty middle seat was really embarrassing — there was some very awkward body contact! I ended up marrying that man, and we have been together for over 40 years. To this day, I believe that the turbulence on that flight was divine intervention! 

Q. What piece of music do you wish you had written and why?

A. “Cockeyed Optimist” from South Pacific. It’s me to a T!

Q. Why is music important to humanity?

A. Music provides us with the ability to connect and communicate with one another in an honest and profound way that leads to bringing out the best in everyone. It is uniquely human and a vehicle of emotional expression that far surpasses the spoken word. It serves as a microcosm of emotions as evidenced by its powerful ability to transport us from one place to another in a matter of moments. It teaches us that the whole is bigger than the sum of its parts yet it completes us as individuals at the same time. Perhaps Henry Wadsworth Longfellow summarized it best when he observed that, “music is the universal language of mankind.”

Q. What is your favorite guilty pleasure food?

A. Peanut butter fudge — OMG!

Q. Which person from history, dead or alive, would you want to have lunch with and what would you discuss?

A. I would love to see “Hamilton” with Barack Obama then hang out afterward and talk about whatever comes up. Since he is such an authority on the Constitution, I would also love to spend time learning more about his interpretation of the intent of the Founding Fathers when they authored the original document.

Q. What is your biggest pet peeve?

A. Laziness — absolutely hate it!

Q. Why is it important to protect access to music education?

A. Music-making brings us together through the creative process and binds us for a lifetime. It transcends all cultures and teaches us acceptance and tolerance through the gestalt of the music-making experience. Not to minimize the innate value of performing great music, engagement in music programs also teaches students empathy and contributes to personal growth by developing characteristics that lead to the lifting of the spirit of mankind. We must continue to ensure that ALL students are provided with these life-changing opportunities.

Emily Threinen: Music’s North Star

As part of her True North approach to in­structing, Dr. Emily Threinen sees oppor­tunities to abandon the stick.

Specifically, the Director of Bands and Associate Professor of Music at the University of Minnesota recognizes when the baton is going to be helpful and when she needs to leave the podium to address an issue — especially with developing ensembles.

A Bright Light

Emily Threinen conducting

Often, Threinen makes teaching rather than conducting her priority. “If an ensemble is having trouble hearing and playing with a steady internal pulse, a beautiful stick technique will likely not solve the problem,” she says. “With developing ensembles, I think much less about my conducting and much more about my teaching. Certainly, the two work together, but if the musicians need attention on fundamentals, especially related to hearing beyond themselves, I have to put my own desire to conduct aside to ensure we are achieving what is most important in the moment.”

Threinen has officially gone from student to teacher — full circle at her alma mater, no less — but she’s not done learning. Her style is creating a positive teaching approach, preferring the carrot to the stick.

“I have high standards for my ensembles and for myself, and I try to show this through my enthusiasm, joy and passion for the work and not with disappointment that it doesn’t sound as excellent as it could,” Threinen says. “Certainly, there are rehearsals where I get frustrated, but I try not to use my frustration as a motivator. I have discovered that sometimes this can make the learning process more about my goals and less about the students, the composer or the music. Finding ways to stay positive in my teaching is one aspect that keeps me growing.”

This thinking furthers Threinen’s view of what it means to be a music teacher. “At the core, I believe the role of a music educator, conductor and music advocate is that of a servant,” she says. “We serve those who are in our classrooms, ensembles, community, institutions and beyond.”

Threinen’s passion and overall approach hasn’t gone unnoticed by her peers. “She is tenacious in pursuing, uncovering and unleashing the potential within the players to realize what she has imagined the music to be,” says Threinen’s friend, Dr. Travis J. Cross, the chair of music at the University of California, Los Angeles.

Directional Aid

Yamaha Master Educator Emily Threinen walkingA positive approach doesn’t mean ignoring details or problems. While Threinen’s delivery is direct and efficient, she focuses on being encouraging, clear and purposeful with communication.

She is not afraid to tell students when the work isn’t their best. With developing ensembles, she shares how musi­cians can practice to improve and what specifically needs to be addressed instead of just saying that a passage doesn’t sound good or accurate.

“My goal is to create a productive, engag­ing and professional environment,” Threinen says. “I don’t like to have tension in the rehearsal space for me or for the ensemble. I’m quite intentional in my verbal directives, and I try never to make an individual feel bad about themselves. I strive to be positive and encouraging with every group I stand in front of, regardless of ability, age or experience.”

When it comes to working with students with varied capabilities, teachers and con­ductors have a tough decision of where to set the bar. “I try not to set my standard to the lowest or highest denominator; I shoot for three-fourths of the way up,” Threinen says. “I don’t want to make our collective goals unattainable, but I want to push all of my students and ensemble members beyond what they think they can do. People tend to rise when they’re challenged.”

For those students at the top, Threinen encourages teachers to help them find ways to branch out and excel outside of school by taking private lessons, auditioning for competitions and honor ensembles, and performing with regional youth or community ensembles. When she was a high school teacher, Threinen worked with high-achieving students through chamber ensembles and the International Baccalaureate music program, which focused on critical and independent thinking. She also mentored students to use their active listening and other skills to identify composers, cultures, periods and styles in the Minnesota Music Listening Contest.

Threinen knows firsthand the importance of teachers, particularly in the arts. She credits her high school music teacher, Tim Smith, for encouraging her to pursue a career in music. “I can’t thank all of my music teachers enough or express how much they changed my life,” she says. “I wouldn’t be the same person if it wasn’t for each of them. It’s important that all teachers and professors know that they make an incredible impact on students’ lives, often in ways they may never know.”

Pivotal Points

When it comes to working with students at different stages in their musical careers, Threinen uses her own experiences as a guide to decide when to focus on inspiration and when to look at the realities and challenges of the job market.

With high school students, Threinen encourages the love of music. “When I work with high school students, I try not to think about the responsibility of them getting a job,” she says. “My excitement for the art form is what I always try to impress upon them. The practicality around a career in music is real, but I aim to put that second to inspiration. With this age, I believe that fostering desire through encouragement is essential.”

Younger students have their own chal­lenges. Threinen says it takes special and talented people to teach elementary and middle school. “There are so many other things younger students are thinking about at this stage when comparisons and self-identities start to take shape,” she says. “In middle school, music programs start emphasizing assessment and com­petition, which can change students’ perception of the essence of music and ensemble participation. Wouldn’t it be great if all music and ensemble programs could focus only on the music and the individuals creating it?”

With college-age musicians, Threinen remembers what she learned: Success has no singular definition and looks different for everyone. “At the end of college, I started to see that there was more variation in what success looked like than I originally believed,” Threinen says. “I have learned that there are infinite ways to be successful, and a career in music has many paths. I am practical with my collegiate students on the realities of the highly competitive job market, but I also try to encourage an open and opportunistic mindset.”

Steadfast and Sure

Threinen considers herself a lifelong student. As a music educator, she continues to use the skills that she has learned along her journey, including adaptability to varied situations.

“We all have our own barometer of what we will accept in a situation,” Threinen says. “Certainly, I have expectations, especially with musical elements in a score, but I also try to be flexible. I walk into every environment and try to adapt my expectations to what is in front of me. Each day in my job, each guest conducting engagement and each opportunity to teach is a chance for me to modify, refine and learn.”

Threinen adds, “What do I give to the music community? I give me as I am in the moment. I share my passion for music, my joy of teaching and my care for the people I am with. I do my best to be wholly present from our first introduction to the last double bar.”

When it comes to the trajectory of her career as well as those she nurtures, Threinen is proof that through hard work, dedication and flexibility, stars — North and otherwise — can be made, not just born.

Emily Threinen At A Glance

Photos by Rob Shanahan for Yamaha Corporation of America

This article originally appeared in the 2019 V4 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Manage Year-End Commitments

December is hectic for Jason Robb, director of bands at Rouse High School in Leander, Texas. He runs two high school holiday concerts, six middle school con­certs and a pancake dinner fundraiser for his booster organization.

Jason Robb, Rouse High School

He also holds student auditions for local band place­ments, participates in All-Region Band auditions and is involved with Rouse’s lock-in day of fun activities before winter break. Robb has learned, through trial and error, how to schedule events throughout the month without overwhelming his students or himself.

“One year, we had a concert on Thurs­day, lock-in on Friday and hosted a region band clinic and concert on Saturday,” Robb says. “It was so brutal. We now try and not have any events back-to-back.”

When the end of the year comes into focus, your schedule may be packed as you prepare students for concerts and events. Factor in other school commitments, such as submitting end-of-semester grades, and personal commitments like holiday shopping and entertaining, and you may become overwhelmed and overstressed.

“You come back from Thanksgiving break, and you basically have three to five weeks, and there isn’t that much time to get that stuff done,” Robb says. “As teachers, our job is to inspire these young leaders. If your cup isn’t full, you have nothing to pour into their cups.”

Here’s how to get through the busy month of December with grace.

Plan Ahead

Jenna Yee, Stiles Middle School

Figuring out your schedule weeks, months and even an academic year in advance will help things run smoothly.

“I really look at the calendar: How can we be more efficient, get more done without being at work all the time?” Robb says. “Be creative about ways to smush it down. … For example, how can you combine meetings?”

To stay on top of grading, Robb collaborates with his assistant directors, and everyone uses Google Sheets to stay organized.

Jenna Yee, band director at Stiles Middle School in Leander, Texas, inputs grades weekly, including in December, so she doesn’t fall behind.

In December, Yee balances two even­ing concerts, daytime winter assemblies, performances at the elementary schools, and a Region Band Clinic and Concert on a Friday/Saturday that she chaperones.

Ask for Help

Seek assistance at home from relatives or at school from colleagues, students and boosters — even if you’re not accus­tomed to seeking help.

“As musicians, we’ve been competing since we were little, so we don’t like delegating,” Yee says. “Ask for help, regardless of who you’re asking it from.”

See if your partner can pick up the slack at home when you’ll be busiest, and return the favor when he or she is swamped.

“I feel like it’s a sliding scale,” Robb says. “I’m all in for the family sometimes, and sometimes it slides down, and I’m deep into work. When do I need to work? When do I need to pause and spend a lot of time at home? … It’s all about communicating.”

At O’Fallon (Illinois) Township High School, Dr. Melissa Gustafson-Hinds, director of bands and music department chair, relies on her assistant band director and an administrative assistant who was recently hired for her booster organization.

“If I didn’t get help, we wouldn’t be as successful as we are,” she says. “It is too much for one person to handle alone — almost impossible.”

If your staff is tapped out, look to volun­teers. “It could be a parent or a super-smart student,” Gustafson-Hinds says.

Leading into winter break, Gustafson-Hinds manages several madrigal per­­formances, a joint feeder concert with more than 700 musicians, a choir con­cert, a band concert, various com­munity events, pep band events, concert band auditions, two district festivals, a parade on Thanksgiving weekend and four boosters meetings.

Prioritize Your Time 

You may feel like there is always more to do to meet your year-end obligations, whether that means staying late after rehearsals or answering every email in your inbox. Instead, end your workday at a set time, then focus on your personal life.

“Once I started realizing the workflow never stops, you do what you can get to, and then you go home,” Robb says.

To stay organized each day, Robb relies on different apps, including Spark email, Google Docs and iCal. “If any one of these tools were taken away, I would not be able to survive,” he says.

Finding work-life balance is essential. “If you are at school, be all in at school. … Do [your tasks] well, so that you don’t have to redo them,” Yee says. “Then, when you’re at home, be home. There will definitely be occasions where a little bleeds through in both directions, but if there is a balance between school and home most of the time, it definitely makes things easier.”

During this busy time, you may not have as much time to prepare for the holidays as you’d like. But you can check everything off your list without compromising.

“I do almost all my shopping online. At this point, our Christmases are spon­sored by Amazon Prime,” Yee says with a laugh. “When it comes to cooking and hosting, … my husband is more of a cook than I am. He deals with the food; I deal with the presents. It’s the delegation thing.”

Yee’s husband, Christopher, copes with his own busy work schedule as associate director of bands at Cedar Park (Texas) High School.

Schedule Self-Care

Melissa Gustafson-Hinds, O’Fallon Township High School

With so many obligations, you might be tempted to skip me-time to ensure that you meet all of your responsibilities. However, finding ways to pamper your­self can help make everything else easier to endure.

“If you’re a teacher, you’re giving year-round, but at the holidays, you’re giving more,” Gustafson-Hinds says. “You have to sometimes be the one [to say], ‘I’ve got to give to myself a little bit.’ [So] maybe I’m going to the gym, or I’m having dinner with friends. It’s scheduling a couple of things for yourself … just to cleanse yourself because we get so immersed in what we do.”

For best results, schedule self-care before you think you’ll need it. Whether you define self-care as daily workouts, reading in bed or getting a luxurious massage, add self-care appointments to your calendar and honor them as you would any other work commitment.

This article originally appeared in the 2019 V4 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Work with Music Dealers to Enhance Your Program

When working with Paige’s Music in Indianapolis, Indiana, local band directors give the game “red light, green light” a new twist.

Tim Dawson, Paige’s Music

Tim Dawson, director of school sales at Paige’s, works with band directors to put together presentations about instrument inventory based on red, yellow and green traffic lights.

All “red-light” instruments are not to be used anymore; “yellow” instruments need repairs or may need replacements in the future; and “green” instruments are in good condition. Directors then present this information to their school administrators to break down what services and instruments they need and why.

“It’s important that directors know their inventory [and] get their hands on the instru­ments to see what they have, what’s usable and what’s not usable,” Dawson says. “When a presentation is that clear, [it’s] more likely the directors will get what they need from the school.”

Like Dawson, school sales representatives at music stores work with directors to ensure they have the proper supplies to run their programs. Educators can reap the benefits of a strong relationship with store reps.

Focus Locally

Paul Ramsaier, Quinlan & Fabish

Working with local music stores has financial and strategic benefits for a music program. “We typically know the solutions and the brands that will serve the director’s program,” Dawson says.

Dealers can play a key role during the student membership and recruitment pro­cess. During back-to-school season, Quinlan & Fabish (Q&F) in Burr Ridge, Illinois, runs a Recruiting by the Numbers program. Repre­sentatives from the company visit schools throughout the Chicagoland area and set up stations for students to try instruments.

This process not only gets students excited, but it also helps with instrumentation. “Many students are immediately drawn to saxophone and percussion,” says Paul Ramsaier, school sales representative at Q&F. “Some of the instruments might not grab a student’s eye right away.With this recruitment program, each student will try at least one instrument from each instrument family including low brass and strings.”

Buying instruments locally can save replacement and repair costs. While inexpensive in­struments outsourced from abroad may look appealing to a music department’s tight budget or to unaware parents of young musicians, working with a local store can be the most budget-friendly decision.

“Sometimes it becomes very hard to pass up the too-good-to-be-true deal, [instruments] made in another country and imported at a wonderful price,” Dawson says. “[But] it’s going to show in the quality and longevity of the instrument.”

Savings in purchase price can be wiped out if the instrument does not arrive in playable condition. “Maybe you save $50 on a cello, but you have to spend $100 to $150 to get that cello set up in playing condition,” says Cris Behrens, manager of Summerhays Music in Murray, Utah.

Track Inventory and Repairs

Cris Behrens, Summerhays Music

Behrens recommends that teachers view their music programs like businesses, which includes putting instrument purchases, repair costs and all other expenses into a spreadsheet.

Too often, Behrens has seen music directors repeatedly pour money into repairs on the same instrument when buying a new one would be more cost-efficient. “I’m surprised when teachers don’t keep track of repairs on their instruments,” Behrens says. “[If] you add up how many times [an instrument has] been in the repair shop, they could’ve bought a new one over that five-year period.”

Directors should also understand the school’s budgeting process. “The director has to know the ins and outs of when budgets are created, reevaluated, presented to the board and passed,” Dawson says.

Communicate Clearly

To best serve their programs, teachers should provide details to their purchasing departments. For example, in bid requests, educators should specify brands or models. If left open, the lowest bid might win, and the instrument quality may not be what the directors want.

“Communication is key,” Ramsaier says. “Make sure we know exactly what you’re looking for; don’t be afraid to be specific.”

A good relationship with a music store requires teachers to ask for help. “While I understand an educator’s need to assert independence, the purchase of new instruments is definitely a collaborative process,” Ramsaier says.

However, Ramsaier explains that ed­u­cators should balance that need for in­dependence with a desire to learn more.

Because music stores have relationships with many different school music programs, teachers can tap into that wealth of know­ledge to learn what works for other organi­zations. If directors pay attention to aspects they like about another school’s program, they can work with the music dealer to follow that example. “If we have a director who comes in and says, ‘I want to outfit my wind ensemble with tubas, what does [this other] school use? I’ve heard them, and they have a wonderful tuba sound,’ we can guide them toward that model,” Dawson says.

Overall, think of instrument dealers as collaborators. “The music store can be your partner, a resource,” Ramsaier says. “Capitalize on that. Ask questions. Let them share their experience with you.”

This article originally appeared in the 2019 V4 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

 

Case Study: Private School Outreach

When busloads of middle school students with the Mater Dei Music Academy pull up to Disneyland or Knott’s Berry Farm, motivated young musicians disembark, ready to perform and have fun.

Trombone players of the Mater Dei Music Academy performing at a local amusement park

After their concert, they enjoy the rides at these Orange County, California, theme parks.

Playing at Disneyland or Knott’s is just one aspect of the Mater Dei Music Academy, an after-school program started by Mater Dei High School in Santa Ana during the 1970s. Attracting 300 to 400 students each year, the academy offers 4th- through 8th-grade students an ensemble music experience that they may not otherwise have.

With opportunities to participate in summer camps, a recorder class, beginning band, advanced band, jazz band, drumline and string ensembles, the students showcase their work at community centers, the Southern California School Band and Orchestra Association Festival and at the Segerstrom Center for the Arts, the county’s renowned concert hall.

Giving students performance experiences at a range of public venues is an important part of this program, says Taylor Smith, director of the Music Academy and associate band director at Mater Dei High School.

Justine Kadota joined the Music Academy for summer camp, then stayed with the program for two years playing trumpet in the advanced and jazz bands. “There is so much competition for kids’ attention that music often gets overlooked, which is to the detriment of their development,” says Susan Kadota, Justine’s mom. “The camaraderie and opportunity [at the academy] to put your musical ability to the test was great. This model is key to having kids appreciate music and set their sights on high school music.”

Open-Door Policy

Each year, Smith contacts 10 area private Catholic elementary and middle schools as well as homeschooled students to let them know about the Music Academy. “I have a very open-door policy,” Smith says. “Any student from another school or homeschool kids can find a place here.”

Mater Dei instructors teach Music Academy students at their local schools during the day and two evenings a week at Mater Dei High School. “The goal is to have the students play their instruments at least four times a week,” Smith says.

Finding the right days and times for rehearsals and events can be challenging, says Fernando Martinez, Mater Dei’s director of instrumental music. But with careful planning and consistent communication with parents, students, principals and instructors, the scheduling works out.

The Marian Alliance, three Catholic schools in inner-city Santa Ana neighborhoods, is among the schools served by the Music Academy. Overall registration at the Marian Alliance schools has been climbing, in part because in­strumental music is a requirement in the curriculum through the Music Academy, Smith says.

Marian Alliance students receive scho­larships and financial assistance to attend the Music Academy. Other students pay a small annual “suggested donation,” Smith says. “Through collaboration and partnerships with our local parish schools, benefactors and parent support, we’ve been able to establish something valuable. But there’s always room for growth.”

A New Stage Presence

Taylor Smith, Mater Dei High School

Smith joined the staff at Mater Dei High School in 2016 and has made a concerted effort to bolster the Music Academy’s image and experiences.

During Smith’s first year as director and with only a handful of days to prepare, Music Academy students were invited to perform an opening piece at the annual Mater Dei High School choir spring concert at the Segerstrom Center.

The students quickly learned and memorized the theme music from “Star Wars.” They performed on stage without formal attire or music stands and received a standing ovation. “We were able to talk about the program for about 30 seconds,” Smith recalls. “A couple of people were interested in donating to the program and wanted to know more.”

Today, Music Academy students still open the spring choir concert at Segerstrom, but they are more rehearsed, have a more polished stage presence and are set up as a concert band, wearing performance attire and playing seated while using music stands.

“When they get on stage, they handle themselves very well,” says Bruno Cilloniz, a Marian Alliance band director and Mater Dei percussion director. “It is awe-inspiring. As a director, it’s great to watch them savor every moment.”

Looking ahead, the Music Academy jazz band will be performing and competing during the Reno Jazz Festival at the University of Nevada for the first time in April 2020.

Recruitment Success

Taylor Smith conducting the music academy band

In 2019 the Music Academy won the silver award in the Music for All Advocacy in Action Award’s Beginning Recruitment Program category. “The award meant a lot to me, and the administration was excited,” Smith says. “It made me feel like I’m on the right track. My goal is to get music education in the private [education] sector in our area.”

That objective isn’t always easy, especially when public and private school funding for the arts is faltering in California. Some 88 percent of the state’s schools are failing to meet the California Education Code requirement of providing arts education, according to the arts advocacy group CreateCA.dreamhosters.com.

The Music Academy helps to fill this gap as well as serves to keep the arts thriving in Mater Dei High School’s instrumental program, which includes a marching band, color guard, concert band, wind ensemble, symphonic band, percussion ensemble, jazz band, string orchestra and a newly added guitar program.

Some Marian Alliance students, who enrolled in the Music Academy in the 5th grade, are now seniors at Mater Dei.

“We’re starting to see the fruits of our labors,” Cilloniz says. “They are amazing musicians and want to major in music and get scholarships at prestigious music schools around the country. The families are very appreciative.”

A key factor in the Music Academy’s success is that it brings students to the high school campus two nights a week, allowing them to get comfortable there. The 8th-grade Music Academy students get exposure to higher level music by performing with the high school band. The high school band directors also have an opportunity to watch the students who show the most promise.

Some, like 8th grader Derek Cornejo, who plays trombone, baritone and tuba, are invited to play in the high school marching band. He will attend Mater Dei High School next year.

“As a parent, music is an important aspect of [my son’s] education,” says Ed Cornejo, Derek’s dad. “It’s made him a well-rounded person. He’s enthusiastic. Derek comes home very excited about what he’s learned.”

As the Music Academy program continues to receive wider recognition, the most rewarding aspect for Smith hasn’t changed. He enjoys seeing the students’ excitement as they develop their musical ability and values building personal connections with the kids and their families.

“They always come up for a hug and their families do too,” Smith says. “Seeing the students light up and achieve something in their stressful world is gratifying. Some of these kids are the rocks of their family. … They need a place to feel comfortable, grow and stay connected.”

Photos Courtesy of Mater Dei High School

 

This article originally appeared in the 2019 V4 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Ignite a Passion for Practice

Rather than relying on external motivation, successful teachers inspire students to fuel their own flame to attain a higher level of mastery. To this end, Chris Gleason, instrumental music educator at Patrick Marsh Middle School in Sun Prairie, Wisconsin, taps into “the deeply human need to direct [one’s life] and to learn, create and do better.”

Instrumental educators must teach students how to practice and encourage them when they are reluctant to do so. “Teaching practice methods in fun­da­mentals may be one of the most important things I do from the podium,” says Nolan Jager Loyde, assistant director of fine arts over instrumental music at Round Rock (Texas) Independent School District.

Directors can promote a burning desire in students to practice with the following ideas from Loyde, Gleason and Dr. Travis J. Cross, professor, director and chair of music at the Herb Alpert School of Music at the University of California, Los Angeles.

Fire Them Up

Dr. Travis J. Cross, UCLA

Teachers need to create opportunities for autonomy, mastery and purpose — the three keys to intrinsic motivation. “Autonomy means to allow students to have a say in what they do, when they do it and how they do it,” says Gleason, who was named the 2017 Wisconsin Teacher of the Year and a semifinalist for the 2017 GRAMMY® Music Educator Award. “Mastery means becoming better at something that matters. Purpose means finding a cause [that is] greater and more enduring than themselves. I teach my students that talent is not born, but rather created.”

Nothing motivates students more than sounding good. “There needs to be an opportunity in every rehearsal or practice session to sound good,” Cross says.

Spark Ideas

Chris Gleason, Patrick Marsh Middle School

Teachers can guide students toward productive practice routines by asking questions to inspire reflection and self-assessment. Questions also empower students by encouraging critical thinking.

The best teachers ask the best ques­tions. “They rarely tell learners anything but rather lead them to understanding,” says Gleason, who frequently gives presentations on “Lighting a Fire in Kids.” “I ask [students] things like, ‘How did things go this week?’ ‘Did you make the improvements?’ ‘What did you do to overcome challenges?'”

Gleason also ensures that students have spaces to practice throughout the day. “Our kids have access to practice rooms before and after school, during re­source or study hall, and lunch,” he says.

If a high school or middle school doesn’t have dedicated practice rooms, directors can divide students into groups and have them practice in a windowed office that a director can monitor from the podium. “[This separation] allows students from one section to practice individually … while the conductor works with different sections,” Cross says.

Kindle the Right Habits

Nolan Jager Loyde, Round Rock Independent School District

Loyde assigns traditional practice logs but also finds value in student journals. “Students describe their methods of problem solving, tempos, measures, etc.” says Loyde, who presented a session to educators on “Teaching Students How to Practice” at the 2018 Music for All Summer Symposium.

When Cross was a graduate student, he realized that his most successful peers carried notebooks into every music lesson and rehearsal. Afterward, they would list their goals for the fol­lowing lesson in their notebooks. “I watched a graduate performance major transcribe his goals to six pages of his notebook, which he used as a starting point for what he assigned himself to practice,” Cross says.

Neither Loyde nor Gleason require their students to practice for a specific amount of time. “It’s all about efficiency for me,” Loyde says. “I teach students to work until the task is complete, so it is important that they set goals.”

Gleason also encourages his students to set a goal and work toward that. “I teach them the importance of deep practice or that zone where we are most productive and focused,” he says.

Younger musicians often lack listening and self-assessment skills, Cross says. “I recommend recording and playback,” he says. “This is obviously much easier today than when I was in school.”

As a student Loyde created beats in GarageBand that helped him maintain tempo and pitch during practice ses­sions. He encourages his students to do the same. Or they can listen to a playlist and play along with the beat while woodshedding technique.

Catch Their Glow

Gleason has developed a strategy to deal with students who refuse to practice. “Educators must realize that we cannot control, force, manipulate or coerce students to do anything,” he says. “My role as an educator is to inspire students to be the best that they can be. I do this by preparing well, selecting great literature and caring about each student. I believe that if you teach to the heart, the mind will follow.”

This article originally appeared in the 2019 V4 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Women in Music Education

As a female Director of Bands and Associate Professor of Music at the University of Minnesota, Dr. Emily Threinen is aware of the importance of gender equality in music. “I believe that representation matters and it is important for women and under-represented people to hold positions of leadership and to be treated fairly and equally in all areas of the music industry — and beyond,” Threinen says. “Representation in such positions can empower younger individuals to see themselves in similar roles.”

While Threinen acknowledges gender imbalance and has experienced bias in her own career, she focuses her energy on striving for excellence through the lens of service. “As conductors, I believe our primary goal is to serve composers and their intent to the best of our ability,” she says. “As educators, we serve our students, our institutions, our communities and our profession. As advocates, we strive to connect outstanding work beyond our walls.”

Threinen understands the importance of having honest, open and sometimes uncomfortable conversations about topics related to women and under-represented people in the industry. “When asked questions about my gender, I tend to shift the question or change the perspective,” she says. “This is because in my work, I want people to see me as a conductor and educator foremost. However, I do recognize that identities and experiences are integral to who we are as artists.”

Knowing exactly how to address diversity and inclusivity in music programs and class­rooms is not easy. “As educators, thinking critically of how we can continue to grow, support and be inclusive of all is essential,” she says. “Music rehearsals and classrooms are perfect spaces to unite people of varied identities, backgrounds and cultures to come together for one common goal — to make music.”

In addition to acknowledging that there is still work to do regarding representation, Threinen appreciates the groundwork that has already been done. “As a woman in my 40s, I stand on the shoulders of many women who have inspired me and paved paths ahead of me,” she says. “I also stand on the shoulders of men who have been instrumental in the advancement of women and under-represented people. We have much to do, but I believe we are in a better place today than we have ever been.”

This article originally appeared in the 2019 V4 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Q&A with Yamaha Master Education Gary Lewis

Gary Lewis is the Director of Orchestral Studies and the Bob and Judy Charles Professor of Conducting at the College of Music at the University of Colorado Boulder. 

Lewis is also a Yamaha Master Educator and Music Director of the West Texas Symphony Orchestra.

 

Q. When did you know that you were going to make music the focus of your professional life?

A. Growing up in Oklahoma where the weather is crazy, I always thought I would be a meteorologist. However, I owe my high school band directors for nurturing my love of music and for being such great role models as educators. It was as a junior in high school that I decided to pursue music education as a vocation.

Q. Other than music, what brings you inspiration?

A. There are many things, but great art and travel come to mind. Fortunately, I usually get to enjoy both with my wife. We love to travel and experience different cultures. It is inspiring to see our two young boys grow and develop. Every day is a new discovery.

I’m also fortunate to live in Colorado, a really beautiful place. I never take for granted the beauty of the mountains and how it feels to be at altitude.

Q. What is the most embarrassing moment of your life that you can share?

A. Both happened while conducting in costume, something I’ve sworn to never to do again. While I was on the faculty at the University of Michigan, Gustav Meier invited me to conduct Michael Daugherty’s “Oh Lois!” (from his Metropolis Symphony) for the annual Halloween concert. The schtick included me beginning the work dressed as Clark Kent, jumping into a phone booth (placed next to the podium) and emerging as Superman to finish the piece. Unfortunately, there was a wardrobe malfunction — the clasp on the cape broke, leaving me standing in a skin-tight costume, little red shorts and all, in front of 3,500 people in a sold-out Hill Auditorium.

The other embarrassing episode was years later, also at a Halloween concert, when I attempted to hop onto the podium (still not sure why), to conduct “Jupiter” from the The Planets by Holst, while wearing an alien mask. I couldn’t see clearly through the mask, misjudged the height of the podium, and fell and broke my fibula. According to the orchestra, what followed was the fastest tempo at which we had ever played it. The things we do for entertainment!

Q. What book is on your nightstand right now?

A. There are three books on my nightstand currently: Ron Chernow’s Alexander Hamilton,” “Thinking Fast and Slow” by Daniel Kahneman (I’m curious to know if there are applications for musicians of his theory of the two systems that drive the way we think. System 1 is fast, intuitive, and emotional. System 2 is slower, more deliberative, and more logical), and “Quiet” by Susan Cain, which explores what it is like to be introverted in a society where extroverts tend to dominate.

Q. What piece of music do you wish you had written and why?

A. I have often said that Mozart’s “Don Giovanni” may be the most perfect work of art I have had the opportunity to conduct. Everything about it seems perfectly crafted and balanced.

On the other hand, it would be cool to have written a truly revolutionary work that shifted the paradigm of western classical music like Beethoven’s “Eroica” symphony or Stravinsky’s “Rite of Spring.”

Q. Why is music important to humanity?

A. Music is important because it allows us to express the inexpressible, to communicate who we are as humans. It is also important in the way it brings people together and teaches us to treat one another with compassion and empathy — two attributes that are needed more and more in our society.

Simply put, great art makes us better people. One of the most important attributes music and art teach us is empathy. This is not as easy to codify as test scores and brain development or teamwork and social skills. In my opinion, empathy is most central to the importance of music and art in our development as human beings. As Brian D. Cohen wrote on HuffPost, “The development of empathy in an individual from art mirrors the original derivation of the term; it is art that makes us empathic; art that models others’ inner lives for each of us; art that attunes us to experience and suffering beyond ourselves. It is imagination, the other signal attribute of creative thinking, that lets us see how the world can be changed to be better for ourselves and for others.”

I’m convinced of music’s ability to make young people more human, especially if the experiences are collaborative and involve emotionally expressive music making.

Q. What is your favorite guilty pleasure food?

A. I would eat ice cream every night if I could.

Q. Which person from history, dead or alive, would you want to have lunch with and what would you discuss?

A. There are so many and I will undoubtedly think of others later. However, there are two who have been on my mind lately. First, Abraham Lincoln — I am fascinated with the poise he demonstrated while under withering pressure and criticism and how he surrounded himself with people with differing viewpoints. I would also like to experience firsthand his intellect and homespun wisdom.

Second, Johannes Brahms because his music seems to be a reflection of his complex and enigmatic personality. The late piano intermezzi are so incredibly intimate, yet much of his other music seems more emotionally restrained and cerebral. I would love to learn more about what made him tick hoping it might help me in my pursuit to better understand and interpret his music.

Q. What is your biggest pet peeve?

A. People who are bullies.

Q. Why is it important to protect access to music education?

A. My wife recently taught music in an elementary school where, in her two kindergarten classes, there were 11 languages spoken. Many of them had limited or no English skills, but the music classroom was the one place where they could successfully assimilate and collaborate.

Large ensembles in our schools are also important in this regard and hold a special place in this process. In addition to being surrounded with great art and its beauty, we get to work with wonderful people and share an intimate communication and collaboration that many don’t have in their lives. Working with beautiful people who are all different, from different backgrounds, cultures, belief systems, races, creeds, orientations is the greatest blessing I derive from my job as a conductor.

John Coltrane said, “If you want to be a better musician, become a better person.” I would suggest it is also true that being a musician can make you a better person.

Mater Dei’s Mentor Program

In Case Study: Private School Outreach, we learned about the Mater Dei Music Academy.

female student playing the flute

The middle school students in the program join the Mater Dei High School band — a close-knit group of about 50 — for several performances throughout the year.

To form a cohesive unit among students from a variety of schools and ages, Taylor Smith — director of the Music Academy and associate band director at Mater Dei High School in Santa Ana, California — created a mentorship program.

High schoolers, many who were once Music Academy students, partner with the younger musicians during weekly practice sessions. They work with the middle schoolers in their instrument sections on basic fundamental skills. The high school students receive service hours by participating in the mentor program.

“Even just sitting in the [younger] ensemble and playing along with them really helps,” Smith says. “The older students are working with students who are often just trying to make a sound. They get to inspire those students in getting comfortable with playing.”

This kind of student leadership reflects Mater Dei High School’s goal to “consistently raise the bar through positive reinforcement and motivation,” says Fernando Martinez, director of instrumental music at Mater Dei High School.

Music Academy students perform with the high school band at a football game in November, a Christmas concert, and at the high school choir concert, at which the high school band also participates, in March.

Smith hopes the mentor program perpetuates itself: As mentors become seniors and graduate, the incoming freshmen become new mentors to the younger students.

“We depend on that family atmosphere,” he says. “There’s not a whole lot of needing to inspire these kids. They’re just thankful to be here and perform with the high schoolers.”

Photos Courtesy of Mater Dei High School

This article originally appeared in the 2019 V4 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Letter to Myself: Richard Floyd

Yamaha Master Educator Richard Floyd is State Director of Music Emeritus at the University of Texas at Austin. A recognized authority on conducting and music advocacy, Floyd pens a letter to his younger self, sharing advice, anecdotes and inspiration for a fulfilling career in music education.

 

Dear Younger Richard:

It’s 1962, and you are about to embark on an amazing lifelong journey. Let me remind you that you are not here today because you finally learned to play the chromatic scale at MM=144, discovered a new alternate fingering on your clarinet or mastered a challenging passage. You chose music because of an emotional connection. Music touched your heart and soul in a series of defining moments, and you realized that you couldn’t live without it and became consumed with the dream of sharing it with others.

Always remember that it is the art of making music that gives it true value. In truth, recreating notes on a printed page is no more or less rewarding than solving an algebra equation. No music has been created. But when those notes and rhythms are infused with your spirit and passion for creating and sharing beauty, the outcome is priceless.

Richard Floyd conducting

Never lose sight of this reality. Trust me, it will be easy to become obsessed with personal achievements, extrinsic goals, a boundless litany of suggested strategies, endless competitions and alluring peripheral activities that disguise themselves as being central to the true purpose of music education. Do not be seduced by these illusions. If you remain ever mindful of those magical moments that ignited your fire for making and teaching music, and you strive to create those kinds of experiences with your students, you will enrich countless lives.

Continually remain a student and be good to yourself. Why? To paraphrase famed British conductor Simon Rattle, “The more you put into yourself, the more you will be able to give back to your students and to the music.”

To that end, strive daily to expand your horizons. Give yourself permission to “color outside the lines.” If you insist on staying inside the lines — or within the safety of your comfort zone — those lines will become your boundaries.

On your journey, take with you a fortress of great music that offers you inspiration, comfort and revival. There will be countless times when you will need to be reminded of music’s intrinsic place in your life and in the lives of others. Your musical fortress must reflect the greatest music that humanity has to offer. Be it Mozart or Mahler or contemporary composers on the cutting edge of compositional thought, make it the best of what is out there. And it must be a compendium of great music that constantly grows and evolves.

One of my favorite quotes is one by Ursula K. LeGuin: “It is good to have an end to journey toward; but it is the journey that matters, in the end.” Let that core reality be your guide.

And above all, never forget that life’s journey is a do-it-yourself project. It’s you — and only you — who can go for it!

Best,

Richard in 2019

 

This article originally appeared in the 2019 V4 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Q&A with Superintendent Elizabeth Lolli

Dr. Elizabeth Lolli is the superintendent of the Dayton (Ohio) Public Schools (DPS), an urban district of 14,000 pre-K to high school students. 

In 2016, she took the bold step of bringing back the DPS Music Education Program after a 10-year absence.

In addition to funding the purchase of new instruments for the district (some of which came through ESSA Title IV-A), Lolli hired full-time band and choral directors for each of the secondary schools. She also hired two arts education administrators to facilitate the adoption and implementation of an articulated, standards-based curriculum.

Today, every DPS elementary student takes music while enrollment in secondary programs has grown to more than 1,000 participants — 17.5% of secondary enrollment overall! Dr. Lolli is the embodiment of “making a difference.”

 

Q. When did you know that you were going to make music the focus of your professional life?

A. As a young child, I knew that I wanted to be a teacher. I loved to sing and participated in church and school choirs. It was in high school that I decided I wanted to be a music educator.

Q. What piece of music do you wish you had written and why? Dr. Elizabeth Lolli

A. Bach’s “Jesu, Joy of Man’s Desiring” because it is simply a beautiful piece of music. The melodic line and repetitive rhythmic pattern make my heart sing!

Q. What is the most embarrassing musical moment of your life?

A. It happened on the practice field during summer marching band camp. As a trombone player, I was always in the front row surrounded by boys. On this particular day, all I could think about was the fact that I would be taking my driver’s ed test right after band practice. Our director called on me to play the music as a spot check. It was the classic “Get It On” with the trombone slides in the beginning. I was so distracted because of my pending driver’s test that I couldn’t make my lips, tongue, lungs or slide work! I was so embarrassed!

Luckily, I passed the test later that afternoon, so I was able to turn my energy back to practicing. The next week when I was spot checked again on the field, I was ready and nailed it!

Q. What is your biggest pet peeve?

A. People who do not respect children enough to teach their very best every day, all day.

Q. Why is music important to humanity?

A. Music expresses the soul of the population. It expresses our cultural ideas and beliefs. Music also supports brain development and learning. We know the research on how music education affects math and reading. I have seen it in my own personal experience.

Q. Which person from history, dead or alive, would you want to have lunch with, and what would you discuss?

A. I would like to talk to Abraham Lincoln. I would discuss his presidency and his strategy and beliefs about the Civil War.

Q. What book is on your nightstand right now?

A. Behold the Man by Bodie and Brock Thoene.

Q. Other than music, what brings you inspiration?

A. Worshiping in church and studying the life of Christ bring me inspiration. In addition, I am also inspired by young children as I see so much potential for success.

Q. What is your favorite guilty pleasure food?

A. Brownies and ice cream

Q. Why is it important to protect access to music education?

A. Music is vital to the whole child. Music education is an opportunity for children to learn about their culture, their heritage and their own preferences for listening. Rhyme, rhythm and repetition are all part of learning to read. Where else besides reading are these items taught? Music!

 

SupportED 2019v4 cover with Emily ThreinenThis article originally appeared in the 2019 V4 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Inclusive Repertoire

Dr. Emily Threinen, Director of Bands and Associate Professor of Music at the University of Minnesota, talked about her teaching philosophy in the blog post, Emily Threinen: Music’s North Star.

Here, she focuses on how music educators have an opportunity to strive for inclusive musical experiences and repertoire for students and audiences. “Our music selections highlight our values. Making decisions on programming is incredibly personal, complicated, sometimes controversial and critical,” she says.

According to Threinen, contemporary concert programming features repertoire that “celebrates our past, defines our medium, challenges and inspires us, expands our aural expectations and includes multiple voices of representation. We may not always hit the mark, but I believe it’s important to try.”

Threinen, who currently serves on the council of the Institute for Composer Diversity at the State University of New York at Fredonia, says she has recently started to intentionally include lesser-known compositions into her programs. She cites the institute’s Composer Diversity Database as a useful resource for finding repertoire and composers.

“My advice is to continue to expand knowledge of repertoire and composers; have discussions with colleagues, community members and students; be aware of implicit biases; and consider how our repertoire choices may impact individuals or groups,” Threinen says.

This article originally appeared in the 2019 V4 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Having Trouble Hearing the Dialogue of Your Favorite Holiday Movies?

On a cold winter day, curling up on the couch with a warm blanket and putting on a feel-good holiday film like It’s a Wonderful Life, A Christmas Carol or Miracle on 34th Street might seem like the perfect idea. But there’s one catch — you may not be able to hear the dialogue clearly.

That’s because the soundtracks to many of these old classics were recorded using the less sophisticated audio formats available at the time — mono or stereo, both of which are limited in their capabilities, as compared to modern surround sound. So if you want to get the most of your holiday movie watching experience and not miss out on some of your favorite dialogue, you’ll need an upgrade. The Yamaha YAS-209 sound bar with wireless subwoofer is one such solution.

Living room entertainment center with television and sound bar.
Sound bar remote controller.

In addition to providing features like DTS Virtual:X™ virtual 3D surround sound, Wi-Fi® and Bluetooth® music streaming as well as Alexa built-in voice control, the YAS-209 offers proprietary Yamaha Clear Voice technology for enhanced dialogue clarity. To turn it on, simply press the Clear Voice button on the sound bar’s remote control, as shown in the illustration on the right.

In technical terms, Clear Voice emphasizes the vocal frequency ranges and harmonics for greater intelligibility, while at the same time, remaining frequency components are attenuated. In other words, it pushes background noise and sound effects to the back of the soundtrack where they belong so the dialogue is front and center — without you having to raise the volume every time your favorite character appears on-screen.

Clear Voice not only works with older films, but modern films with surround sound as well. A Christmas Story, Home Alone, and (dare we say) Die Hard are all enhanced both from a dialogue perspective as well as through DTS Virtual:X virtual 3D surround sound, so you’ll get the best of both worlds — from bone rattling explosions on the Nakatomi building to hearing John McClane insult Hans Gruber — all without lifting a finger to adjust the volume.

Check out this video for more information on how to improve dialogue on your TV.

Click here to learn more about the YAS-209 sound bar.

Q&A with Yamaha Master Educator Richard Floyd

Richard Floyd is State Director of Music Emeritus at the University of Texas at AustinHis 55-plus-year career as a music educator and conductor began at Richardson Junior High School and J.J. Pearce High School before he moved to the collegiate level at the University of South Florida, Baylor University and the University of Texas. A recognized authority on conducting and music advocacy, Floyd is a frequent clinician, adjudicator and conductor. He is a Yamaha Master Educator.

 

Q. When did you know that you were going to make music the focus of your professional life?

A. I came to the realization in high school that music would be an essential necessity in my adult life. As I started looking at college catalogs the major “music education” leaped off the pages. From that point forward I never thought of making music and/or teaching music as a profession but rather a calling.

Q. Other than music, what brings you inspiration?

A. I am inspired by family, friends, the human spirit, the beauty of nature, passion for life and the unbridled love for learning that I see in the eyes of colleagues and students.

Q. What book is on your nightstand right now?

A. There is never just one. Right now, it’s John Grisham’s “The Reckoning,” David McGill’s “Sound In Motion” and David Brooks’ “The Road To Character.” Basically, the formula is one book for entertainment, one book for growth and one book for enlightenment.

Q. What piece of music do you wish you had written and why?Yamaha Master Educator Richard Floyd

A. I can narrow it down to two. “O Magnum Mysterium” by Morten Lauridsen or Samuel Barber’s “Adagio for Strings.” They speak equally to the human spirit, and they are timeless in terms of their eloquence, simplicity and purity. They represent the absolute essence of the power of music.

Q. What is your favorite guilty pleasure food?

A. This is a no-brainer! Sunday champagne brunch at the Four Seasons Hotel Austin.

Q. What is your biggest pet peeve?

A. People who attempt or seek to make music for wrong, self-serving or superficial reasons.

Q. What is the most embarrassing moment of your life that you can share?

A. Nothing funny here. Shortly after becoming director of bands at Baylor University, I attended a prestigious music conference. I did so with the false illusion that I had “arrived.” In a matter of 72 hours, I painfully discovered how little I knew about the greater world of music and how much I had to learn to become the musician and teacher I hoped to be. It was a personally embarrassing and humiliating moment in my life.

Q. Why is music important to humanity?

A. I am not aware of a culture that didn’t have music in one form or another as an integral part of its civilization. I have come to believe that music is a human bonding agent and, in one form or another, is imbedded in our DNA. It is one of life’s essentials.

Q. Which person from history, dead or alive, would you want to have lunch with and what would you discuss?

A. There are so many icons that could easily be on my list. But, to be honest, I feel I know most of them intimately through their music, their writing, their vision or their place in history. With that said, perhaps the most compelling lunch engagement for me would be to dine with my father who died over three decades ago. I would love to tell him how much he continues to mean in my life and also share with him my journey since he died in 1982. It remains my hope and prayer that he would be proud.

Q. Why is it important to protect access to music education?

A. The term “music education” can mean different things to different people and in different cultures. Thus, I think it’s important that we don’t let this term get too limited in scope. With that said, let’s not mince words. Music in its countless guises is not important — it is essential. It is one of the priceless capstones of the human experience. 

Q&A with Yamaha Master Educator Marguerite Wilder

Marguerite Wilder is a widely recognized middle school conductor (retired), clinician and consultant. She was director of Lovett Middle School Band and Woodward Academy Band, and taught at Tapp Middle School in Georgia. 

Wilder graduated from the University of Georgia and Georgia State University. She is a Yamaha Master Educator

Q. When did you know that you were going to make music the focus of your professional life?

A. I don’t think I realized it while it was happening, but a particular high school experience shaped my life’s work. When I was at Marietta High School in Georgia, my high school band director, Boyd McKeown, had a leadership and community-service component that went with a first-chair position.The component was teaching lessons to elementary students during the summer. That community service was the seed that developed into my life-long love with teaching.

As a teacher, the most amazing experience is when a student gets it. They have that “aha classroom moment” and are able to understand and perform some passage in music. Then comes the “aha performance moment” followed by the “aha musical moment” when teacher and student experience a powerful connection to music.

I was a good player. I made First Chair All State and won the State Concerto Contest which led to a performance with the Atlanta Symphony. Everyone thought I would go to college and major in music performance. But I had been bitten by the teaching bug, so I chose to be a music education major — a decision I never regretted.

I loved teaching music! I loved sharing the gift of music! I always give thanks to Boyd McKeown for opening the world of sharing and teaching music with my students.

Marguerite WilderQ. Other than music, what brings you inspiration?

A. Broadway musicals and plays, reading and travel.

Q. What piece of music do you wish you had written and why?

A. You know I cannot be confined to one answer — music is too wonderful for just one answer! First on the list is James Whitbourn’s “Annelies,” which is a full-length choral piece based on the “Diary of Anne Frank.” It is a painfully beautiful moving story. Next on my list isGustav Holt’s Chorale from Jupiter (The Planets, Suite for Large Orchestra.) I love the beautiful soaring French horns and cello lines. Third, “Hamilton” by Lin-Manuel Miranda – because it is just the best!

Q. What book is on your nightstand right now?

A. “Becoming” by Michelle Obama and “Alexander Hamilton” by Ron Chernow.

Q. What is the most embarrassing moment of your life that you can share?

A. The Woodward Academy Band had an exchange program with the Wiltshire County Band program in southwest England. Every two years students from one of the schools would travel to Atlanta or Wiltshire to experience the culture and people of another country and perform in a combined concert. The staffs of the two schools would see each other every two years, and we became close.

In the 1990s, I was in London with 100 Woodward Academy band students. We had landed at Heathrow at 5 a.m., and we immediately embarked on a full day of sight-seeing. The teenagers weren’t fazed by missing a night’s sleep, but I was exhausted by 6 p.m. I could barely remember my name or the name of our school!

We decided to take the London Underground to the Piccadilly Circus area for dinner. When 100+ people arrive at the tube station late in the day who have to buy tickets, things don’t go as planned. We started buying tube passes from the machine on the wall — notice that the word “machine” is singular. We quickly depleted the supply of tickets from the machine, so we then had to buy tickets one student at a time from the one man in the one ticket booth.

While I was dealing with buying tickets, one of the other teachers told me that some of our students had decided that they would go to Piccadilly Circus ON THEIR OWN and had made their way to the platform. I wheeled around and said in my best mad mother/teacher voice, “If you are NOT from England, get off the platform and get behind this line on the floor in the ticket area … and STAY THERE!”

Then I turned around and continued buying tickets for the remaining students. A minute or two later, the same teacher told me to turn around. A large group of Woodward students were standing behind the line in the ticket area along with a family from Japan! My kids didn’t want to say anything because they thought I was already mad at them. So instead, my students looked at this Japanese family, and the family looked back at the Woodward students.

Yikes! I immediately went over to the family and apologized for my outburst and told them to please go to the platform and take their train.

After my adventure at the London Tube Station, every time Woodward visited London, the Wiltshire staff would always ask, “Has Rite caused any more international incidents in London’s Underground?”

Q. What is your favorite guilty pleasure food?

A. Ice cream

Q. What is your biggest pet peeve?

A. People giving a session on music, and the session is a lecture about music and you NEVER hear any music. Music is an aural art, people! It’s like telling someone about a piece of art and never letting them see it! Like David Bowie said, “Talking about art is like dancing with architecture.” WOW, that is my pet peeve.

Q. Why is music important to humanity?

A. Music, as with all the arts, makes us human. It is the most authentic kind of communication that includes everyone. Music builds community.

Q. Which person from history, dead or alive, would you want to have lunch with and what would you discuss?

A. I would want to dine with President Barack Obama and discuss his book “The Audacity of Hope.”

Q. Why is it important to protect access to music education?

A. Our educational system has lost sight of the importance of preparing a well-rounded educated person. We are so wrapped up in high-stakes testing, Common Core standards and STEM (science, technology, engineering and math) that we have forgotten the purpose of educating the whole child.

I believe that the arts are the only opportunity for children to become independent thinkers. Children must learn how to work collaboratively. When they can collaborate, they can build a better future for themselves and those around them. Musical ensembles provide such opportunities. All members of an ensemble are valued, and their contributions are important and needed by the entire group. Through instrumental music, students can work collaboratively and creatively, they learn to compromise, and they build a better community. I think the world would be a better place if all leaders had and valued music education. 

Q&A with Yamaha Master Educator Larry Gookin

Larry Gookin, Distinguished Professor and Emeritus Professor of music at Central Washington University, retired in 2015 after 34 years as the university’s Director of Bands.

He is the former principal trombone of the Eugene and Yakima Symphony Orchestras and is Emeritus Artistic Director and Conductor of the Seattle Wind Symphony. He is a Yamaha Master Educator

 

Q. Why is it important to protect access to music education?

A. There are many extrinsic reasons for providing quality music education. Music performance helps develop creativity, confidence, perseverance, accountability, dedication, leadership skills, physical coordination, auditory skills and spatial intelligence. However, the primary intrinsic purpose of music performance is to communicate emotions.

Q. What piece of music do you wish you had written and why?

A. “Adagio for Strings” by Samuel Barber is so heartfelt and one of my favorite compositions.

Q. Other than music, what brings you inspiration?

​A. Contemplative prayer and meditation.

Q. What is the most embarrassing moment of your life that you can share?

A. While in high school, I was playing the trombone solo to “Getting Sentimental Over You” with the jazz band, and I totally screwed it up. I asked the director if I could play it again. He turned to the audience and said that I would like to give it another try. The audience gave me a wonderful ovation for my eagerness to prove that I could do it. Unfortunately, it was much worse the second time!

Q. Which person from history, dead or alive, would you want to have lunch with and what would you discuss?

A. I would love to meet St. Francis of Assisi and talk about love.

Q. What is your biggest pet peeve?

A. My biggest pet peeve is that I don’t have a pet peeve.

Q. Why is music important to humanity?

A. Emotional expression is the paramount purpose of music. Humans have an innate desire and need to share emotions and feelings, and music provides this channel of communication.

Q. When did you know that you were going to make music the focus of your professional life?

A. When I was a junior in high school, I was asked to conduct a small ensemble in a musical. I was 16 years old and knew then that I wanted to become a music major in college.

Q. What book is on your nightstand right now?

A. “Into the Magic Shop” James R. Doty, M.D.

Q. What is your favorite guilty pleasure food?

A. Cheese (with a nice cabernet)!

Top Five AV Receiver Features

Imagine for a moment that you’re an astronaut. You wouldn’t go up into space without having complete confidence in mission control, right? Well, the same is true for those who wish to explore the ever-expanding universe of audiovisual entertainment — only in this case the part of mission control is played by an AV receiver. All the components in your home entertainment system have to go through a receiver before anything reaches your eyes and ears. And it doesn’t matter how great any of those components are if you can’t depend on your receiver to deliver what they’re putting out.

Finding the right AV receiver is easier said than done, whether you’re buying one for yourself or as a gift for someone. There’s certainly no shortage of choices on the market, and many of today’s receivers offer a boatload of bells and whistles. In this article, we’ll talk about five important features you should consider.

The Ear Test

Sound quality is far and away the most important AV receiver criteria — but it’s also the most subjective. Some people want the sound of a receiver to be completely transparent, while others prefer receivers that lend the audio an extra touch of brightness or warmth. Many Yamaha AV receivers offer a feature called YPAOTM (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer), which analyzes the components you’ve got and the space you’re in, then calibrates the receiver’s audio output to those specs so that you always get the best possible listening experience in your particular listening environment. (To find out more about YPAO, click here.)

Got the Power?

Every good AV system needs a powerful receiver, but figuring out the power rating of an audio component can be a challenge, with lots of numbers and strange terms getting in the way. The simple measurement of WPC (wattage per channel) is not necessarily going to help you very much, because it’s often determined in an old-fashioned way, by driving one channel with a simple test tone. This just isn’t realistic for a modern AV system, which uses at least two channels all the time (conceivably many more — see below) and is expected to cover an extremely wide frequency range with minimal amounts of THD (total harmonic distortion).

There’s a much better way to measure a receiver’s true power output, and that’s by seeing what happens when you drive two channels simultaneously with a wide range of tones — ideally everything between 20Hz and 20kHz (the range of human hearing). When measured by this standard, the Yamaha RX-V685, for instance, has an output power rating of 90 watts, with a THD of 0.06%. The 90 watts is far more than enough power for a standard-sized living room, and the extremely low THD value is a reflection of exceptionally clear sound quality.

Closeup of front of Yamaha RX-V685 AV receiver.
Yamaha RX-V685.

Channel Changes

Let’s make the fairly safe bet that you’re interested in surround sound for your home system. The question is, how many channels will you need?

5.1 is the most common surround format. It consists of five discrete audio channels (the “5”) and one extra low-frequency (bass) channel designed to be routed to a subwoofer (the “.1”). 7.1 adds two more channels to the mix.

Once you move beyond 7.1 — to 9.1 or 11.1 — the additional channels are no longer discrete. Instead, they’re matrix-encoded, meaning that they are blended in with the real channels. It’s the job of your receiver’s processor to pick them out of the matrix and assign them to various speakers in the correct proportions, which makes your choice of receiver even more important.

Systems that are classified as “.2” rather than “.1” (5.2, 7.2, and so on) are designed to be used with two subwoofers instead of one, which gives a deeper sense of sub-bass and also enables the burden of the low end to be shared so that it doesn’t all depend on a single speaker. All Yamaha AV receivers allow for the use of at least one or two subwoofers.

The next step is multidimensional sound, in which there are height channels, which may come from in-ceiling or upward-firing speakers. Examples of multidimensional speaker configurations include 5.2.4, 7.2.2 or 7.2.4, where the last digit represents the number of height channels. Because there is essentially no limit to the amount of channels, this type of audio has to be matrix-encoded since dozens of discrete channels would require you to have dozens of speakers — an impracticality for most people. Dolby’s version is called Dolby Atmos®, while the format offered by DTS is called DTS:X™. All Yamaha AVENTAGE receivers and some Yamaha RX-V models have both Dolby Atmos and DTS:X capability.

Ins and Outs

Of course, a receiver has to be able to accommodate every other part of your system. Be sure to check the exact number and type of inputs and outputs needed for each of your separate components, and match them up with what the receiver is offering. Err on the side of too much rather than too little; after all, you may well want to add more components later.

As an example, the Yamaha RX-A3080 AV receiver provides a wealth of interconnections. In the back, there are seven HDMI® inputs, three HDMI outputs, one network port, three optical digital audio inputs, three coaxial digital audio inputs, ten analog stereo inputs, four composite video inputs and connections for an AM/FM antenna, plus outputs for up to eleven speakers and two subwoofers. In front, there’s a 1/4″ stereo headphone jack, a USB port, a 1/8″ analog mini-jack, and an input for the supplied YPAO microphone used to automatically calibrate the output of your speakers based upon the acoustic characteristics of your room.

Closeup of a Yamaha RX-A3080 AV receiver.
Yamaha RX-A3080 front.
Rear panel of AV receiver showing input/outputs.
Yamaha RX-A3080 rear.

Going Wireless

Not that long ago, you couldn’t put an AV system together without a bucketful of wires. That time has passed, and now a major test of a receiver is its ability to work with a variety of wireless devices. Some receivers, like Yamaha AV models equipped with MusicCast Surround, even allow you to use wireless surround speakers like the MusicCast 20 and MusicCast 50 to easily create a home theater with surround sound without having to run wires around your room. Connectivity via Wi-Fi®, Bluetooth® or AirPlay® 2 enables access to streaming services, as well as the music stored on your smart devices and computers; it also allows remote control from a smartphone or tablet.

MusicCast technology also allows you to add wireless speakers, sound bars or other devices in up to 31 other rooms at full fidelity, giving you the ability to listen to your favorite music throughout your entire home, all under the control of a simple app — and without the need for cabling.

Bonus Feature: Artificial Intelligence

If you’ve narrowed it down to two or three choices and are still looking for that feature that will distinguish one receiver from the rest, consider whether or not it offers artificial intelligence capabilities like Surround:AI™, the amazing breakthrough technology found in top-of-the-line Yamaha AVENTAGE AV receivers.

In a nutshell, Surround:AI instantaneously analyzes and optimizes the audio parameters for each scene of a movie in real time, creating the best possible overall sound effect for your home theater at every moment.

 

To find out more about Yamaha AV receivers, click here.

Q&A with Yamaha Master Educator Anthony Maiello

Anthony Maiello is Distinguished University Professor at George Mason University in Fairfax, Virginia. He was awarded the title of “university professor,” the highest rank given to Mason faculty.

A graduate of Ithaca College with bachelor’s and master’s degrees, Maiello taught in public schools and at the Crane School of Music, Potsdam College of SUNY. He is the founder and conductor and artistic director of the American Festival Pops Orchestra. Maiello is a Yamaha Master Educator.

 

Q. When did you know that you were going to make music the focus of your profession life?

A. When I was a young boy, my family watched “The Lawrence Welk Show” on TV. Myron Floren was the band’s accordion player, and I loved hearing him play. I started accordion lessons when I was in 5th grade and have played it ever since.

Unfortunately, accordion is not recognized as a “legitimate” major instrument for studying music in our country. My high school music theory teacher, Dr. Robert Campbell, was able to convince the dean of the School of Music at Ithaca College to give me one year to prove myself. I became a clarinet major after only five lessons before entering my freshman year at Ithaca College. The rest is history.

Q. What piece of music do you wish you had written and why?

A. “Symphony No. 5” by Ludwig von Beethoven is all about fate knocking at the door. What a powerful idea!

Q. Other than music, what brings you inspiration?

A. Helping others in any way I can. I recently became a Fairfax County auxiliary police officer. It required me jumping over many hurdles, including a 35-page background check vetting process that took almost a year to complete, a four-hour polygraph exam, a four-hour interview, four months of attending the Fairfax County Police Academy on evenings and weekends followed by four months training with an FCPD officer in a police cruiser to complete my training. I am required to volunteer 24 hours each month serving Fairfax County as a non-paid police officer.

Q. What is your favorite guilty pleasure food?

A. Ice cream and Cape Cod potato chips

Q. What book is on your nightstand right now?

A. I actually have four books. Two books are from my daughters. One contains my older daughter’s “Letters to My Dad” and the other is a book of poems by my younger daughter. The third book is St. Jude Prayers and Novena. The fourth book is “In Conversation with God.”

Q. What is the most embarrassing moment of your life that you can share?

A. Stopping an ensemble during a performance and starting over again.

Q. Why is it important to protect access to music education?

A. Music education touches the very core of our humanity. Every society has had some kind of music as part of its culture. We cannot live life to its fullest without music. I will never understand why budget cuts always target the arts. I will fight to my very last breath to keep music alive in the education of all mankind!

Q. What is your biggest pet peeve?

A. Inconsiderate people — people who always put themselves first, before others!

Q. Which person from history, dead or alive, would you want to have lunch with and what would you discuss?

A. Beethoven and his motivation for writing “Symphony No. 5.”

Q. Why is music important to humanity?

A. Music touches our hearts and souls in a way no other art form can. It keeps us in touch with our inner being and feelings, it motivates us, and gives us strength, hope and courage! Music also makes us cry, keeps us tender, caring, loving and thoughtful toward others. It is magical and the best “medicine” mankind has for the heart and soul!

Which Bass are You?

I was born in 1966, the same year Yamaha first started making electric basses (as well as guitars and amps). So what, you ask? Well, for one thing, it means I’ve been circling the sun for a lot longer than I care to admit. It also means that Yamaha knows more than a thing or two about making great basses. They started strong — my ’72 SB-70 is an early example — and they keep getting better at it as time goes by.

Whether you’re buying your first bass, stepping up to one that better suits your evolving needs, or adding to your growing bass arsenal, the buying process is always an exciting one. Knowing what you need a new bass for, what features matter most to you and what you can afford are all factors that will help you zero in on your target. But know this: Yamaha’s got every angle covered with its RBX, TRBX and BB basses.

Let’s take a closer look at each.

RBX

If you’re a student or someone new to the world of bass playing, you might want to start by checking out the two Yamaha RBX models: the RBX170 and RBX170 EW. Both are four-string instruments with largely identical specs (though the RBX170EW has a slightly higher price tag thanks to an attractive mango veneer top on the body and headstock), but they’re both rather unique when compared to the packed crowd of beginner basses out there.

RBX170
Yamaha RBX170.

RBX170EW
Yamaha RBX170EW.

The lightweight RBX basses are very easy on the eyes, the back and the wallet, giving inexperienced players a serious yet affordable option packed with the kind of performance features and craftsmanship you’d expect from much more expensive instruments.

They’re perfect for honing your chops because they’re especially easy to play. Thanks to a double cutaway basswood body and a C-shaped, satin-finished bolt-on maple neck with a 24-fret rosewood fingerboard, both RBX models have a comfy, natural feel. The split- coil pickup in the middle and a single-coil in the bridge position give you sonic versatility for any situation, with low-end beefiness and lots of high-end articulation. RBX instruments are best for beginners looking for a very playable bass they can learn on and grow into. It’s also a great choice for intermediate bassists on a budget who need an instrument that delivers the goods and looks good doing it.

TRBX

The jump from novice to serious player comes not only with experience and proficiency, but also with the awareness that your bass needs certain design and performance characteristics — such as advanced pickups and active EQ circuitry, neck and neck joint construction, and body woods — to help you create your signature sound. Yamaha TRBX basses are designed for players who’ve had this realization and are ready to take things to the next level.

There are five “series” within the TRBX line: the 170 Series, 200 Series, 300 Series, 500 Series, and 600 Series. The lower the number, the less expensive the model and the fewer features offered, but make no mistake: these are all quality instruments.

TRBX174
Yamaha TRBX174.

TRBX204
Yamaha TRBX204.

The TRBX174 and TRBX174EW (with its exotic laminate top) are comparable to the RBX170/RBX170EW overall but boast a mahogany body instead of basswood for longer sustain and punchier mids. The TRBX204 comes with a basswood or alder body and is equipped with a two-band active EQ circuit — slightly more sophisticated than the fully passive RBX and 170 Series TRBX models, but not as high-tech when compared to the other TRBX models.

TRBX 300 Series, 500 Series and 600 Series instruments, all of which are available in both four-string and five-string configurations (click here for more information about the difference), are equipped with the same four-bolt neck joint as other Yamaha basses, but add a five-piece mahogany/maple neck, a high mass bridge, 3D sculpted bodies and two hum-cancelling pickups. The differences between the models come down to the choice of body woods (mahogany or flamed maple/alder) for tone and appearance, and the EQ circuits (EQ presets, two- or three-band EQ circuits, and/or active/passive switching).

Yamaha TRBX304 electric guitar.
Yamaha TRBX304.

Overall, the TRBX line represents a serious jump up from the RBX line, and all TRBX models deliver major performance for discerning players. This higher level of sophistication makes the TRBX 300 Series a tantalizing option for beginners who are willing to spend a little more. Intermediate and professional bassists who want refined control over their sound and are looking for a more responsive and inspirational instrument should consider the TRBX 500/600 models, all of which offer active/passive switching. (For more information on the differences between active and passive basses, click here.) The choice boils down to the sound and aesthetic you prefer.

TRBX504
Yamaha TRBX504.

TRBX604FM
Yamaha TRBX604FM.

BB

The Yamaha BB bass developed a cult-like following soon after its introduction in 1977. The current BB instruments have the same “built for the working bassist” intent but now flaunt a slightly thinner neck and a lighter body, improving playability on stage and in the studio without sacrificing any of their characteristic penetrating tone or punchiness.

Like the TRBX, the BB line encompasses several “series,” each offering models in both four-string and five-string configurations. The 200 Series basses are the least expensive; they offer a great alternative to intermediate players who expect solid performance and prefer a more traditional design than that of the progressive TRBX series. The 400 Series, 700 Series and Pro Series BB models all feature Graphtec nuts, a Vintage Plus Bridge (which incorporates “diagonal thru-body stringing,” where strings are angled at the saddle and pass through the instrument to the bridge at a 45º angle), and a six-bolt miter neck joint for improved sustain and enhanced resonance.

BB234
Yamaha BB234.

BB434
Yamaha BB434.

The 400 Series includes the BB434, BB434M (“M” is for maple fingerboard) and the five-string BB435 models. Each features VSC5b split- and single-coil Alnico V pickups. The 700 Series includes the BB734A and five-string BB735A. Both are switchable between active and passive modes, and feature alder/maple/alder body construction, VSC7b split- and single-coil Alnico V pickups, plus a heavier steel plate bridge for a brighter tone.

Last but certainly not least, the top-of-the-line Pro Series encompasses the BBP34 and five-string BBP35 models. These are passive basses equipped with VSC7b pickups, alder/maple/alder body construction, Vintage Plus Convertible stringing and a steel plate bridge. Notably, the BBP basses also feature proprietary Initial Response Acceleration (IRA) technology, which releases stresses created during construction by applying specific vibrations to the completed instruments for a “played in” bass.

BB734A
Yamaha BB734A.

BBP34
Yamaha BBP34.

The BB line is undoubtedly intended for serious bassists who play for a living or aspire to do so. I plugged a BBP34 into my ’67 Ampeg SB12 amp, and what I got back was nothing short of magic. The bass and the amplifier complemented each other perfectly, richly rewarding me with deep, buttery tone. From single notes, staccato riffs and full chords to sustained harmonics and languorous double stops, the BBP34 could do no wrong in terms of tone, intonation and action. For me, it was love at first sight.

So which bass are you? It’s a purely personal choice, but you’ll have a lot of fun figuring out which one best expresses your unique musical voice.

 

Check out Michael’s other blog postings.

Click here for more information about Yamaha basses.

Ultra Hi-Fi, Part 3: The Difference Made by a Balanced Signal Path

Just as in music, the secret to creating a great-sounding audio system is balance. If two singers are harmonizing a melody but one is louder than the other, the balance is off — and it’s noticeable. Creating the ultimate Hi-Fi system requires that same kind of attention to detail.

Yamaha C-5000 preamplifier front panel.

The new Yamaha 5000 Series of flagship high fidelity audio components are designed to allow you to listen to music as the artist intended. They include the GT-5000 turntable, C-5000 preamplifier and M-5000 amplifier, which utilize an end-to-end balanced signal chain to deliver pristine audio to your loudspeakers — especially when used with our advanced NS-5000 speakers. In this article, we’ll explain the benefits of a balanced signal path.

C-5000 preamplifier rear panel.

A balanced signal path is established when an audio signal travels from its source (such as a turntable or CD player) to its final destination (your ears) while being isolated from potential noise in the audio ground circuit.

Photo of two RCA cables.
RCA cables.

Unbalanced signal paths are susceptible to signal noise caused by electrical and magnetic interference because they offer only a single audio connection, encased in an outer conductor ground shield. RCA cables are widely considered the industry standard for unbalanced audio connections. They are used in many Hi-Fi systems, as well as by many gaming systems, turntables, sound bars and AV receivers. These kinds of interconnections generally offer satisfactory sound quality. However, when striving for the purest sound possible, a balanced signal path is a better way to go.

This requires that all audio stages be balanced, from source to preamplifier to amplifier, as well as the speakers themselves. Balanced circuitry requires twice the electronics, with hot (plus) and cold (minus) paths that mirror each other to completely isolate the audio signal from the ground.

Accordingly, you’ll need to use cables with XLR (External Line Return) connectors to route signal between your audio components. These are the same types of cables used in live sound and recording to connect microphones, effects processors, audio interfaces and other line-level devices to mixing boards — and to connect output signal from the mixing board to power amplifiers. When used for home audio, they typically connect a source to a preamplifier and amplifier — for example, the GT-5000 turntable into a C-5000 preamp and then an M-5000 amp.

Close-up photo of male and female XLR connectors.

As shown in the illustration on the right, XLR connectors come in two varieties: male and female, with the male type used when sending signal, and the female type used when receiving signal. Regardless of the “gender” of the connector, each contains three contact points (“pins”). One pin carries hot (plus) signal, while the other carries cold (minus) signal. These are mirror images of each other (which results in greatly reduced noise), and both are electrically isolated from the ground reference on the third pin. As with most interconnecting cables, thicker conductors provide greater shielding of the audio signal to establish lower noise along a greater distance. For added reliability, the connectors are often equipped with locks to keep them in position for a more reliable connection.

Establishing a balanced signal path is not a guaranteed route to the perfect high fidelity audio system – but it’ll definitely get you in the ballpark. By using balanced interconnections and high end components (like the Yamaha 5000 Series), you’ll be entering a world of True Sound in no time.

 

Check out our other Ultra Hi-Fi blog articles:

Part 1: The Difference a Tonearm Makes

Part 2: The Difference Made by Speaker Driver Materials

Part 4: Going Beyond Perfection

For more information about balanced and unbalanced cables and connectors, read ourInterconnections 101” blog posting.

 

Click here for more information about the Yamaha 5000 Flagship Hi-Fi Series.

How to Improve Your Piano and Digital Keyboard Technique, Part 2

In Part 1 of this two-part series, we shared some tips for practicing basic scales. Here, we’ll explore advanced scales and arpeggiated chords, as well as providing some exercises for your weakest fingers.

Practice More Interesting Scales

Let’s face it: Whether you’re a beginner or a professional keyboardist, the major scale is boring. To hold your interest, I suggest you instead practice more colorful scales — the ones that will form the most important part of your musical vocabulary during performance. These include the various modes of the major and minor scale, as well as more exotic ones. Here are some good scale/mode choices you should consider practicing, along with an audio clip that lets you hear what they sound like:

Musical annotation.

These modes become even more applicable to your playing if you think of a key center, or chord quality that you would likely play them against. In general, I find that any scale run that starts from the root note of the chord will sound uninteresting — it’s much more colorful to play lines that begin on any other note. For example, starting a C scale on the third note (the E) is called Phrygian Mode, and all too often students are taught to think of it simply as an exotic color for an E minor chord. But play it against a C major seventh chord and it sounds very “inside” and much more interesting. As a bonus, since it’s based on the C major scale, you can use the same fingering (i.e., 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, 4 and so on).

Musical annotation.

Or try the C scale starting on the G (called the Mixolydian Mode) — again, a much nicer run to play against a C chord than the more pedestrian C major scale.

Musical annotation.

Take this approach, and you’ll be thinking about more colorful harmony and note choices when you practice your scales. For example, try recording some sustained chords and then practice various scales/modes against them — a great way to train your ears to hear the results of those choices. Technique and advanced harmony at the same time: Win/Win!

Arpeggiated Chords

The same concepts can be applied to arpeggiating chords. Just as major scales can be yawn-inducing, simple triad arpeggios starting on the root tone of a chord are not the most interesting “vocabulary” to use in your playing. Instead, try using inversions; you’ll find that applying a different triad against any given chord will make your lines more colorful. Here are a few examples:

Musical annotation.
Musical annotation.
Musical annotation.
Musical annotation.
Musical annotation.

Arpeggiated sixth chords and seventh chords make for even more interesting runs that you can use in your playing. While obviously more difficult, they are also more rewarding. When doing these exercises, I like to think of each hand differently. For example, arpeggios starting on non-root tones played with the right hand can sound great. Here are some ideas to get you started:

Musical annotation.

I also like to apply the concept of arpeggiating a different chord quality against a key center using sixth and seventh chords, like these examples:

Musical annotation.

As for the left hand, try playing arpeggiated chords starting on the root note as a support for right hand melodies and chordal movement. As you progress, try skipping some notes towards the bottom, and perhaps fill in some more as you go higher. Here are a few ideas:

Musical annotation.

Working the Weakest Fingers

In any practice session, it’s important that you set aside time to strengthen and attain fluidity with your weakest fingers (which will almost certainly be the ring finger and pinky). My advice is to play exercises geared towards working those fingers, as opposed to playing long technical études that happen to include some attention to them. Here are a few such exercises I’ve devised that focus directly on those weaker fingers of both hands, inspired by my early Hanon studies and other books. Be sure to play them slowly at first, concentrating on the evenness of all the notes:

Musical annotation.
Musical annotation.
All audio clips are played on a Yamaha P-515.

 

Check out our other Well-Rounded Keyboardist postings.

Click here for more information about Yamaha keyboard instruments.

Winter Weather Care for Woodwind and String Instruments

The late fall and winter months are the most dangerous time of year for wooden instruments, particularly if you live in the northern half of the U.S., where temperature and humidity changes are the most extreme. During this period, woodwind instruments are at a higher risk for cracking, and tenon and socket fit issues may arise. Similarly, parts of string instruments may shrink, crack or shift position at this time. Musicians must pay special attention to the effects of weather and take appropriate measures to ensure their instruments make it through the winter months.

Wood, a material that was once alive and full of water, never loses its ability to react to the moisture in its surroundings. When it absorbs water, it expands and when it dries again, it contracts. While temperature has some effect on wood, moisture has a more pronounced effect. Extreme heat causes absorbed water to evaporate and the wood shrinks rapidly. Extreme cold causes absorbed water to expand, which, in turn, causes the wood to expand as well. Wood can crack when it expands or contracts too quickly or unevenly.

How to Care for Woodwinds in Winter

Although no one can guarantee that a woodwind joint will not crack, following these recommendations will reduce the possibility significantly:

 – Play the instrument gradually. Many musicians underestimate the need to break in a woodwind instrument and swab it consistently to help control moisture in the bore. When first playing a new instrument (or one that has been that has been fitted with a new replacement joint or allowed to dry out while stored for more than a few weeks), play it gradually. For example, play the instrument for 5 – 10 minutes during the first session, then swab it out, including the tenons and sockets where the end grain can absorb moisture more easily. Then after the instrument sits for at least 4 – 6 hours, play it again, adding 5 or so minutes to each session. After playing it gradually for a week to 10 days, playing for longer periods should not cause a radical change in the wood’s moisture level, and therefore is less likely to cause problems. If this strict schedule is not possible, at least be sure not to play for more than just a few minutes the first day, with a quick swab at the end of the session.

 – When playing for long periods of time, swab the instrument out more frequently. A “handkerchief”-style swab will often do a better job than many other types. Having more than one swab on hand is a good way to ensure that you can pull a dry swab through instead of a damp one.

 – Never attempt to force a tight swab through a joint. Before the bottom end of the swab disappears into the joint, stop pulling it through so it can still be removed from the instrument if necessary.

 – Avoid playing the instrument when it is cold to the touch. It needs to warm up to the temperature of the room or outdoor environment — gradually if possible — before warm air is blown through it. Hold the instrument under a jacket or let it sit in the room for at least 20 – 30 minutes before playing.

 – In dry conditions, place a small humidifier in the accessory area of the case. These are available at most music stores.

 – Ensure the interior bore is properly oiled. Generally, the treated wood of a new Yamaha woodwind instrument or joint doesn’t need further treating, but if the interior bore gets a very dull, dry look, careful application of bore oil can keep the wood sealed. A properly oiled bore allows only a small amount of condensation from playing to enter the instrument. Bore oiling is best left to a skilled technician, however, as applying too much can create problems. Note: All Yamaha Duet+ clarinets and Yamaha Duet+ oboes with lined joints should never have their bores oiled due to the possibility of adverse chemical reactions.

How to Care for String Instruments in Winter

Like woodwinds, members of the acoustic violin family are also subject to the effects of changes in temperature and humidity that accompany winter weather. In northern geographical areas, the wood parts of the instrument can shrink and shift position as environments become drier due to the heating of homes and buildings — something that can even change the weight and the sound of your instrument. The further north in the U.S. you are, the more extreme the changes in temperature and humidity. In some regions, the temperature can fluctuate from 100 degrees plus with high humidity in summer to well below zero and extremely dry in the depths of winter. These huge changes pose danger to the health of your string instrument. In more temperate climates with less drastic temperature and humidity changes, there is less worry.

Here are some tips:

 – Avoid quick changes in temperature. Don’t leave your string instrument out in the cold, and let the instrument slowly warm to room temperature in its case before opening the case and handling.

 – Invest in a good quality hygrometer to monitor the humidity in your instrument’s environment. The storage area for a violin should ideally be kept at the same humidity year-round. The humidity of the environment in which the instrument is stored should be maintained at around 45% — or at least in the 40% to 60% range, depending on your local conditions.

 – Use a furnace-mounted humidifier at your home, or a free-standing humidifier in an orchestra room. These can help keep the environment from getting too dry, which can result in cracks in the wood … unless you get lucky and the water-soluble glue in the instrument gives way to alleviate the stress, in which case the seam can usually be re-glued quite easily. There are also commercially available internal humidifiers made of rubber tubes and other materials, but these must be used with care. Too much water in these products can drip into the instrument and damage the instrument by opening seams held by water-soluble glue.

Keeping a close eye on the temperature and humidity during the winter months and taking a few simple precautions will go a long way towards maintaining the health of your woodwind and string instruments year-round. Let it snow, let it snow, let it snow!

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha wind instruments.

Click here for more information about Yamaha woodwind swabs and maintenance supplies.

Click here for more information about Yamaha string instruments.

Practice Exercises for the Beginning Drummer

One of the keys to success on any instrument is consistent practice. If you make time every day to work on your chops, you’ll see much faster improvement than if you “binge” practice a few days a month. Setting aside 30 just minutes per day can help you make great improvements over the long haul.

In this article, we’ll present some basic exercises that can benefit any drummer. They provide a way to loosen up your drumming muscles while working on time, coordination and independence.

Practice these exercises along with a metronome, starting with a speed of around 70 BPM (beats per minute) for most of them. (All Yamaha electronic drum kits provide built-in metronomes.) If you feel that’s too fast for you, then by all means slow things down. These workouts are not about speed. They’re about producing deliberate drum strokes that are consistent in volume and timbre, and making sure they are locked in with the metronome.

When the patterns and coordination become second nature, you can speed them up. Don’t be frustrated by playing slowly. It’s actually a lot easier to play fast than it is to play slow, and starting slowly builds a good foundation.

We’ll use a bass clef for notation. A note on the first space indicates a kick drum stroke, and a note in the third space indicates a snare drum stroke:

Musical annotation.

The first five of these exercises are in 4/4 time, but the last three have different time signatures. As with any practice routine, try to find a quiet space where you won’t be distracted or interrupted.

1. Loosen Up Your Hands

Exercise 1 offers a good way to loosen up your hands. This is a single stroke roll, alternating one stroke from each hand, with a kick drum on the 1 and 3 of each measure to get your foot into the habit of playing the downbeat. Try to keep your hands at equal height above the snare drum, and snap your wrist back to the same starting position after each hit. Pay close attention to the timing on the 1 and 3 when the metronome, kick and snare all hit together, and listen carefully. You should not hear any flams:

Musical annotation.

2. Double Your Stroke

Exercise 2 is a variation on the double-stroke roll (“mama-daddy”), again with a kick drum on the downbeats. Listen carefully to the second stroke from each hand and make sure that it’s at the same volume as the first stroke from that hand. If the second stroke is softer or louder, make sure that your hand is returning to the same position every time:

Musical annotation.

3. Triplet Time

Exercise 3 is a triple stroke roll. Go for equal spacing between each stroke as well as tight timing between the hand and foot on the downbeats. You may find this exercise a bit easier than the previous ones because the quarter note is divided into three instead of two — meaning that there’s less time between each stroke:

Musical annotation.

4. Get Funky

Exercise 4 is the classic paradiddle. This is one of my favorites because once you’re comfortable doing it with both hands on the snare drum, you can move one hand to the high hat or ride cymbal, creating some funky grooves:

Musical annotation.

5. Kick That Funk

Exercise 5 is similar to Exercise 4 but adds a kick drum on the downbeats. This can throw some people for a loop because your foot will land with the opposite hand on the 3 of every measure, but it’s a good introduction to coordinating your limbs and getting out of the habit of always playing the right foot on the same beat as the right hand. Beware of the left hand not landing at the same time as the right foot (or vice versa for you left-handed drummers):

Musical annotation.

6. Swinging Waltz

Exercise 6 is the first one that doesn’t use a 4/4 time signature — instead, it’s in 3/4. You might notice that the suggested tempo is 140 BPM, which may sound kind of scary. But due to the change in time signature, 140 BPM is actually very manageable. When you start to get this one down, you’ll feel it swing like a waltz (ONE-two-three, ONE-two-three …). This is another drill where you can move one hand to different components of the drum kit and create some really interesting patterns. For example, try moving your right hand to the floor tom (left hand if you’re a lefty drummer) and see what happens!

Musical annotation.

7. Alternate Strokes

Exercise 7 is in 6/8 time, with a suggested starting tempo of 80 BPM. It helps develop your ability to alternate strokes between your hands and foot. This one is deceptively simple, with the tricky part coming at the end of measure 2 when the pattern repeats. That’s the spot where you may want to start the pattern again with your right hand — but be sure to start it with your left hand instead:

Musical annotation.

8. Get Independent

This last exercise builds on the previous one but drops the kick drum into the middle of the pattern. It helps build independence by moving notes between your hands and foot. This drill can take a bit more work than the other ones, so don’t worry if you need to slow down the tempo to get comfortable. Remember, it’s not about the speed.

Musical annotation.

You can use all of these exercises as a way to build your drumming abilities, but even when you’ve mastered them, they can be useful as a warmup for other practice routines. What’s even more fun is moving your hands around to different components of the drum kit, which can help you create some very cool grooves and fills.

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha electronic drum kits.

A Guide To Adjusting Saxophone Neck Screws

The harder we tighten our sax’s neck screw, the better the neck will fit, right? Wrong!

Close-up shot of saxaphone tenon screw.

The saxophone neck tenon — the bottom portion of the neck that is inserted into the body of the saxophone — is designed to fit securely into the receiver, where the body of the instrument meets the neck, just like any metal tenon such as a flute headjoint or footjoint. The function of the neck screw is to add an extra bit of security needed to keep the neck aligned with the body tube, ensuring correct operation of the octave key. The slot that is pinched together when the screw is tightened only runs about one third of the length of the tenon, leaving two thirds unchanged when the screw is tightened.

Yamaha neck screws and tenons are designed with this in mind. Both their Standard and Custom saxophones are all manufactured with reinforced neck tenons and neck screws. These design features help aid the longevity of the instrument and ensure a properly functioning connection between the neck and the body.

Close-up shot of saxaphone neck receiver.

So how much should you tighten your saxophone neck screw? Just a few turns until you feel comfortable resistance, but not excessively tight. (If you overtighten, the receiver will distort and may not seal well … and the screw itself may break!) Remember, the function of the neck screw is to keep the neck aligned so the octave key will work properly. There’s no need to crank it too tightly.

If the neck still moves when your neck screw is snug but not excessively tight, the tenon should be refitted by a skilled technician.

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha saxophones.

 

Giving Is Receiving

When the holiday season nears, it’s a good time to reflect upon the spirit of giving. I’ve come to the conclusion that it can definitely be more rewarding than receiving, and I’ve found that the act of putting musical instruments in particular in the hands of kids (and adults too) has especially profound and lasting effects on their lives.

For several years now, I have been asking friends and family (I even ask myself!) if they have any spare instruments that are being unused. More people than you might think have unplayed guitars or basses sitting sadly in a dark closet, gathering dust. When I get these instruments, I seek out an individual or group who needs them so I can donate to what I call “the cause.” Whenever possible, I show the recipients how to play a few notes or chords to give them a nudge to create in their own way. I derive immense satisfaction from knowing that these instruments now have a new life and can potentially bring a world of positive experiences to their new owners.

Since I started playing at a young age, the guitar has always been something I could turn to, both in the good times and the bad. I still turn to my it when I want a moment of peace or need to clear my head. Creating music has been a lifelong blessing and that’s exactly why I want to share that feeling by giving instruments to others.

Besides just feeling good in the soul, giving offers both mental and physical rewards. “The simple act of giving can feel quite satisfying,” notes doctoral student Jo Cutler in her online Impakter article entitled The Neuroscience of Philanthropy. “This feeling is known as ‘warm glow,’” she continues, “and it activates the striatum and other reward-related areas of the brain.” Cutler goes on to explain that the brain scans that served as the basis for her study were divided into two types. The first were from participants that gave strategically — in other words, to get a defined benefit in return for the gift. The others were collected when people gave altruistically — such as anonymous donations or charity. The conclusion? Both strategic and altruistic generosity activated reward regions in the brain.

This is something I know to be true from personal experience. Several years ago, I was traveling abroad for the holidays with a friend whose mother was suffering from early stages of Alzheimer’s. Her daughter had brought with her a small travel guitar, and when I played it during our visit, I noticed how the mother, who was already starting to lose the ability to communicate, had a certain look of wonderment on her face — a look I will never forget.

I decided to try an experiment. I tuned the guitar to an open D (DADGAD) so that no fretting was required to make a chord, and then I gently placed the guitar in the mother’s lap. Standing behind her, I took her arm and hand and began to show her how to strum. She immediately caught on and lit up brighter than a thousand Christmas trees. For the remainder of our visit, she continued to strum that guitar and make joyous noise with it just about every day. It was an easy decision for her daughter to leave the guitar with her as a gift.

My friend’s sister later told me what a difference that guitar made to her mother’s well-being long after we left. In fact, when the mother made a visit to her native country some time later, she requested that the instrument accompany her. The simple act of putting an instrument in someone’s hands brought so much happiness to a person in need — and it made no difference whatsoever that she didn’t know how to play it.

That said, knowing how to play even a few notes on an instrument can have lasting effects. An online Guardian Students article points out that “playing a musical instrument is a rich and complex experience that involves integrating information from the senses of vision, hearing, and touch, as well as fine movements, and learning to do so can induce long-lasting changes in the brain.” The author also notes that “musicians provide a natural laboratory in which neuroscientists can study how such changes — referred to as experience-dependent plasticity [or neuroplasticity] — occur across their lifespan.”

The gift of an instrument can open up a lifetime of music making, so if you have any old guitars, basses, keyboards, drums, saxophones, clarinets, flutes, violins, violas or other unused musical gear lying around, consider finding someone who might benefit from it. Or you could just visit your music store and surprise someone with a new instrument. Either way, they win and you win. Giving truly is receiving!

 

Check out Rich’s other postings.

Top 10 Things to Know About Audio Networking

There’s a lot of talk these days about audio networking. Just as a computer network allows multiple computers to share information, an audio network allows multiple audio devices like mixers, power amplifiers and loudspeakers to share the same digital audio signals. A network provides an efficient and versatile way for audio to be exchanged between these devices.

In the past, audio networks were primarily used to create large-scale systems for commercial production facilities, schools or stadiums. Now network ports are showing up on all sorts of audio products, including those designed for use in small venues such as clubs.

Ready to learn more? Here are the top ten things you need to know:

1. Network Channel Count May Vary

There are many different audio networks available. Some carry as few as a couple of channels of digital audio, while others can carry as many as 512 channels. Sample rates range from 44.1 kHz to 192 kHz, but in general the channel count decreases at higher sample rates. Audio signals are treated just like data, so multiple devices can access the same audio at the same time, and simultaneously route it to different places.

2. Audio Networks Are Wired, Not Wireless

Wi-Fi® is not currently used for audio networking because it is too slow to carry multiple channels of digital audio. (This is something that will likely change in the future.) Another issue with Wi-Fi is that it is not secure from hackers or other sources of interference that could interrupt or compromise the network. Wired networks are much more secure.

Analog audio connections require one cable per audio channel but an audio network needs only one cable for many channels of audio. Most audio networks borrow Ethernet connectivity from the computer industry, using RJ45 jacks and CAT5e/6 cable for the connections. That’s why networked audio is sometimes referred to as “AoIP” (Audio over IP). However, it’s important to remember that networked audio is not Ethernet.

Audio cable with rectangular plug ends.
Most audio networks use RJ45 connectors.

That said, at least one type of audio network, called MADI  (short for Multichannel Audio Digital Interface), uses coaxial or fiber optic cable for connections.

3. Know the Difference Between RJ45 and etherCON

RJ45 connectors were originally designed for permanent installations. The etherCON connector — which is a standard RJ45 ethernet connector inside a metal XLR shell —  is a durable network connector that can stand up to the rigors of the road. You’ll find etherCON connectors on Yamaha QL and CL Series mixers. Don’t try to plug it into a microphone input!

Closeup of connector panel.
etherCON connectors ensure a secure network connection.

4. Always Use an Appropriate Switch

As in a computer network, multiple audio devices are attached to the network using a network switch. However, standard Ethernet switches are not suitable for audio network purposes, so it’s important to verify that the switch you plan to use is up to the task. For example, Yamaha SWP1 Series network switches were designed specifically to reliably handle the traffic created by audio networking.

5. Audio Quality Doesn’t Degrade Over a Network

The majority of audio networks can easily distribute audio across 300 feet of CAT5e/6 cable. Since the signal is digital, the network is less likely to pick up interference from radio or TV stations, or degrade audio quality.

6. Audio Networks are Bidirectional and Expandable

Once two pieces of audio gear are networked, you can easily exchange audio in either direction without worrying about the gender of the connector. Need to change the direction of a source or reroute it to another destination? You can do so via software, without moving a single connector.

A big advantage of routing audio via a network is that you can expand your existing system simply by adding another device. For example, let’s suppose you start with a Yamaha QL1 mixer, which has 16 mic/line inputs and 8 outputs. If in the future you need more inputs, you can create a simple network by connecting the QL1 to a Yamaha Ri8-D input rack to expand the system to 24 inputs:

Diagram with two pieces of electronics with arrow from bottom item to top item to indicate how/where to connect. Embedded text indicates that the long thin component at bottom is a "Yamaha Ri8-D with 8 inputs"; the arrow indicates that would be the "CAT5e/6 Cable"; and the large component at top is a "Yamaha QL1 with 16 inputs and 8 outputs".
Increasing the number of audio inputs on a network by adding an input rack.

7. Audio Networks Enable Easy Patching

Another huge benefit of an audio network is that the network can “split” an audio signal and simultaneously route it to multiple destinations. This enables you to, for example, patch a microphone into one mixer for the front-of-house mix and simultaneously send it to a separate monitor mixer for the musician mixes. You won’t need a cumbersome analog mic splitter to accomplish this, and that eliminates extra steps in the signal path:

Diagram with images of the different elements and how connected, including the microphone, two consoles, two monitors and two speakers.
A microphone signal can be shared by two consoles over an audio network.

8. It’s Easy to Carry a Spare Snake

Analog audio snakes (bundled cables with connectors at either end) are expensive, cumbersome and heavy. The more channels supported by an analog snake, the heavier and bulkier the cable. CAT 5e/6 cable is relatively cheap, easy to find, and lightweight so it’s easy to carry a spare snake with you to a gig.

9. Networks Play in Different Sandboxes

There are dozens of different audio networks, many of which were created by manufacturers for use with their own equipment. These networks generally do not talk to each other, so until recently there was little probability that a mixing console from Manufacturer A could work on the same network as a power amplifier from Manufacturer B.

That’s where Dante® comes in. This is a network standard that has been adopted by more than 400 manufacturers, including Yamaha. Any Dante-equipped device can communicate with another Dante-equipped device on a Dante network.

10. AES67 Can Play A Role Too

In an effort to reduce confusion and encourage communication between devices from different manufacturers, the Audio Engineering Society developed a set of guidelines a few years ago called AES67. Audio devices employing different networks but adhering to AES67 rules can work together and exchange data on the same network. AES67 is slowly being incorporated into existing audio equipment.

Photograph courtesy of the author.

 

Check out our other Tools of the Trade postings.

The Song Remembers When

I was born in 1966, the same year that “Eleanor Rigby” and the album Revolver went to Number 1 for The Beatles. I grew up listening to (arguably) some of the best music and songwriting we will ever know. To me, artists from that era seemed to capture who they were in their songs, with a unique sound that could be identified immediately, from the very first listening. In those days, record companies, management and publicists invested considerable time into developing an artist’s craft, their songs and image to try to build a lasting career and a legacy of timeless, classic recordings.

I also feel very fortunate to have experienced music in pretty much all of its deliverable formats. (Okay, I wasn’t around for Edison wax cylinders.) Vinyl records — singles and albums — were played at home, while eight-track cartridges provided a way to listen to your favorite tunes in your car … until cassettes came along in the 1970s. (They were used at home as well as in cars.) I remember playing my cassettes over and over again until they were worn out. The audio quality wasn’t great, but the songs and the emotions they represented for me as a teenager outweighed the playback deficiencies.

The “Big Bang” of the digital audio revolution started in the early eighties with the release of the Compact Disc (CD). Audiophiles argued that digital music sounded sterile and cold in comparison to the “warmth” of vinyl and other analog-based formats, but CDs won the day and became extremely popular for nearly three decades.

We now consume our music through digital download or streaming services. Hard copy of musical artistry has taken a back seat to binary files that we cannot hold or enjoy in physical form. I used to love looking at cover art and reading the album liner notes on a vinyl record or CD booklet. I’d study the studio locations and credits to see who wrote and played on the songs. Holding a physical product in my hands gave the music and artist more value to me. I’d invested my hard-earned wages in these tangible items and was proud to have them in my collection.

Putting Together Your Repertoire

For my live performances, I’ve adopted a repertoire of songs that most audiences know and love. These include “Tracks Of My Tears,” “My Girl” and “Midnight Train To Georgia” from the Motown songbook; “Mainstreet,” “Shooting Star” and “Free Fallin’” as classic rock selections; and pop culture favorites “Say,” “Sweet Dreams” and “Shallow.” I want to keep these incredible songs alive in the hearts of my audience and allow them to re-visit the moments in time when those tunes were popular and an integral part of their lives. As Tricia Yearwood so beautifully put it, the song remembers when.

I was told one evening by an audience member that I’d made his and his wife’s vacation by playing their favorite song (“Drive,” by The Cars) on their anniversary — obviously a very special moment to them, all wrapped up in the melody and lyrical sentiment of that song.

Give Each Song Your Personal Spin

Robbie Calvo playing an acoustic guitar.

As an artist, I like to take a classic song and craft my own version of it. That way, you can bring your own personal melodic and harmonic sensibilities to the table while still paying homage to the original version. I’ll never be able to sing like Smokey Robinson or Tom Petty, and I’m pretty sure my audiences don’t expect me to. However, they do appreciate hearing new interpretations of hit songs by the artists they love.

I find the best way to approach this is to begin by learning the chords and harmonic structure of each section and then re-harmonizing the progressions with small changes to the original voicings. (I always sing the melody over the new changes to make sure it still works.) Re-harmonization can be as simple as taking a Major triad and changing it to a Major 7th chord, or substituting the Major triad for its relative Minor triad. (For more information, see my two-part blog posting about Major Scale Modes.)

Obviously, there are many ways to re-harmonize a chord progression — too many to detail here. The important thing to remember is that you don’t have to necessarily play the guitar parts exactly as performed on the original recording. Just learn the chords and begin crafting your own version of the song. If you’d like to play the signature hooks, riffs and melodies, you can work those into your arrangement at a later date. Personally, I like to continue refining my versions of classic songs over time. I let them evolve in the same way that I evolve and progress as a musician.

The Video

This is my version of Bill Withers’ “Ain’t No Sunshine,” as performed at a recent Yamaha Guitars clinic at Replay Guitar Exchange in Tampa. If you’re familiar with the original, you can tell that I’ve taken several liberties with the chords, key, tempo and melody … yet I’ve still retained the essence of the song. You’ll also notice that I reference the vocal melody at the beginning of my guitar solo (and again in the reprise) to give the listener a smooth transition into an improvised section.

Mix of acoustic and electric guitars in stands.

I have to confess that I fell in love with the Yamaha SA2200 guitar that I’m playing in the video. This is one of the company’s classic custom-crafted archtop semi-acoustic guitars, made in Japan. The SA2200 has a long pedigree and fine tone quality, with Yamaha Alnico V humbucker pickups and coil-tappable tone pots. It has a sycamore top, body and sides and a soft maple center block, with a mahogany neck, an ebony fingerboard and your choice of two gorgeous sunburst finishes.

The Wrap-Up

Music and the way we listen to it continues to go through a constant evolution of delivery platforms. Nostalgia for the retro wave of vinyl releases from new and old artists alike is increasingly popular, and the classic songs of a bygone era remain fondly within our hearts. Yet there is, and always will be, a place for great new music!

In a similar way, guitar aficionados continue to appreciate vintage designs even when delivered in a modern package, as is the case with the SA2200. I hope we get to see more of the same for a long time to come.

Photographs courtesy of the author.

 

Check out Robbie’s other postings.

Click here for more information about the Yamaha SA2200.

Ultra Hi-Fi, Part 2: The Difference Made by Speaker Driver Materials

Imagine a Hi-Fi experience like no other, where every detail is heard and you are fully engulfed in the sound of your favorite artists as if they were right there in the room with you. This is the experience that all exceptional speakers should provide. But not every speaker is built the same way. In order to create the foundation for great sound, great speaker drivers need to be made of a durable, lightweight, yet stiff material.

There are a variety of different materials that are used in speaker drivers, including paper, metal (such as aluminum or titanium), polypropylene, beryllium and Kevlar. Each impacts the sound differently, and so the choice of material is largely determined by the sonic signature the design engineers are seeking. Yamaha Soavo NS-F901 speakers, for example, incorporate A-PMD (advanced polymer-injected mica diaphragm) midrange drivers and woofer. This material is extremely lightweight yet rigid and stable, allowing for a smooth sound and fast response. By contrast, Yamaha NS-F310 Floorstanding HD Music speakers use aluminum dual cone drivers. These are designed to reproduce the full, dynamic sound of HD sources and deliver a clear, high-resolution bass sound.

Beryllium is used in many high-end speaker drivers. This material has the high-speed acoustic velocity suitable for a tweeter and mid-range dome but is too delicate to use for a woofer, making it challenging to timbre-match all the drivers. For that reason, speakers with beryllium tweeter/dome drivers usually incorporate a different material (such as aluminum or paper) for the woofer.

And then there’s ZYLON® — an ultra-strong synthetic fiber with exceptionally high acoustic velocity, double that of titanium or magnesium and comparable to that of beryllium. Lightweight and flexible, ZYLON (also known as PBO) has a tensile strength of 5.8 GPa (Gigapascals), which is 1.6 times that of Kevlar® and very stiff. Officially deemed the world’s strongest synthetic fiber by the American Chemical Society, ZYLON is used in a wide range of applications, including Formula One™ race cars, police officer body armor and NASA for high-altitude data collection balloons.

Speaker with filter cover removed and graphics indicating the 1" tweeter at top, the 3" mid-range driver in the middle and the 12" woofer at bottom.
Each NS-5000 driver uses ZYLON for a consistent look and sound.

And now it’s used for speaker drivers too! In fact, ZYLON is used in all three drivers within the new Yamaha NS-5000 speaker (part of our 5000 Series of flagship Hi-Fi components): the 1″ tweeter, 3″ mid-range and 12″ woofer. The result is an expanded frequency range with a more unified tone color across the entire frequency spectrum and a more balanced sound than would be possible if a mix of materials were used for the tweeter, mid-range dome and woofer.

The ZYLON for these diaphragms is manufactured in an ultra-precise production process, made in cooperation with Yamaha Fine Technologies, a maker of wood panels of luxury passenger cars and advanced factory automation products. And, although each driver in the NS-5000 is made of 100% ZYLON, each is woven specifically for its usage and is molded from the diaphragm to the surround (edge), with a different thread count for each. This helps the NS-5000 deliver a smooth response at all audio frequencies and allows more information to be accurately reproduced during playback.

Pair of floor speakers on stands.
Yamaha NS-5000 3-way bookshelf speakers.

Balance, power and clarity are just a few of the attributes that made ZYLON the optimal choice for the NS-5000. We encourage you to listen for yourself so you can hear just how good it sounds!

 

Check out our other Ultra Hi-Fi blog articles:

Part 1: The Difference a Tonearm Makes

Part 3: The Difference Made by a Balanced Signal Path

Part 4: Going Beyond Perfection

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha NS-5000 3-way bookshelf speakers.

Click here for more information about the Yamaha 5000 Flagship Hi-Fi Series.

Access Title IV-A Funds and Build a Stronger Music Program

You have grand plans for your program, but money is tight. In 2015, music educators celebrated the passing of the Every Student Succeeds Act (ESSA), which calls for a “well-rounded education” that includes music and the arts.

But it’s been almost five years since ESSA was signed into law, and your program is working to stretch every dollar.

ESSA included Title IV-A funds that school districts can apply to meet the mandates of the law. Allocation of these funds began in 2017.

How can you navigate through the red tape to access these Title IV-A funds? Where can you find information about ESSA and Title IV-A? What information is available that you can use when presenting your music program’s needs to school and district administrators? How can you become a music advocate?

What is Title IV-A?

Title IV-A (read the complete Title IV law here) is currently funded at $1.16 billion but was authorized at $1.6 billion each year. It is a formula grant program that provides funding for three broad categories:

  1. Well-Rounded Education: includes music, art, health education, physical education CTE (Career and Technical Education) and more.
  2. Safe and Healthy Schools: includes mental health services, violence prevention, safety initiatives and more.
  3. Technology: includes instructional support, professional development, personalized learning, digital devices and more.

Get a printable fact sheet from the Title IV-A Coalition here.

How can Title IV-A funding be used to help music programs? 

As a music teacher, you can be a part of the process to bring these authorized dollars to your district and program.

There are many qualified needs that can apply to your school or district. Funding can be applied to many things, including:

  • Teacher Professional Development such as clinics, in-service, workshops
  • Adding or Expanding Music Courses such as guitar program, piano lab, etc.
  • Supplies and Textbooks like sheet music, stands and accessories
  • Musical Instruments such as strings, band, percussion, keyboards
  • Technology Programs like music notation, audio editing, audio listening equipment
  • Facilities Upgrades like acoustic panels, storage units

Here are some program need examples in the Guidance for Music Education from the National Association for Music Education (NAfME) and National Federation of State High School Associations (NFHS).

How does Title IV-A funding work?

The Title IV-A funding rules are divided into two tiers:

  1. If your allocation is below $30,000, you do not have do an assessment and can spend funds in any of the three categories listed above, but with a 15% cap on Technology.
  2. If your allocation is above $30,000, you will need to do a needs assessment. You must show that 20% of the funds will go to Well-Rounded Program needs, 20% to Safe and Healthy Schools and the remaining 60% can go to all three areas with at least some going to Technology.
How do I start?

The basic steps to access Title IV-A funding are:

  1. Start with a music needs assessment
  2. Meet with your fellow music teachers, principal, district coordinators and your state education coordinator. Find your state Title IV coordinator here.
  3. Keep going! Applying for funding is an annual and ongoing process. If you aren’t 100% successful at first, just keep trying. You can also continue to expand on your initial efforts.

In short, here is what the process looks like:

ESSA and Title IV Resources

NAfME has built helpful toolkits and resources:

The NAMM Foundation has additional toolkits and resources:
Here’s a Funding Resource Guide Handout that points you to articles and additional information about federal funds for music education.

Where can I see funding data?

How and where has ESSA been implemented and how has funding been applied?

The National Arts Education Data Project is collecting and visualizing interactive arts data funding for many states. The project plans to complete all states’ arts education data by 2022.

Use this data to help support the needs of your music program when you talk to leadership at your school, district and state.

Read Music Achievement Council Educational Advisor Marcia Neel’s advice on how best to use stats at SBO Magazine.

How can I become more active as an advocate?

What does being a music education advocate entail? Here are a couple of stories of advocacy at the state and federal levels.

You can also join the Coalition on Coalitions through the NAMM Foundation. Also check out the NAfME Grassroots Action Center and the Title IV Coalition.

 

Yamaha is an active advocate for music education, and we want to empower music educators to strengthen their programs in any way we can. Please register for the Yamaha Educator newsletter to read up on advocacy, professional development, information about instruments, resources, partnerships in education and more. Join the Yamaha Music Educator Community on Facebook or email us at educators@yamaha.com.

Golden Slumbers

I’m finishing my coffee. I’m entertaining a second cup. I’m procrastinating. Last night I texted a to-do list to myself but I’m having trouble getting started.

I was looking forward to some of those entries — especially working on that new song. That’s never really “work” anyway but I just can’t concentrate.

I click on the lyric. I consider the font. But I can’t go any further than that. It’s strange because I’m usually pretty sharp in the morning. It’s my most creative time of day — when a brain full of clutter hasn’t accumulated … yet.

By afternoon, nothing’s changed. Whatever it is I do manage to get done, I’m not doing well. I run a stop sign. I can’t do simple addition, follow a recipe. Why did I come into this room anyway?

I’m paranoid that my low-function is a sign of something serious. I take a few deep breaths and then I recall: Ya know, Shelly, you went to bed at 2 a.m. last night, didn’t you? Woke up at 6. Hmm. That’s definitely not enough shut down. Of course! My batteries are drained.

You know what I’m talking about. Getting a good night’s sleep can mean the difference between playing your A-game and not playing a game at all. Sure, you can force yourself to finish that song but you’re supposed to enjoy being creative. It’s not supposed to be torture.

A well-rested mind and body affects creativity. I don’t say this as an expert who studies the science behind this statement but as a creator who’s witnessed the correlation over the years.

Many of us believe we’ll be more productive if we have more awake time but that’s not necessarily true. In fact, we often have to sleep more because apparently we get a lot accomplished while under the covers.

Paul McCartney came up with “Yesterday” in a dream (even if it was originally titled “Scrambled Eggs”) and Keith Richards heard the riff to “Satisfaction” while in repose. I’d say those are two great reasons to take a nap.

Maybe they were in a state of hypnagogia — the dreamlike transition between waking and sleep that allows the mind to wander. During this state, our brains take involuntary detours that lead us to locate missing pieces to puzzles we might not have the freedom to find when we’re conscious. In other words, our dreams make connections between things we might never connect while we’re awake. What’s more, concentrating on a specific problem (i.e., the sum-up line at the end of a song hook) right before going to bed can trigger the unconscious mind to try and solve it during sleep.

Wow. Yawn! Where are my PJs?

I know that I’m at my best at sunrise because of the proximity to recent sleep. That said, some of us are night owls. Our own personal windows of energy depend on our unique circadian rhythm — a 24-hour internal clock that cycles between sleepiness and alertness and affects our ability to function at our highest level. Going to bed and waking up at the same time every day regulates us. But no matter the rhythm, as long as we put in the hours we’re not going to feel the ebbs and flows as deeply.

I’ve heard this all before. But it’s days like these, when I’m staring at the bottom of my coffee cup wondering why I can’t get started, that I remember to remember: When your song remains unfinished and you’re sure you don’t have the right stuff — that you’re a fake, a fluke, a phony, that you simply get lucky from time to time — don’t panic! Give yourself a break and do something else that doesn’t require cognitive acuity.

It’s getting late, so once again I’ll trust in the well-tested notion that, with a lavender pillow on my eyes (so the first morning light doesn’t rob me of an extra crucial hour) and those squishy little puffs in my ears, tonight I’ll have another chance to fall into that beautiful necessary disconnect and wake up eight hours later, rejuvenated and hopefully feeling like a brand new me.

Shelly Peiken laying face up in bed wearing a floral eye mask.
Photo courtesy of the author.

 

Check out Shelly’s other postings.

Introducing the Alto Venova™

In 2017, Yamaha introduced the Venova™ — an innovative “casual wind instrument” that blends the simplicity of a recorder with the sound of a saxophone.

Now there’s the YVS-120 Alto Venova. Like the original Venova, it offers an ABS resin body that is smaller, lighter and more durable than conventional wind instruments. However, the new model offers a larger body design for a lower sound range and a more mellow tone.

A woodwind instrument made of black and white polymer.
Yamaha YVS-120 Alto Venova.

Like its predecessor, the Alto Venova features a unique branched-pipe structure that produces a rich timbre with plenty of dynamic control. Its easy, recorder-style fingering makes it ideal for inexperienced musicians looking to experiment with a single reed instrument, while seasoned players will appreciate the addition of a real alto saxophone mouthpiece and reed which allows for better control of its sound and pitch.

A smaller and a larger woodwind instrument.
Original Venova (top); Alto Venova (bottom).

If you’ve ever wanted to experiment with playing a saxophone, or used to play and want to come back, the Alto Venova is a great way to test the waters without worrying about a heavy and fragile “real” sax. If you’re already a player, the Alto Venova can be a great travel companion to take along to the beach, on vacation, or wherever your music leads you.

Key features include:

– Lightweight and portable enough to be played anywhere

– Water washable, unlike conventional wind instruments

– Simple fingering similar to recorders

– Sounds like a saxophone

– Fully chromatic two octave range

– Upper and lower sections can be separated for easy cleaning

Closeup of how the segments connect.
The upper and lower sections of the Alto Venova.

– Comes with an alto sax mouthpiece, ligature, synthetic reed, mouthpiece cap and a durable carrying case with strap

Ready to learn more? Check out the tutorial videos.

 

Check out these related blog articles:

Introducing Venova

How Can a Plastic Tube Sound Like A Saxophone?

“I’m a HERO” Program and the Venova

 

Click here to learn more about the Yamaha Alto Venova.

Finding Your Own Way

Someone recently said to me that true genius is defined as an artist who reaches their limitations. Ultimately, I do not think there are limitations.

Billy Sheehan on stage playing a bass guitar.

Actually, I believe that anything is possible. Whether that thing is worth working on may be up for debate, but I’ve seen players who work on some difficult piece, and it’s an amazing triumph when they finally can play it. That said, if you listen to someone play Bach on bass when it was written for harpsichord, it may not sound that good. It’s an incredible accomplishment, though.

The pursuit is what matters. I’ve learned a lot of pieces written for other instruments, and they always lead me to new, fertile ground on the bass. Sometimes it helps with composition and songwriting, other times with how I approach a transition or a voicing.

Limitations exist to be broken. Regardless of the instrument, if you look hard enough you’ll always find someone who has pushed beyond perceived limitations and blows everyone away. People heard Chuck Berry and thought it was the greatest electric guitar work they’d ever hear. Then, along came the Ventures. Then Hendrix. Then came Ritchie Blackmore, John McLaughlin, Eddie Van Halen, Yngwie Malmsteen, Alan Holdsworth … and then someone else and someone else and someone else — and it’s still happening today.

Again, anything is possible. It may take you a while, but if you climb up the mountain one step at a time you’ll eventually get to the top. I never considered anything out of my range, although a couple of times when I was confronted with an impossible piece I’d start second-guessing myself. But I’ve learned that if I stick with it, I’ll finally figure out a way to get those notes off that board of wood and strings. Don’t think in terms of limitations. If you hit a wall, you learn how to innovate, and you go around that wall on a path you didn’t know existed … and maybe no one else did, either.

Part of figuring out your own way is to play. And by play, I mean play a lot. I started out in an 11-piece band, and for our first paying gig, each member received $2.95 at the end of the night because the band was so big, we had to rent a U-Haul to get the gear there. Eventually, I joined a bar band that eventually turned into Talas. We played constantly. High school dances, weddings, store openings, clubs, every night of the week. We did 21 nights in a row at one point. All that experience onstage every night in front of people went into my bass playing. It didn’t come from spending my time in a bedroom with YouTube.

My generation, we played live constantly. I never saw Saturday Night Live because we always played every Saturday night. People always would talk about the jokes, and I’d say, “What is this show? I’ve never seen it.” Every band I know that became successful started as a cover band. The Beatles, Van Halen, AC/DC, Oasis – all those guys were out in clubs playing covers. That’s how you learn to play, and that’s what makes your writing chops great, because you know how to put a chorus after a verse and a bridge in-between. You learn how to write a song that will entertain people and keep them on their feet.

People often joke about the bass player being the tall guy in the back bobbing his head and not doing much. But this is show business, and I love to play, and I love being onstage. It was great when I finally joined a three-piece band with lots of space to move around. I wasn’t jammed in like I had been in the horn band I started out with, and that gave me space to express myself. Here’s how I looked at it: The first live show I ever saw was Jimi Hendrix — I didn’t think I wasn’t allowed to do that on bass. People were roaring, and I thought, “I want to do that too.” So I did.

It’s not just about fun. The stage isn’t for having fun. It’s for performing. I want to put on a great show, and when you do, you have fun. Put on an amazing show that people love and they will come back to see you again. When you’re up there, 3 – 4 sets a night, even on a Monday night, and there’s one table with two people, and there’s four waitresses, you still have to perform as though it was a packed house.

So when you see me having fun up on stage, it’s a result of evolution. I’m working hard, and through the years, by doing my thing, all that stuff is what comes out. I don’t have a “bass-face” that I put on to be showy. I can’t even dance. There’s no theatrics involved — it’s genuine and spontaneous. Practicing the look on your face, or the way you move, would be the equivalent of hearing a joke and thinking about how you should laugh —completely unnatural and against artistic expression.

Take David Lee Roth. Dave is a master showman, and he’s still my hero. The things he does are from his heart and soul. A lot of things he says are completely scripted, but what he does comes from 1940s entertainment. When you’re in front of a crowd, you don’t necessarily want to make stuff up, because you don’t know what’s going to work or not. When you go out to see a comedian one night and then see them the next night, it’s the same jokes. They modify them a little, but it’s the same. Once you’ve got a joke that works, you stick with it.

So, the first time Dave screamed, “Look at all the people here tonight!” the crowd went nuts. And it’s still hilarious. At the arena level, you can’t take the kind of chances you can at a club. When you play at a club, sometimes it’s your friends in the crowd. People are ordering drinks and not listening. You can get away with a lot of nonsense and foolishness, but if you tried it in an arena, it would be met with blank stares and silence.

Dave has got it down to an exact science. What you do and how you speak when you’re in front of 20,000 people matters: You never say anything that can’t be answered by a positive, uproarious “Yes!” from the audience. I remember one show where I was playing with someone else and the guy asked the audience, “Are we having a good time, or what?” No one knew how to answer “Or what?” There’s a lot to it, and Dave is the grand master. I learned so much from him — it was a free Ph.D. in Show Business.

After decades of gigs, I still love walking up those stairs to that insane cheering and roaring. It’s an incredible payoff for 50 years of hard work and playing, and I feel I’m being overpaid sometimes. It’s an incredible experience, and my plan is to do it for a long time to come!

Photos by Josh Withers and courtesy of Billy Sheehan.

 

For more information, go to billysheehan.com.

Click here to learn more about the Yamaha Attitude Limited 3 Billy Sheehan Signature Bass.

Using Pitch Correction Effectively

Thanks to the continuing advances in digital audio technology, tools for correcting the pitch of audio (a process generally called “pitch correction” or “tuning”) have become more powerful, easier to use and more affordable. Pitch correction is now commonly part of the workflow in both home and commercial studios. While there are various standalone software products dedicated to this task, several DAWs, including Steinberg Cubase Pro, include their own pitch correction features.

Pitch correction (which is usually used for vocal tuning but can also be applied to monophonic instruments) is sometimes used not only correctively, but creatively as well. You’ve probably heard pop or R&B songs in which the singer’s voice seems to glide from note to note. That sound is sometimes called the “Cher Effect” because it was first introduced by the singer Cher back in 1998 and used heavily on her hit single “I Believe.”

Some pitch correction software is designed for real time application, allowing it to be used during recording or even live performance. Depending on how badly the singer is out of tune, that approach can work. But it’s more often used off-line (that is, applied during mixing), which takes a lot more effort but allows for more precision and subtlety.

For this type of pitch correction, the small details vary from one brand of software to the next, but the basic concepts are pretty much the same. In Cubase Pro, the pitch correction tools are found in a feature called VariAudio.

Segmented Reality

The first step for any pitch correction software is to analyze the audio track (vocal or monophonic instrument) you want to process:

Screenshot.
The analysis in VariAudio takes only a few seconds.

Once the analysis is complete, the software represents the notes in the track as a series of rectangular segments. Similar to what you’d see in a MIDI piano-roll-style editor, each segment’s horizontal length is based on its duration, and its vertical placement corresponds to its pitch.

However, the similarity ends there, because you’ll notice that many of these so-called “pitch” segments are a little off from center, lying closer to one note but not dead on. What’s more, you’ll see squiggly lines running through each segment. These indicate the pitch variations leading into, within, and at the end of each note. In Cubase Pro, these are referred to as pitch curves. They’ll be present with any singer, but can get extreme with an inexperienced vocalist whose pitch is less than accurate:

Screenshot.
Pitch segments and their pitch curves in VariAudio.

Pitch correction software lets you move the pitch segments to the center of their corresponding pitches (thus tuning them), and also makes it possible to straighten out the pitch curves. Generally, you don’t want to completely straighten them or you’ll remove the singer’s feel from the recording. If you do correct all the segments and completely straighten the pitch curves, you’ll end up with something a lot closer to the “Cher Effect:”

Screenshot.
If you completely straighten all the pitch curves, you’ll get the Cher Effect.

It’s a Snap

Your pitch correction software will most likely have a feature called “pitch snap” or “pitch quantize.” This constrains the segments you’re tuning — whether you’re dragging them individually or through some global process — so that they can only be moved to the center of a note’s pitch.

Cubase Pro offers two types of pitch snap: Absolute and Relative. In Absolute mode, when you move a segment vertically (that is, from one pitch to another), you’ll only be able to drag it to the pitch center. Relative lets you move a note to a different pitch (for example, from B♭ to C), and have it stay the same relative distance from the pitch center as it was on the original note.

Alternatively, you can turn pitch snap off entirely so that the segments can be moved around freely. If you have a good ear, this can be an effective way to work … if your software allows you to hear the pitch of a note when you click on it (in Cubase, this is done by turning on the Acoustic Feedback option), and you check your work against a reference instrument from the song.

It’s critical to understand that a pitch correction display shows two variables: the segment’s vertical position vis-a-vis the pitch center of the note, and the degree of variation in the pitch curve. Often, you’ll quantize the segments but still hear notes that sound wrong. That’s because the singer’s pitch is wavering or moving during the note, as shown in the illustration below:

Screenshot.
There are significant pitch curve variations in this note.

Most of the time, you’ll want to fix pitch issues with as little processing as possible. The pitch curve represents the nuances of that performance, so you have to be careful how much you straighten it.

Step by Step

Here’s a suggested workflow for pitch correcting a vocal track:

1. Have your software do its analysis of the audio to be corrected.

2. Mute all tracks except the one you’re correcting, along with one reference instrument.

3. Make sure your DAW is set to let you hear a note when you click on it. (In Cubase, that means turning on the Acoustic Feedback feature.)

4. Zoom in so that the notes are pretty big on the screen, so you can see what you’re doing.

5. You can first try a global correction, which is much faster but not as accurate because it doesn’t impact the pitch curves. Turn on pitch snap (in Cubase Pro, use Absolute mode), select all the segments, and apply the selected pitch quantization to all of them at once.

6. Listen to the entire part, with your reference instrument (or all the tracks) on, and see how it sounds. Most likely, global correction won’t be enough, so you’ll have to go through the song one phrase at a time. The problem notes will be the ones that have the most extreme pitch curves.

7. Assuming your pitch correction software lets you split segments, divide the notes that are still out of tune into smaller segments, cutting at the apex or bottom of the pitch curves. (The new segments created are often higher or lower in pitch than the original notes.) The splits won’t be audible, but they allow you to individually tune the separate parts of a wavering note without affecting the in-tune parts:

Screenshot.
Notes before (top) and after (bottom) splitting.

8. Drag the newly created segments to the center of their target pitches and listen again.

9. If some notes still sound wrong, straighten their pitch curves by a small amount and see if that helps. If not, go a little further with the straightening. Sometimes you can get away with completely straightening a small segment — one that you split from a longer note — without it sounding weird. That should be a last resort, however.

10. Work your way through the part, tuning all problem notes until the entire track has been addressed.

Effective pitch correction can be a slow process — one that can’t be rushed. But if you do a careful and thorough job, it can be well worth the time expended, because the recorded vocal will often sound significantly better than it did before. If your goal is perfection, it’s a great tool to add to your arsenal.

 

Check out our other Recording Basics postings.

Click here for more information about Steinberg Cubase.

Get More From Your MONTAGE, MODX and CP88/CP73

Yamaha has announced operating system updates for MONTAGE and MODX synthesizers, as well as for CP88/CP73 Series Stage Pianos. Each OS update incorporated feedback from our synth user community and is completely free.

Let’s take a closer look at the new capabilities added by each.

MONTAGE OS v3.0 and MODX OS v2.0

The new OS updates bring these two synthesizers much closer together in terms of operation. The only difference is that MODX doesn’t have the MONTAGE DAW Remote mode … yet! Other than that, MONTAGE OS v3.0 and MODX OS v2.0 offer the same basic features. Check out this overview from Yamaha synth specialist Dom Sigalas:

One of the big new features in MONTAGE OS v3.0 (in response to requests from many MONTAGE users) is the addition of a Pattern Sequencer. This is not only great for sequencing your favorite tunes but can also be used to create arrangements on the fly. In this video, Yamaha synth specialist Blake Angelos shows you how it works:

MONTAGE OS v3.0 also provides new Performances, a new MIDI mode, and extended synth features such as a Wave Folder effect that’s like a distortion, but instead of “clipping” the waveform it “folds” it back into itself; a VCM Mini Filter and Mini Booster for classic, fat and smooth analog-style tone shaping; and an Extended LFO for adding variety from slow and subtle to fast and edgy. Here’s a video that demonstrates these features:

Also be sure to check out our artist interview videos featuring Tori Letzler, Michael Patrick and Avery*Sunshine talking about the new MONTAGE White with OS v3.0.

Go to YamahaSynth.com to learn more, or, if you’re ready to jump in, download the new OS for MONTAGE here and MODX here.

CP OS v1.5

CP OS v1.5 for the CP88 and CP73 Stage Piano adds many new Voices and Live Set Sounds, including 30 to the Sub Section. These focus on the support sounds keyboard players need, such as bass, leads, pads, brass and more. Check out this demo with Yamaha synth specialist Blake Angelos and keyboardist Manuele Montesanti:

In addition, the new OS expands the control capabilities of these instruments and adds several shortcuts for even faster navigation. You can download CP OS v1.5 here.

 

Click here to visit yamahasynth.com

Click here for more information about MONTAGE.

Click here for more information about MODX.

Click here for more information about CP88 / CP73 Series Stage Pianos.

Listening Inside the Music

Empathy. It’s a necessary component to successful interpersonal relationships, both personal and business. You and the other person in the equation won’t always see eye to eye, and unless you want to constantly be embroiled in disputes and bad feelings (which is a terrible way to live), you’d better develop the ability to see things from the other person’s point of view … even if you don’t necessarily agree with them.

In music, the ability to listen from other perspectives is equally important. Perhaps the hook in that song isn’t all that compelling. Perhaps the vocal is a little flat. Perhaps the tempo is shifting slightly in the first movement. Perhaps the entrance of the strings is a bit too strident.

A word of caution, though: Beware the More-Me Syndrome — something that’s familiar to every live sound or recording engineer. It goes like this: the singer wants more vocal, the guitarist wants more guitar, the drummer more drums, yadda yadda yadda. The problem is, if you simply accede to all of these demands, you end up raising everyone’s levels and the end result is a mix that is exactly the same, only louder — in other words, an exercise in futility.

Middle-aged man in jeans and sweater casually leaning against a sound board.
Ed Cherney.

Nonetheless, it’s always helpful to find a way to listen to music through other people’s ears. Or, as the late, great audio engineer Ed Cherney termed it, “listening inside the music.” I once asked Ed to elaborate. His explanation: “I’m talking about things like finding that guitar line that’s inside [one part of a song] and then finding its counter-line — being able to isolate and identify the different things that are happening in the context of the entire spectrum.”

Developing that ability — what some call critical listening — is no easy task. It does seem as if some people are born with “golden ears,” but there’s ample evidence that it’s a skill that can be learned too. Either way, it often takes many years to perfect.

“It takes a long time to learn how to pick out the balances and the timbre and the interplay between the instruments, and to make sense out of it,” Cherney told me. He attributed his own critical listening skills to a long apprenticeship he served with legendary recordist Bruce Swedien and the equally legendary producer Quincy Jones — the team that crafted most of Michael Jackson’s mega-hits in the 1980s. “The thing is,” Ed explained, “guys like me and a lot of my contemporaries worked under engineers that started in the ’40s and ’50s — the guys who built the gear that they used and went from big bands to symphonies to rockabilly and country, then eventually to rock and roll; guys who saw the technology evolve. Sitting behind the Bruce Swediens and the Phil Ramones and the Al Schmitts, we learned how to listen. It was when I worked for Bruce that I learned how to listen through someone else’s ears. I would sit behind him and listen through his ears during every mic change, every turn of a knob, every tweak of a reverb.

“Over a period of twenty years,” Ed added with his trademark self-deprecating humor, “you start to get the hang of it.” Certainly in his case it did, as evidenced by Cherney’s stellar 40+ year career that included recording Barbra Streisand, Bob Dylan, the Rolling Stones, Eric Clapton, Elton John, Jackson Browne, Bonnie Raitt, Sting, Willie Nelson and many other superstars.

The bottom line is this: Seeking and nurturing musical empathy is a critical aspect not only to your development as a musician, but to your appreciation of music overall. There are no shortcuts, but it’s a skill that’s guaranteed to pay multiple dividends over the course of a lifetime.

Photo courtesy of edcherney.com

 

Check out Howard’s other postings.

Get Your Party Started with the MusicCast VINYL 500

Ever notice how a turntable quickly becomes the centerpiece of any party? Add a stack of vinyl records and you have an instant conversation starter. And if you ask your friends to bring their favorite albums, you’ve got a party activity that everyone will get in on.

The festivities will be even better if you choose the right turntable. Steeped in the Yamaha tradition of accuracy and sonic purity, the new, snowy white version of the MusicCast VINYL 500 is much more than a pretty turntable: It’s a pretty MusicCast turntable — and one of the first and only Wi-Fi® turntables.

You can use the VINYL 500 as a classic turntable with its built-in phono preamp and a set of wired speakers — no need for a stereo receiver. But thanks to Wi-Fi, that’s just the beginning of its capabilities. For example, you can share the music of every guest’s favorite album to wireless MusicCast speakers, receivers or sound bars in other rooms of your house … and you can stream your party playlists from popular streaming services too! With the free MusicCast Controller app, you can move from room to room, mingling with your friends while you control the music from your phone and share it with the rest of the house. (No, the app can’t flip the album for you. You still have to do that yourself.) You can even use Alexa and Google Assistant devices to voice control playback of music from streaming services through the VINYL 500, or ask Siri to control it via AirPlay 2.

The MusicCast VINYL 500 not only sounds great, it’s great looking too, so you’ll want to show it off … and since it’s wireless, you can put it anywhere in your home. Just add a pair of wireless MusicCast speakers for a powerful stereo system without clutter, giving you more room for that dance floor or game of Twister. Minimalists rejoice!

So share the MusicCast VINYL 500 with your friends at your next party, or gift it to them for the holidays, or any time of year.

 

To learn more about turntables and vinyl, check out these blog posts:

Appreciating Vinyl Records … and the Best Way to Enjoy Them

Jeff Coffin Video Series, Part 1: Shopping for Vinyl

Jeff Coffin Video Series, Part 2: Caring for Vinyl

Spotlight on Vinyl Subscription Services

Ultra Hi-Fi, Part 1: The Difference a Tonearm Makes

 

Already have a receiver and want to add a turntable to your system? Learn how here.

See why it’s time to get your vinyl collection out of your attic (or your parents’ attic) here.

Wondering where the best place to put your turntable is? Find out here.

Scary in Surround Sound

It took less than 20 years for cell phones to become an integral part of our lives. Home theater enthusiasts could say the same thing about surround sound.

The first movie to incorporate surround sound was Disney’s Fantasia in 1941. Audiences in theaters all around the world were mesmerized as the “Flight of the Bumblebee” buzzed all around them. In the 1990s, Dolby brought that experience to the home with Dolby Digital 5.1-channel surround sound. Since then, many of us have become so used to surround sound that watching movies and shows with the sound just coming from TV speakers leaves us flat.

Horror movies and TV shows in particular rely on audio to create the haunting, immersive scenes that fans both dread and crave. If you don’t think surround sound multiplies the fear factor, try listening to these eight gems of the genre in standard two-channel sound and then compare it to experiencing them in surround sound.

1. We Can Get Crazy – Us (2019)

This scene from director / screenwriter Jordan Peele’s second outing is no ordinary “get off my lawn” moment. When dad Gabe Wilson grabs a baseball bat and goes out to his driveway to defend his family from mysterious doppelgängers, you just want to scream, “Get out!” Check it out here.

2. Diner Scene – Brightburn (2019)

In this take on the Superman legend, Brandon Breyer is an alien boy who crash-landed on Earth and was raised by adoptive parents … but is decidedly not using his superpowers for the good of humanity. In this scene, he’s taking sadistic revenge on a local waitress. Just because a scene features the usual ploys — from flickering lights to a gruesome injury to a poorly chosen hiding place — doesn’t mean it’s not effective. Check it out here.

3. Samara Comes to You – The Ring (2002)

Remember the days of video rental stores and “Be kind, rewind?” The video tape in this movie is not very forgiving. Everyone who watches it receives a phone call telling them that they only have one week to live. In this scene, time runs out for one of the characters trying to figure out how to beat the curse. Check it out here.

4. Jangly Man Trailer – Scary Stories to Tell in the Dark (2019)

This trailer features a never-before-seen monster that is a combination of several stories from the controversial children’s book series. Although this movie also features standard horror movie elements, they’re standard for a reason: they work. The end result is that you root for the group of resourceful misfit teens who open the wrong book. Check it out here.

5. Final Trailer – Doctor Sleep (2019)

In this much-anticipated sequel to the 1980 classic The Shining, Ewan Macgregor plays Dan Torrance, the boy from the original movie, now all grown up and seemingly recovered from that harrowing year at the Overlook Hotel. His fragile peace is shattered when he meets Abra and is irresistibly drawn back into a life-and-death struggle over the Shining. Check it out here.

6. Peter Breaks His Nose – Hereditary (2018)

Toni Collette’s remarkable performance sets the tone for this movie about a woman grieving over the loss of her mentally disturbed mother and the ensuing events that befall her family. Her teenaged son Peter experiences the chilling effect of the family’s emotional inheritance in this extraordinary classroom scene. Check it out here.

7. The Rains of Castamere (The Red Wedding) – Game of Thrones: Season 3, Episode 9 (2013)

There were many plot twists and turns, and numerous favorite characters met their untimely ends during Game of Thrones’ eight groundbreaking seasons. This scene is one of the most jaw‑dropping. When a wedding guest is wearing chain mail under his clothes, it’s never a good thing. Check it out here.

8. Dustin and Suzie Sing the NeverEnding Story Song – Stranger Things: Season 3, Episode 8 (2019)

What’s more terrifying than being forced to sing a sappy love song to your Suzie-Poo in front of all your friends while you’re trying to save the world? Enjoy a lighthearted moment from this usually serious show. Check it out here.

If you’re there for the scare, surround sound is a must. So fire up your 5.1-channel home theater system and treat yourself to a frightening movie night!

For more scary clips, click here.

 

Want to set up a wireless 5.1-channel home theater? Learn how here.

The Modern Drum Set, Part 1: The Snare Drum

In this multi-part series, we take a closeup look at each of the components of the modern drum set.

The modern drum set is made up of a variety of components, including snare drum, bass drum (sometimes called “kick” drum), toms and cymbals. The snare drum is unique among the drums because it is the only one that has a set of snares stretched across the bottom head — finely coiled wires or springs that vibrate against the bottom head when the drum is hit, giving the snare drum its characteristic “snap” or “sizzle.”

Closeup of a set of twisted wires across the bottom of a drum.
Snares are fine wires stretched across the bottom head of a snare drum.

Snare drums are used in popular music as well as in jazz and classical music. Along with the kick drum, the snare drum is the most important component in a drum set. In contemporary music, it provides the all-important “backbeat” on the two and four of a measure, while the kick drum typically plays on the one and three.

A Long History

It’s hard to imagine music without snare drums, but did you know that its origin can be traced all the way back to the 1300s?  In those days, a drum known as the tabor — a double-headed wood drum with one or more snares stretched across the bottom head — was used by drum corps for communication purposes.

At around the same time, Swiss drum and fife corps were using the Basel drum, predecessor to the field drum, which made its way from Europe to North America in the 1600s. Soon after that, the snare drum debuted in concert halls. Brass shells started to appear in the mid-18th century, and the 1800s brought significant developments in construction, such as single-ply shells and wood hoops.

The snare strainer (also called a “throw-off”) arrived in the late 1800s/early 1900s; this allowed the snares to be quickly engaged or disengaged. Innovations that followed include flanged metal hoops, welded brass shells, and self-aligning lugs that made tensioning easier while reducing the possibility of stripped threads. Throughout the late 1900s and 2000s, the variety of materials used in the construction of snare drum shells broadened to include exotic woods and metals.

Fast Forward

These days, snare drums are available in a mind-boggling assortment of sizes and materials.

The traditional diameter for a snare drum is 14 inches, but you’ll find models with diameters of 12, 13 and 15 inches too, in depths ranging from 3.5 to 8 inches. As head size increases you’ll get a lower pitch with the same tension on the drum head. Generally, the deeper the shell and the larger the diameter, the lower the fundamental pitch of the drum.

The thickness of a shell also affects a drum’s fundamental pitch, with thinner shells typically producing lower fundamentals (there are exceptions). Drums with lower pitch are usually louder and capable of greater projection. That may be why some drummers even add snares to floor toms!

Are You a Metalhead?

Snare drum shells are available in both wood and metal. The three most popular metals are aluminum, steel and brass. Aluminum, used in Yamaha Recording Custom Aluminum snare drums, is the lightest of the these metals. It produces a dry, bright sound with a crisp response and a short sustain that may not need damping. Aluminum is durable and resistant to corrosion so it requires little maintenance.

Steel is heavier and has a more aggressive attack than aluminum. It accentuates the mid and high frequencies and produces more resonance (and ring) than aluminum, so you may need to apply damping. Steel shells like those used in Yamaha Recording Custom Stainless Steel and Stage Custom Steel snares are generally louder than brass or aluminum.

Brass snare drums such as Yamaha Recording Custom Brass snares have a dry, articulate sound that’s darker than steel or aluminum, somewhere in-between metal and wood. It’s the most responsive metal for a snare drum shell, producing a rich, warm tone with a sharp crack, dark overtones and more low end than other metals. It’s more resonant than aluminum and often needs damping. Brass snare shells may have a lacquer coating to prevent corrosion.

Polished metal cased single drum.
Yamaha Recording Custom Brass snare drum.

Other metals used for snare drum shells include bronze and copper. A bronze shell will be loud and crisp with a dark tone and a low fundamental note, while copper has a tone between metal and wood, with a pronounced low end. It’s a relatively soft metal, so care should be taken with those kinds of snare drums during setup and transport to prevent damage.

Any of these metals can be either cast or spun into shells. Cast shells tend to be louder and have a higher fundamental pitch with longer sustain, while spun shells are thinner, have a larger tuning range and often have a center bead for added strength.

Closeup of outside of a snare drum where the shell has a raised curved ridge around the middle of the shell, halfway between the top and bottom edge.
Yamaha metal snare drums feature a center bead for increased strength.

What Wood Would You Like?

Wood shells are usually made from multiple thin layers of wood called “plies.” These plies are glued together and arranged with alternating grain to add thickness, stability and strength. Wood shells can also be made from a single steam-bent piece of solid wood, or from blocks of wood glued together. In general, thicker wood shells have greater projection and volume, but thinner shells are more resonant.

Maple, birch, oak and beech are the most popular woods used for snare drum shells. Maple shells have a warm low end, balanced low and high frequencies, and slightly boosted mid frequencies. It’s a great wood for all-around drums and is used by Yamaha Tour Custom snare drums.

Birch is used to make the shells in Yamaha Recording Custom snares. This type of wood emphasizes the low and high frequencies, giving a bright, lively sound with slightly reduced mid frequencies. Birch also projects very well and can easily cut through a mix.

Oak produces a round tone, mellow highs, and an extended, warm low end with plenty of volume and projection. Yamaha Live Custom Hybrid Oak snare drums are made from a sandwich of oak plies surrounding a dense phenolic layer — a design that emphasizes attack while increasing the drum’s dynamic range.

Other woods used to manufacture snare drum shells include beech, mahogany, and poplar. Beech is similar to birch but has a warmer tone with boosted lows and mids relative to the high frequencies. Mahogany has a mellow high end, reduced but resonant mids, robust lows, and projects less than birch. Snare shells can also be constructed from plies of different wood. Poplar is a relatively soft wood often used in a sandwich between layers of mahogany, resulting in a vintage drum sound with a full, rich timbre.

Yamaha Absolute Hybrid snare drums have a core ply of wenge (a very hard and heavy wood) sandwiched between plies of maple, known for its clear tone.

Closeup of the wood.
Yamaha Absolute Hybrid shells are constructed from plies of wenge and maple.

Synthetic, Too

Though far less popular than wood and metal, snare drum shells can also be made from synthetic materials such as carbon fiber, acrylic or fiberglass. Acrylic shells have a warm high end and plenty of presence. Fiberglass has an even balance of low, mid and high frequencies with excellent projection. Carbon fiber makes for a very strong shell with a good balance between mids and highs, and a slight emphasis in the low end.

Choosing any drum is a very personal choice, and there’s no one “perfect” snare drum for every purpose, which is why many drummers own several of them. But do some listening and auditioning at your local music dealer, and you’ll find one that’s right for you.

The Videos

Yamaha snare drums are available in a variety of sizes and shell materials so you can create your own signature sound for any style of music. Here’s a video that lets you compare the sound of many of them:

… and here’s a video that lets you compare the individual sound characteristics of various metal shell Yamaha Recording Custom Series snare drums:

Click here for Part 2: The bass drum.

Click here for Part 3: Toms.

Click here for Part 4: Foot pedals.

Click here for Part 5: Cymbals and hardware.

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha snare drums.

How to Improve Your Piano and Digital Keyboard Technique, Part 1

Players of every level should always work on their technique as a part of their practice regime. The most common approaches include working on scales, arpeggios and technique études like Hanon, Czerny, Cramer, Dohnanyi and Tausig, as well as difficult passages from music you are working on. For the beginner, these are essential activities. But as you progress further as a player I suggest you consider a more focused direction for improving your technique.

It’s actually very simple: work on those things that you will actually incorporate into your playing!

Think about it. Why spend precious time playing lots of notes and phrases that you would never repeat during a performance? While it’s certainly not time wasted, it’s also time not being used to execute the vocabulary that you will be relying on. In this article, I’ll share some of my concepts for making practicing more musical, and more applicable to your performing needs.

Practicing Scales

Learning and practicing scales are the fundamentals of piano study. Scales not only teach you about key signatures and fingering basics, they also help you develop a good legato touch. Here are some of the approaches I take:

– Most pianists practice scales with both hands together, running each over several octaves. But I like to start by playing scales one hand at a time. This allows me to focus on how well I am connecting the notes, and on not dropping my wrist when I cross my thumb under, which will produce an unwanted accented note. If you practice scales with both hands together, the more dominant hand often covers up the weaker hand, so you may not notice when these accents occur. In addition, your stronger hand can likely play faster than the other one, so practicing scales one hand at a time allows you to work at different tempos to push your technique.

– Try playing each scale at different dynamic levels. It’s a completely different experience to play fast and quiet at the same time. Here’s an audio example that demonstrates this technique:

– After working on playing well-connected notes, try playing the scale with a different, slightly detached articulation — one that’s not completely staccato, but with some space between each note. Then try a more separated, staccato touch, as demonstrated in this audio clip:

– Try playing with a crescendo while going up, and a decrescendo while going down. Then reverse that approach:

In addition to the above tips, I recommend practicing with a metronome or a drum groove of some sort. This allows you to also work on your timing. To make things even more productive, I like to do the following:

– Play two octaves as eighth notes against the click or pulse (two notes to each click/beat).

– Next, switch to three octaves as triplets against the pulse (i.e., three notes against the pulse). Focus on making the switch from two to three notes as accurately as possible.

– Finally, go to four octaves of sixteenth notes (i.e., four notes to the beat). Again, focus on switching your rhythm precisely:

Eight bars of musical annotation.
Eight bars of musical annotation.

Keep mixing it up between these ranges/timings. In this way you are working on rhythm as well as finger dexterity. Here’s an audio clip that demonstrates this technique:

– More advanced players should work on playing two-handed scales in sixths, or in thirds. These are a type of run that you might well use while playing, especially as part of the ending of a tune:

Four bars of musical annotation.
Four bars of musical annotation.

Here’s an audio clip that demonstrates this technique:

 

Click here for Part 2.

All audio played on a Yamaha P-515.

 

Check out our other Well-Rounded Keyboardist postings.

Click here for more information about Yamaha keyboard instruments.

A Bassist’s Guide to Compression

Using compression on your bass is the musical equivalent of putting salt in food. If you’ve never tried it, you probably think your sound is fine without it. But once you succumb to the intrigue and finally figure out how to add just the right amount, you’ll probably feel as though you can’t live without it.

Just a pinch of compression helps emphasize unique characteristics of your bass and tone that may not have been obvious beforehand. Even a small taste may make your bland bass sound bolder. But as with salt, too much of it can be overwhelming, leaving you with a sound that’s unappealing.

Don’t Get Lost in the Shuffle

Let audio snobs argue over whether compression is an effect or not. All I know is, it’s an essential tool that has helped me craft my signature bass sound. I started using compression many years ago when I was playing in an instrumental trio and found my bass lines getting lost all too often behind the wall of guitar and drums. In particular, when things went from loud to soft, then back to loud again, I could tell from the stage that my bass sound wasn’t keeping up. I was getting stepped on, and so I needed to take back the space that was rightfully mine to occupy.

I knew that compression could help me even out my level, add some punchiness, and would enable me to lighten my attack without my volume dropping so that my bass would be clearly audible in the mix no matter else what was going on. However, my bass rig at the time was inadequate, so I went out and bought an Ampeg SVT-4 PRO. On top of having gobs of tone and power to play with, this bass amp head comes equipped with a high quality built-in compression circuit that helped put me back on level ground with my bandmates. Ever since then, I’ve always used some sort of compression in my signal chain.

Electronic hardware.
Ampeg SVT-4 PRO.

Why Compress?

Some bassists use compression to control their overall volume. Others use it to contain the dynamics of their attack. Sometimes it’s employed to add punchiness or sustain; other times, to help meld the bass’ fundamental note to the concussive impact of the kick drum — a very important part of rock music. Some players use compression as a form of EQ, to warm up their sound or give it a retro feel, with that super-beefy, flatwound thumping groove … sometimes accompanied by an obvious pumping effect.

You might even have compression on your bass without even knowing it! Many live sound and recording engineers don’t hesitate to apply whatever type and amount of compression they think is appropriate … and they may or may not bother to tell you about it. They use it for the same reasons you would: to keep your bass level steady and hot, yet free from clipping and distortion.

The Shape of Things to Come

Compressors used to be big, bulky analog devices, but today they come in many shapes and sizes. Some stompboxes are dedicated to that one task, but many times you’ll find you need the flexibility, capability and control baked into a user-tweakable patch in a multi-effects processor like the Line 6 HX Effects.

Access panel.
Line 6 HX Effects.

Some bass amps (like the previously mentioned Ampeg SVT-4 PRO) come with compression as a built-in feature, but other times you may want a dedicated compressor with more bells and whistles, such as a standalone rack unit or a software plug-in.

Basic Settings

Here are brief explanations of basic compression parameters and some suggestions for how they can be tweaked to help you get the most out of your bass sound:

– Threshold. This determines the level at which compression kicks in. Any time your signal is louder than the threshold you set, the volume will be reduced (i.e., compressed). In a sense, less is more here — the lower the threshold, the greater the degree of compression. Setting the threshold high results in only compressing the loudest notes that you play, meaning that your dynamics will stay natural-sounding. The higher the threshold, the more your dynamics will be squashed.

– Ratio. The higher the ratio setting, the greater the amount of compression that’s applied to the signal (over the threshold you set). Think of it as somewhat of a magnifier, in the sense that the ratio determines how much your signal is reduced. A ratio of 2:1 cuts the volume above the threshold by half, while a 10:1 ratio will squash it tenfold (in other words, a +10dB signal will be reduced down to just +1dB). In essence, the higher the ratio, the more consistent your volume will be, allowing your sound to be turned up in the mix. If you want to absolutely limit the volume of your signal (to protect your speaker, for example), you can set the ratio to ∞:1 (infinity to 1), but most bass players choose a ratio somewhere between 2:1 and 4:1 to get the benefit of some peak reduction without losing all of their dynamics.

– Attack. This is measured in milliseconds, and determines how quickly the peak is reduced. Short attack times rein in your initial transients (i.e., when you dig in with a pick over a neck-position pickup or do a slap or pop) to smooth your sound by keeping things tamped down and under control. However, if the attack is too fast, all peaks will be affected, and your bass will sound unnatural. Slow/long attack times will allow you to coax more sustain out of your bass, but at the expense of allowing most or all transients to pass through unscathed.

– Release. Sometimes referred to as decay, this setting dictates how quickly the compression lets up. Since the optimum release time depends largely upon tempo and genre, the key here is experimentation. Properly set release times can effectively add sustain to your notes, but if you set the release time incorrectly you’ll end up drawing attention to string noise as you move between frets.

– Hard knee / Soft knee. A hard knee setting causes compression to kick as soon as your signal has crossed the threshold, immediately reducing the signal at the ratio you set. A soft knee setting gradually increases compression as your signal reaches the threshold, resulting in a smoother, more natural sound that helps maintain your dynamics.

Last but not least, keep in mind that there are many different types of compressors, including VCA, FET, optical and Vari-Mu — and the best one for your bass sound is a subjective decision. (Click here for our “Why Compress” blog posting, which provides a description of each.)

If you know your bass sounds great when you’re playing on your own but can’t be heard clearly in band situations, that’s a red flag telling you that you should strongly consider adding compression to your sound. And even if that’s not the case, compression is well worth checking out, as it’s capable of improving almost any bass sound when used correctly. What are you waiting for?

 

Check out this related posting: “A Guitarist’s Guide to Compression.”

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha basses.

Click here for more information about Ampeg bass amps.

A Guitarist’s Guide to Compression

Compressors are powerful tools that can significantly shape the dynamics of your guitar playing — and therefore your overall sound — both onstage and in the studio. In this posting, we’ll discuss the use of compression in both environments.

Compressors Onstage

Your onstage compressor will most likely be a pedal or stompbox, mainly because of their convenience (among other things, they allow compression to be turned on and off easily with a tap of the toe). Like any compressor, these devices are designed to alter the dynamic range of an audio signal; in other words, they reduce the difference in level between the loudest and softest notes. As a result, quieter notes seem louder, particularly if you’re using the pedal’s gain control (sometimes called “makeup gain,” “level” or “volume”) to compensate by raising the overall signal.

Compression also tends to soften the attack of the notes because it’s squashing down the transients, which are the peaks that initially occur when your pick or finger plucks (or strums) the strings. This can help take the edge off a loud guitar, making it more pleasing to the ear and less biting.

Some compressor pedals have controls that let you set the attack time. However, you have to be careful because if the attack of the compressor is too fast, the transients can be reduced to excess, resulting in a dull tone. The slower you set the attack time, the longer it takes for the compressor to react to a note, so more of the transient gets through. If it’s too slow, however, there will be little compression at all, so some experimentation is usually necessary to determine the right amount. Bear in mind that the optimum attack time may change from song to song, and possibly from guitar to guitar as well.

If your compressor pedal doesn’t offer an attack control but you find that your sound is getting too dull, lowering the overall compression (via a knob called “sustain,” “compression” or “sensitivity”) will usually alleviate the problem.

Even with moderate settings that keep your transients mainly intact (which is often the best way to go during live performance), a compressor pedal is going to thin out your tone to some degree. It’s a tradeoff for the benefits of reduced dynamic range and added sustain.

In the following image, you can clearly see the transients at the beginning of the notes and the effect of a compressor with a fast attack:

Two sets of sound wave graphics.
Electric guitar without (above) and with (below) compression.

Sustainability

Sustain is, of course, a hugely important part of electric guitar tone. High-gain guitar notes sustain naturally, but if you’re using a clean tone, the notes will decay quickly and therefore sound relatively staccato. However, if you compress the signal, it will add sustain to your clean tone, because it makes the quieter parts of the notes — including their decay — louder in comparison. And even though a compressor’s effect is often more noticeable on clean tones, it also helps with distorted and overdriven sounds, giving them extra sustain and making it easier to play harmonics.

Because its gain circuit can amplify the signal, you can also use your compressor pedal as a pure boost effect, with or without compression. This is particularly useful when you’re playing through a tube amp because the higher-than-normal levels coming out of your pedalboard will drive the amp harder, which will create more tube saturation.

Pedalboard Placement

There’s general agreement among guitarists and guitar experts that you should place your compressor pedal at the beginning of the signal chain on your pedalboard. Such placement ensures that the compressor will be reacting directly to your dynamics before the signal gets affected by the other pedals:

Graphic showing the steps.
Suggested pedalboard order.

There’s another, even more important reason for this kind of placement: Since a compressor brings out the quieter parts of the audio, it will also accentuate any noise in the signal. Therefore, you want it before any distortion or overdrive pedals, both of which tend to add hiss and hum; if the compressor were to be placed after those kinds of pedals, it would make the noise louder.

In the Studio

If you’re recording your guitar through an amp and are using a compressor pedal to help create your sound, then everything we’ve already discussed is still relevant. But if you’re mixing a guitar track that’s already been recorded, there are some differences in the application of compression.

A studio compressor’s overall purpose is the same as that of a compressor pedal: to reduce dynamic range. However, compressors designed for recording and mixing — whether plug-in or hardware-based — usually offer more precise parameter control:

View of compressor front panel controls.
Steinberg VSTDynamics plug-in compressor section.

For one thing, they almost always offer attack and release controls. The vast majority of studio compressors also have both ratio and threshold controls, rather than a single knob to govern the amount of compression, as is found on most pedals. This combination lets you more precisely set the amount of compression and how loud a note must be in order to initiate gain reduction.

Flavors and Colors

For practical reasons, most guitarists have just one compressor in their pedalboard when playing live. But in the studio, between your DAW and any third-party standalone plug-ins you may own, you likely have access to several types of compressors. There are a number of standard compressor designs, based on analog compressors (which plug-ins often emulate), each with its own distinct sonic characteristics. These include VCA, FET, optical and Variable-Mu. (Click here to read about different types of compressors.)

You can also find many compressor plug-ins that are circuit-for-circuit digital emulations of classic analog compressors. The good ones provide tonal coloring that closely replicates that of the original analog hardware.

Often, in a mix situation, I use a vintage compressor plug-in for both dynamic control and coloration. I’ve found that replications of the classic Teletronix LA-2A (such as the Tube Compressor in Steinberg Cubase) sound great on guitar parts, giving them a warm sheen. (The LA-2A was an optical compressor with a tube amplification stage.) Many people also like software emulations of FET compressors such as the UREI 1176 on guitar because they can be set to sound aggressive and even add some saturation at high settings. (Examples include Cubase’s Vintage Compressor MKIII or the Yamaha 276.) In the hands of a skilled recording engineer, even outrageous compressor settings can be made to sound good!

Front control panel on equipment.
The Yamaha 276 plug-in.

Whether you play live or in the studio, compression can be a critical tool for shaping your tone. If you haven’t experimented with a compressor, you should definitely give it a try and see how you like it. Odds are, you’ll find that it improves your sound more often than not.

 

Check out this related posting: “A Bassist’s Guide to Compression.

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha guitars.

San Holo: Dancing to His Own Tune

You could describe electronic artist San Holo’s music and production style with many adjectives, but “derivative” would definitely not be one of them. Quite the opposite: his approach is thoroughly original and decidedly non-conformist.

For one thing, although Holo is part of the modern electronic music world — a place where most songs are written inside of digital recording software — he takes a distinctly analog approach. “Most of my songwriting starts on guitar,” he says, “whether acoustic or electric. I like to figure out a song on the guitar first before I grab my laptop and produce and record everything.”

In addition, a big part of his production process involves running sounds through a tape echo to add analog flavor. Not a tape echo plug-in, mind you: he uses an actual vintage tape echo unit. “I usually set the feedback and delay to zero,” he explains, “so I just have the sound of the tape to make it a bit warbly and gritty.”

Young man sitting on floor of a home with an enclosed bookcase and electric guitar in background plus an electric guitar in foreground and he is on a headset between a small music keyboard and a sound board.
Holo loves the gritty sound of the sampler in the Yamaha VSS-30.

Holo’s music has been described as belonging to the subgenre called Future Bass, but he’s evolving it into something newer. “It’s a mix of EDM, indie and post-rock,” he tells us. “I like to call it Post-EDM. The combination of electronic beats with sparkly guitar is what I look for most.”

While you might think this kind of non-standard production style might work against Holo, just the opposite has occurred. Indeed, his rise to prominence has been rapid: He was voted New Artist of the Year in the 2017 Electronic Music Awards, and that same year his album 1 reached #7 on the Billboard Dance/Electronic Albums chart.

Back in the Day

Holo grew up in Holland and started his musical career by studying guitar at the Rotterdam Pop Academy, which is part of a larger music conservatory. During his time there, it became clear to him that his musical sensibilities were different than most of his peers.

“All of the other guitar students wanted to be like Jimi Hendrix. I wanted to do something different, so I started playing around with music production and experimenting with different lo-fi sounds,” he says. “At some point, you’ve got to find your own sound [so] you might as well just create something that’s your own.” His search for new sounds led to an interest in electronic music. “I would sneak into the production classes and see what they were doing on their laptops, on music production software.”

His deviation from the rock ‘n’ roll orthodoxy didn’t receive a lot of support from his peers. “I remember [bringing] my first electronic EP to a rehearsal. [My bandmates] looked at me like I was the devil or something,” he recalls.

“Whenever you’re trying to do something new, people will always see it as weird,” he adds. “Because in the end, weird is just different. People are not used to it. At some point, it’s so rewarding to see that when you do something weird, it becomes a thing, and you actually own it. I like that. I think that’s my main goal for making music: to keep pushing myself and my music forward instead of just copying the same thing over and over again.”

Seeing the Light

Perhaps Holo’s most impressive achievement to date is the song “Light,” which he released in 2017 and now has over 148 million streams on Spotify alone. Fittingly, one of the instruments he used to build the tracks for that song was a Yamaha VSS-30: an old consumer keyboard from the late 1980s that features a crude (by today’s technology) 8-bit sampler. That keyboard has now become a fixture in Holo’s workflow.

Electronic keyboard.
San Holo’s VSS-30.

The VSS-30 has a number of preset sounds, which Holo describes as “kind of cheesy, but pretty cool.” But it’s the instrument’s sampling, which records for under two seconds through a built-in microphone and then maps whatever it captured onto the keyboard, that Holo has found to be so useful and inspiring.

Closeup of electronic keyboard.
The VSS-30 effects section.

“The coolest thing about the sample function,” Holo says, “is that you can select about seven effects. You have a fuzz; you have a reverse effect; you have a U-Turn effect that makes [the sample] go forward and then backward. The most important effect on there is the fuzz. It’s something you don’t see a lot on samplers. The fuzz transforms your voice literally into a saw-wave synth. Very gritty. Very beautiful.”

Check out the video:

bitbird

Holo now has his own record label called bitbird, through which he releases his own projects as well as that of others. “We were originally an electronic label, but these days we release classical music, too, and electronic, trap beats and singer-songwriter music,” he says. “As long as we feel [the artists] have a vision and want to do something different. I like hearing things that make me go, “Hey, this is something I haven’t heard before, and this might expand my mind a little bit.”

Naturally, Holo appreciates his success, but says that even without it, he’d still be a musician. “I’m truly humbled by the fact that I get to do what I do, but I would be doing the same thing if I wasn’t that well-known. I just love making music. It’s the only way I know how to live and really the only thing I know how to do.”

San recently visited Synth Space — a specially designed room at Yamaha USA headquarters in Buena Park, California that houses a large collection of vintage Yamaha synthesizers — where he had a chance to compare the sound of his VSS-30 with other synths of the era.

Artist San Holo holds his VSS-30 sampler in a room with a collection of vintage Yamaha synthesizers.
San Holo at Synth Space.

As for what’s next, he reports that he’s been working on new San Holo music. When asked whether he’s been using the VSS-30 in his writing, he says with a laugh, “Man, it’s all over the place!”

Photographs courtesy of Heroic Family.

 

Learn more about San Holo at sanholo.com and on

Twitter

Instagram

Spotify

Outside Influence

When the weather turns cooler, I spend more time indoors. That may seem obvious, but over the years I’ve increasingly found myself taking advantage of that time to push the boundaries of learning my craft. This includes intensive practice of my primary instrument, the guitar, but also the study of keyboards, orchestration, arranging, recording, mixing and production. Perhaps more importantly, besides directly seeking to improve those skill sets, I also take classes outside of those worlds. I’ve found that those outside studies actually help my craft by allowing me to examine things in a different and deeper way.

One of the most interesting of those was an online photography course with the great Annie Liebovitz, who has taken some of the most iconic rock pictures of all time. I like to learn from those who excel at what they do, and when she talked about self-reflection, it resonated strongly with me. Afterwards, I did just that — I went back and listened to a number of my older compositions. Wow, what an ear-opener! What I heard, clear as day, was the advancement of my skills as a composer and guitarist, as well as the evolution of my mixing and production chops.

I’ve also taken online classes in the field of cooking. From Gordon Ramsay to Massimo Bottura, observing how others work can help you think about how you work. (And since I like to cook, it has made my friends and family happy too!) After taking some of these classes, I came to the realization that my style of musical creativity is actually very similar to my style of cooking. I use as many of the best ingredients as possible, make sure I have the right tools, and rely on a combination of instinct and skill. Often, when a song is not quite done, I’ll think of what a final touch of finishing “salt” might be added to make it pop … just like a great dish in the kitchen.

Another interesting online course I took was conducted by the commander of the International Space Station. I’m a longtime space fanatic, and I have an app on my smartphone that tracks the ISS and tells me when it’s flying overhead. (At those times, if the weather cooperates, you can actually see it!) While the class was full of amazing facts about how the space station works, how they dock to it, and even how they walk in space, I use its lessons for different purposes. First and foremost, I apply them to cutting through professional problems. It seems to me that if we can fly people in space and shuttle them back and forth at will, our brains must have powers almost beyond our imagination. Thinking this way makes my “problems” seem small in comparison, and therefore quite solvable. But I also use the lessons for pure inspiration. When I listen to stories about how we plan to get to Mars, I know I can fix that computer problem holding up my mix session that day.

I also like to watch TED Talks about subjects I know little or nothing about. I approach them with an open mind, absorbing new ways of thinking and looking at problems and solutions that might not have occurred to me otherwise. Watching Vogue editor Anna Wintour’s talk on creativity and leadership, for example, helped me contemplate different ways to incorporate team members in my own work.

An online MindTools article entitled New Ideas — Strategies and Techniques suggests that you “mix your media.” The author explains the concept this way: “Radical ideas can arise from tackling problems in unusual ways. A great way to do this is to apply different types of creativity — don’t just talk or write about your plans, explore them through music, painting, photography, sculpture … whatever enables you to express yourself. Fresh thinking can emerge when you let your creative juices flow.”

I find that the combination of direct studies along with those outside of your field blend together to make for a more well-rounded musical approach. It helps you reach beyond your set ways and comfort zone and acts as a spur on creativity. Whether you’re creating just for fun or are doing it on a fulltime professional level, think about how you might use outside influences to help you go deeper into your music. It’s a worthwhile and rewarding pursuit!

 

Check out Rich’s other postings.

Using Pads In Live Sound

An important part of creating a good live sound mix is avoiding distortion, and that usually starts with the input to your mixer. As we saw in a previous Tools of the Trade blog post about gain staging, using the correct inputs and setting proper levels is a big help, but what happens when you’ve done all that and still hear distortion?

That’s where a pad can come to the rescue.

A pad is a switch found on the input channels of many mixers, including all Yamaha MG and MGP Series models. Typically located near the microphone input, it attenuates (reduces) the signal from a microphone before it reaches the mic preamp circuitry inside the mixer:

Close up of mic input and pad button.
Pad switch.

The reason you’d want to attenuate a signal coming from a microphone is simple: Some sources from the stage — for example, kick drum — are very loud! Making matters worse, kick drum mics are usually placed right in front of, or even inside, the drum. That combination can create a signal so strong that it overloads the mic preamp in the mixer.

You may be thinking “Well, that’s why there’s a gain control; I can simply turn down the gain.” However, even with the gain all the way down you may still see the peak light flashing and hear distortion. That’s where a pad comes in: It prevents the signal from overloading the mic preamp. It’s not unusual to use pads on kick, snare and tom microphones, as well as on mics placed right up against the grille of large guitar stacks.

Proper Pad Usage

That said, it’s important that you always first try to set proper level with the pad switched off. That’s because, if you’re dealing with a weak signal and the pad is on, you’ll need to bring the gain way up, and that can add noise. Use the technique for setting input level described in the previously mentioned Tools of the Trade post, and see if you can get the meter to read a good level. More importantly, listen to the signal to make sure that you don’t hear any distortion. If you’ve turned the gain down all the way and the meter is still in the red (or you’re hearing distortion), it’s time to employ the pad. When you turn on the pad, you should expect to see the level drop quite a bit. Simply use the gain control to restore a good level.

Caution: Avoid turning the pad on and off while the fader is up. If you have a kick drum playing through the PA when you turn off the pad, for example, the level of the channel will suddenly increase, and that will not only throw a scare into anyone nearby, it can damage your speakers as well as, possibly, your ears!

How Hot is Too Hot?

The pad switch on Yamaha MG and MGP mixers provides 26 dB of attenuation, which is sufficient to eliminate preamp overload in most cases. There are, however, a few rare situations where even that may not be enough attenuation, particularly when using microphones that have a very high output level (such as condenser mics) and are placed on extremely loud sources. Those kinds of mics sometimes have a very “hot” (high) output level — one that can overload a microphone input — and that’s why many condensers have their own built-in pad:

Closeup of microphone pad switch.
Some microphones have built-in pad switches.

Microphone pads may simply be labeled “Pad” or they may be labeled with just a number, such as “-10 dB,” indicating the amount of attenuation. In some cases, the pad switch may have multiple settings such as -10 dB or -20 dB. To make sure that you don’t add noise by cranking the gain of the mic preamp too high, always use the lowest pad setting that eliminates the distortion.

If you’re using such a mic and are running into distortion problems, start with the microphone pad off, listen to the signal and watch the meter or peak light. If it indicates an overload (or you hear distortion), then switch the microphone pad on to reduce the signal before it even reaches the mixer. Sometimes you may hear distortion from a condenser mic even if the signal level looks weak on the meter. That could mean that the source is actually overloading the electronics inside the microphone. In such cases, turning on the mic’s pad will usually solve the problem.

Get in Line

In cases where the mixer and microphone both lack a pad, you can use a device called an inline pad. This is typically a small metal tube or box with an XLR male connector at one end and an XLR female connector at the other end. Inside is a simple electronic circuit that reduces the signal:

Closeup of inline pad - a small cylinder with closed end with three perforations.
An inline pad.

Many inline pads can be plugged right into the XLR jack on the mixer, and then you can plug a microphone cable into the pad. In some instances, XLR cables are used to make the connection. Inline pads do not require any sort of power source.

The amount of attenuation offered by an inline pad is usually shown on the outside. The attenuation amounts are usually fixed at a specific value, but some are variable. Typical values are -10, -20, and -30 dB.

If you’re shopping for an inline pad, don’t skimp on a cheap one that may color the sound of the microphone or prevent phantom power from passing. These devices are not particularly expensive, with prices starting at around $20 for a good one, so I recommend carrying a few of them in your gig bag — you never know when you may need one!

A pad is something you may not need on every gig, but when you’re dealing with loud sounds captured by mics placed close to the source, it will help keep your signal distortion-free. Happy attenuating!

Photographs courtesy of the author.

 

Check out our other Tools of the Trade postings.

Ultra Hi-Fi, Part 1: The Difference a Tonearm Makes

This four-part series will touch on topics that will help you achieve your goal of creating the perfect audio system — what we call “Ultra Hi-Fi.” The first of these is about tonearms. But before we get to that, let’s cover some turntable basics.

A turntable consists of the following components:

– A chassis, or plinth.

– A platter that rotates via a belt drive or direct drive.

– A slip mat that rests on top of the platter (which acts as the cushion between the record and platter).

Closeup of a turntable tonearm with arrows and text to indicate specific elements.

– A tonearm, which rests on a pivoting fulcrum, back-ended by a counterweight and front-ended by a headshell that houses the phono cartridge.

When a needle is dropped onto a record, it generates a tiny electrical signal that is equivalent to (i.e., an analog of) the dynamic content in the bottom of the grooves that represent recorded music. The cleaner the record, the better chance you have to capture every detail of the music. (Click here to learn more about how to clean your vinyl collection.)

If you’re a person who collect records to experience music as the artist intended, you need to pay particular attention to the tonearm you’re using. The main function of the tonearm is to keep the cartridge in a steady position as the record spins, at the same time allowing it to be flexible enough to move inward to the middle of the record while keeping the needle centered in the groove.

This is where the shape of the tonearm comes in. Here are the three standard types of tonearms and how they impact turntable performance:

Closeup.
Straight tonearm.

Straight Type

There are short and long straight tonearms available. The longer ones rely on an anti-skate mechanism to counteract the inward frictional forces caused by the spiral on the disc. This adds complexity and mass to the tonearm mechanism itself.

A short straight tonearm has less mass and can respond nimbly to pull more musicality from the groove of the record. In addition, its geometry requires no anti-skate mechanism to counter the inward forces, as is utilized in longer straight tonearms. In theory, the shorter the arm, the less chance for vibration and thus the greater the stability. As an example, the Yamaha GT-5000 turntable features a short tonearm and an oversized platter.

J Type

Closeup.
J Type tonearm.

Though nearly the same as a straight tonearm, this variation has the headshell jetting out to the right (towards the center of the record), giving it a characteristic “J” shape. The purpose of the angled headshell is to let a longer arm fit into a smaller space, which reduces the possibility of tracking errors as the record plays.

This kind of design also provides extra weight to the arm, which keeps vertical momentum to a minimum and prevents the stylus from bouncing out of the groove.

S Type

The S Type is designed to keep the tonearm balanced horizontally, adding more protection from the variables of a wobbly disk, a vibrating chassis and tracking errors. The intent is to create a fulcrum point in the middle of the tonearm, balancing the needle so it rests more in the center of the groove, which in turn allows it to capture as much audio as possible.

Closeup.
S Type tonearm.

Having a tonearm that is the right amount of flexible and firm is paramount to a smooth audio performance. With so many different turntables on the market, from entry-level to luxury, some research may be required to determine the unit that will best suit your needs. Here’s a tip: Visiting stores in person will allow you to test out different tonearms and hear the sonic difference they make.

 

Check out our other Ultra Hi-Fi blog postings:

Part 2: The Difference Made by Speaker Driver Materials

Part 3: The Difference Made by a Balanced Signal Path

Part 4: Going Beyond Perfection

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha turntables.

Dante® 101

You may have noticed that, alongside the usual audio input and output connectors, some of your digital audio gear has ports that look like large phone jacks. These are network ports, and they enable a variety of devices to be interconnected and share audio.

Audinate’s Dante® has become the most common protocol for digital audio networking, and you’ll find it in a variety of audio devices, including many Yamaha digital mixers, processors, power amplifiers and even speakers. Dante is now being used not just in large-scale installations and tours but also in small PA systems, making it one of the most exciting new developments in live sound.

Let’s find out what the fuss is all about.

Can We Borrow Your Cable?

Dante employs common Ethernet technology borrowed from the computer industry to transmit digital audio, but it’s important to know that Dante is not the same as Ethernet. That said, there are many similarities. For one thing, Dante connectors look like Ethernet connectors and use the same type of cable (CAT5e or CAT6). In addition, standard off-the-shelf network switches (sometimes called hubs) are used to create a Dante network, so you don’t need to purchase proprietary network hardware. (See the Dante website for a list of recommended network switches; Yamaha offers several network switches as well.)

Any Dante-enabled device can exchange audio (and video) with another Dante-enabled device, as long as they have the same capabilities. Dante networks can be made larger as your needs grow, but devices using other types of audio networks are not compatible with Dante networks:

Closeup of rectangular input.
A Dante port.

Why Dante?

Dante audio networking provides many advantages over traditional analog audio connectivity.

A single CAT5e/6 cable can carry hundreds of channels of digital audio, whereas analog audio requires one cable per audio channel. CAT5e/6 cable is inexpensive and light so it’s easy to carry a spare; in contrast, analog copper snakes are heavy, expensive, and difficult to wrangle during setup and teardown. And if a CAT5e/6 cable becomes damaged, you might even have a shot at finding a last-minute replacement at an office supply store. (Try that with an analog snake!)

Last but certainly not least, you’ll never worry about the gender of the connector at the end of the cable the way you do when dealing with analog audio. That’s because CAT5e/6 cables always have male connectors at both ends, with the direction of the signal determined by the software. Cable lengths of up to 300 feet are safe for reliable operation in Dante networks

When used with Gigabit Ethernet hardware (that is, hardware that supports a maximum data rate of one gigabit per second), Dante is capable of routing up to 512 channels of inputs and outputs at resolutions from 48 kHz/24-bit up to 192 kHz/32-bit. (Higher sample rates and bit depths will result in reduced channel count.) Multitrack recording is supported, too. With the use of an Audinate Dante Virtual Soundcard (which plugs into your computer’s Ethernet port), your DAW software will recognize a Dante network as a sound card. Alternatively, you can use a Yamaha AIC128-D Accelerator Card, which can be installed into any available PCI Express slot in your Mac® or Windows® computer.

Setup

Building a Dante network is like creating a computer network. Like computer networks, Dante networks can be set up in several different ways.

The simplest Dante network requires two Dante-enabled audio devices, a network switch, and a computer with an Ethernet port. The computer also needs to be running Audinate’s Dante Controller software (which runs on PC or Mac platforms and is available free of charge) in order to configure the network. If you are not using your computer for recording, you can disconnect it after you have set up the network. Note that Dante does not operate via Wi-Fi because Wi-Fi isn’t fast enough for reliable transport of digital audio.

Dante-enabled devices have at least one Dante port, known as the primary port. (Some devices may also have a secondary port for redundancy in critical applications.) Many Yamaha audio products, such as the DZR/DXS Series of powered loudspeakers, already have built-in Dante ports, while other Yamaha devices have a rear-panel slot to accept a Dante expansion card. For example, the Yamaha NY64-D Audio Interface Card can be installed in any Yamaha TF Series digital mixer, and the Yamaha DANTE-MY16-AUD2 card can be installed in selected Yamaha mixers, processors or power amplifiers, making them Dante-capable:

Closeup of the audio interface card hardware with controls on front and remainder to be inserted into hardware.
The Yamaha NY64-D audio interface card.

To create a Dante network, first turn all your audio equipment off, including your computer. Connect a CAT5e/6 cable from the primary Dante port on each device to any port on a Gigabit network switch such as the Yamaha SWP1-16MMF. Also connect a CAT5e/6 cable from your computer to the SWP1-16MMF (again, with the computer turned off). When you power up the devices they will automatically “discover” each other and you’ll be able to patch audio between them using the Dante Controller software:

Diagram showing how the different elements connect and data flows.
A basic Dante network.

Even after the networked devices are turned off or disconnected, the connections are remembered. When you reassemble or power up your system again, all of your previous connections will be made automatically.

Can You Do A Split?

One of the really cool features of Dante is that it can split an output signal without the need for additional hardware. Let’s suppose you are doing sound in a large ballroom and need to have a series of speakers placed around the room so that everyone in the audience can hear the artist. Dante Controller allows you to split the main outputs from the mixer to the inputs of multiple sets of powered speakers. And, because Dante is routing digital data and not analog audio, you don’t have to worry about the signal degradation that occurs when you split an analog audio signal:

Diagrams showing signal flow from networked elements to speakers.
Distributing signal to multiple powered speakers.

Larger music productions often require one mixer for front-of-house and another for the monitor mixes. The network switch that connects the consoles on a Dante network makes an analog snake/splitter unnecessary. You can connect microphones and DIs into one of the consoles, and Dante will allow you to digitally distribute these signals to the other console via the network:

Diagram showing flow of signal from networked elements through multiple mixers.
Distributing signal to multiple mixers.

As you can see, Dante is a very powerful tool that can be used to create audio networks ranging in size from small club venues to massive systems requiring hundreds of channels. By using Dante-enabled digital audio products, you can easily create a network that works for your particular application.

 

Want to become a Dante expert? Audinate offers a number of online and live training programs, as well as video tutorials. Click here for more information.

Kissing Frogs

I’ve never found the John to my Paul, the Bernie to my Elton, the Carole to my Gerry. There were times I wished I had (found a steady, life-long writing partner, that is) so I could keep coming back to the same safe place over and over again and not have to date around or kiss frogs to find a prince. But that’s not the way it happened for me.

Mind you, I’m sure I have been the frog on occasion. Sadly, it just goes with the territory. We’re not all good together. Just because Billy and Dan wrote a song I love doesn’t mean that I can write a hit with Billy, or Dan, for that matter. And neither of them will necessarily write a smash with somebody I wrote one with. Chemistry between two creators is a random and mysterious thing.

Although I never had that one steady go-to, I have had many outstanding partners over the years, and with each one I discovered something different about my own creativity. So maybe in retrospect variety has been a blessing.

How does one find their Mr. or Ms. Write? We can’t swipe left on a co-writing App. (Then again, I wouldn’t be surprised if we could. Nonetheless, I’m going to assume for the sake of this blog that we can’t.) In order to know if a one-on-one will be fruitful and prosperous, we simply have to get in the room with a suitor and have a go at it. Who knows? At the end of the day we might find the experience mutually productive and satisfying.

If you’re like me and particularly enjoy writing solo, you may want to consider switching it up now and then. After all, having another perspective opens the mind, pushes the boundaries, gets one out of one’s comfort zone. Besides, it’s nice to have company once in awhile. In the wise words of Bob Merrill, people who need people are the luckiest people in the world. 🙂

Two women smiling.
Man and woman looking at each other smiling and talking.
Me with two of my favorite collaborators: Eve Nelson (top) and Phil Thornalley (bottom).

From my experience, here are some tell-tale signs that I may have found a match. He or she:

… texts me that they’re running ten minutes late to our first session, which makes me feel better since it’s likely I’m running ten minutes late as well.

… believes in me from the minute they open the door. I can feel it. This is most beneficial for my self-confidence. That doesn’t guarantee I’ll be on my A-Game. But it helps.

… allows time for pregame conversation when a title or concept is likely to spring forth organically so we never have to resort to that dreaded question: What should we write about?

I’ve also learned that a good collaborator:

… inspires me

… is inspired by me

… has a good sense of humor. Laughter is so important to any relationship!

… is easy to get along with. I have to enjoy my co-writer’s company immensely on a personal level.

… is comfortable flying their freak flag — which in turn encourages me to do the same.

… doesn’t necessarily have the same strengths as me, which is a good thing. Too much salad and not enough dressing makes for a dull salad.

… remembers the snacks!

… makes me feel like I’m the only one they want to be working with that day, and that the two of us together are magical, in sync. We’re not even thinking that much: It’s just flowing. He’s finishing my lines, I’m finishing his. She’s taking my good idea and making it better by substituting a minor chord instead of a major, or by adding a 7th or an extra measure. Or by being brave enough to suggest cutting out half of the second verse! (How dare she? But maybe she’s right. Less really is often more.)

In sum, a good collaborator is anything but a frog. I can’t wait for our next session. Our next song. And each time we get together to write, I’m excited, motivated, eager.

So experiment. Try writing with anyone who seems like a good possible collaborator. Kiss as many frogs as you can. You’ll be better for it.

I know I am.

Photographs courtesy of the author.

 

Check out Shelly’s other postings.

Spotlight on THR-II

Every electric guitarist is familiar with tube amp stacks that sound amazing when turned up loud on a big stage, and with combo amps that are a perfect fit for smaller venues and rehearsals. The Yamaha THR broke the rules, ignoring the convention that a practice amp should simply be a smaller version of a larger amp. In doing so, it created a new category — the desktop amplifier — designed to provide what guitarists need when they’re playing at home. Now, with more sounds, more features and wireless connectivity, the three amps in the all-new THR-II series expand the concept even further.

All THR-II amps provide 15 guitar amp models, 3 bass amp models and 3 mic models for acoustic-electric guitars, as well as Hi-Fi audio playback to ensure your music sounds as good as your guitar tone, with extended stereo that creates a wide, spacious audio image. In addition, there’s Bluetooth® connectivity for wireless playback of your music and the THR Remote editor app (available for iOS and Android™), which allows you to do deep editing of effects and access a compressor and noise gate. The THR10II WL Wireless  and THR30II WL models also include a built-in rechargeable battery and Line 6 wireless receiver. Just grab your THR-II, your guitar and a Line 6 Relay G10Tii transmitter (sold separately), and play anywhere your music takes you.

Artists all over the world are using THR-II series amps. Want to hear what they have to say? Check out the video:

 

Click here to learn more about Yamaha THR-II series amplifiers.

Introducing Steinberg UR-C Series Audio Interfaces

As we’ve discussed previously here on the blog, not all audio interfaces are created equal. Case in point: Steinberg’s line of UR-C Series audio interfaces, which offer speedy USB 3.0 connectivity, superior sound quality, plenty of I/O options and a comprehensive collection of included software.

The UR-C line consists of two tabletop models — the UR22C and UR44C — and the rackmountable UR816C. All are compatible with Mac® and PC computers as well as selected iPads.

Three pieces of electronic equipment stacked.
The UR22C, UR44C and UR816C.

Key Features

– USB 3.0 Connectivity. Connection is made to your computer or iPad® via a USB-C port, with USB 3.1 (Gen 1 SuperSpeed) support for super-fast data transfer. If you’re using a legacy computer, no problem — there’s backwards compatibility with USB 2.0.

– 32-bit integer/192kHz audio. All UR-C Series interfaces provide up to 32-bit integer resolution, which means that when you record into one of the mic, line or instrument inputs, your analog audio is converted to digital data at the highest bit-resolution available today. Combine that with the maximum sampling rate of 192kHz, and we’re talking audio quality that meets or exceeds even that of high-end pro gear.

– Built-in Yamaha D-Pre Mic Preamps allow you to capture clear, accurate recordings with full sonic detail.

Electronic equipment.
All URC interfaces are equipped with Yamaha D-PRE mic preamps.

– Powerful DAW software included. Every UR-C Series interface comes with downloadable versions of  Steinberg’s feature-laden Cubase AI for Mac/PC, as well as a copy of Cubasis LE for iPad.

– An onboard DSP mixer with latency-free monitoring, controlled by the provided dspMixFx software.

– Effects galore. Included is Yamaha Rev-X reverb as well as Steinberg’s Sweet Spot Morphing Channel Strip and Guitar Amp Classic plug-ins, all of which can be run on the URC’s onboard DSP, thus freeing up your computer’s DSP and allowing real-time monitoring with effects. These plug-ins come in both VST 3 and AU versions, so you can open them inside your DAW.

Screenshot.
dspMixFx software.

A variety of I/O options. Each URC model provides different audio I/O options, allowing you to choose the one that best matches your needs and budget. The UR22C has two analog XLR/TRS combo mic/line inputs, two TRS main outputs and a TRS headphone output. The UR44C offers four XLR/TRS combo inputs plus two additional TRS line inputs, four TRS line outputs, two TRS main outputs and two independent headphone outputs. The flagship UR816C features eight combo XLR/TRS mic/line inputs, eight TRS line outputs, two main outputs and two independent headphone outputs. It also includes a pair of ADAT optical ports, allowing you to expand your input and output count by up to 16 by connecting compatible interface or preamp units.

Piece of electronic equipment.
The flagship UR816C.

– Bus power. Both the UR22C and UR44C offer the convenience of bus-powered operation (no AC adapter required!) when plugged into a USB-C-equipped Mac or PC.

– Dedicated MIDI In and Out ports make it super convenient to connect controllers and other MIDI devices.

– There’s a complete recording bundle available too. Steinberg’s UR22C Recording Pack gives you everything you need to get started. In addition to the UR22C interface and its included recording software, you also get a Steinberg ST-M01 studio condenser microphone and a set of ST-H01 studio monitor headphones.

Headphones, microphone and power pack.
The UR22C Recording Pack.

Check out the video!

 

Click here for more information about Steinberg UR-C Series interfaces.

Click here for more information about the Steinberg UR22C Recording Pack.

Dialing In Your Live Sound

An evening walk is a great way for me to unwind from the day, stretch my body and enjoy the scent of the local Hawaiian flora as the sun sets across the ocean. But I also use this time to clear my mind and pay attention to the details around me. One of the things I’ve been doing for a while now is to sit quietly and listen intently to the sounds I hear, both in my immediate surroundings and far into the distance. I make a mental note of each sound and where in the audio field I hear it.

I’ve found that taking a few moments each day to listen to my natural environment helps me become a better audio engineer. I hear sonic details with far more clarity because I’ve trained my mind and ears to really discern the pitch, rhythm, harmony and melody resonating from my studio speakers.

Years of live performance in a variety of venues has also given me a broad spectrum of experience setting up my guitar and vocal tones, as well as how to orient and “dial in” the public address (PA) system.

Anyone who performs live knows that there are many sonic variables to deal with that can have a huge impact on the success and enjoyment of your show — both personally for you, and for your audience. Let’s take a look at some of the factors to consider and talk about what you can do to increase or reduce their impact on your sound.

Room Ambience

Every venue will have its own ambient sound and its own set of challenges. Larger rooms will tend to have more reverberance and echo than smaller ones. Wooden floors and lots of large windows will increase those reflections too. Your goal should be to reduce the amount of reverb and delay in your sound to compensate for the “live-ness” of a room.

For example, if the room you’re playing in has a wooden, tiled or concrete floor, try to arrange to have a large rug to stand on during your performance. This will serve to reduce the amount of reflections in your immediate playing area.

If you’re fortunate enough to get in a soundcheck before showtime, understand that the reflected sound will probably reduce dramatically when the venue fills up with people, since all those bodies will effectively act as acoustic absorbers. If that happens, you may be able to increase both your overall volume and effects levels.

Proximity

If you set up your own sound system, pay attention to where you place your speakers. If they are on the floor or close to a wall, expect an increase in the bass response. If this is undesirable, place the speakers on stands, and if possible, move them away from the wall surfaces. The Yamaha DXR mkII line of speakers feature a D-Contour section that allows you to select whether each speaker is being used for front of house (FOH) or as a floor monitor; there’s also a separate switch to filter out low-end resonance.

Outdoor Atmospherics

A lot of my solo gigs have been residences at open-air venues. I’ve found that often the sonics varied from night to night, even though I would set up in the same spot. That’s because air pressure, humidity and wind direction all have a dramatic effect on your sound. In addition, after sunset, the temperature drops, which will cause your sound to change as well.

A light breeze from behind you can help carry your sound to the audience, while a breeze blowing towards you will allow you to hear more “you” — both positives. However, a strong wind coming sideways into your microphone can cause uncontrollable feedback!

I always use a foam windshield for my microphone, which helps somewhat. Even so, windy coastal locations can be a complete nightmare! In severe situations, I suggest turning down the overall volume, rolling off some high-end frequencies and reducing your reverb. Turning to have the wind facing you and staying in close proximity to the mic will also help.

If you use an acoustic guitar and looper, and the wind is blowing into the sound hole of your guitar, you may want to orient your instrument away from the wind or use a covering device called a “feedback buster.” My advice is to keep one of these in your guitar case at all times!

Monitoring

Onstage or in-ear monitors are great if you have them. If not, your only option is to reference your sound via what’s coming through the PA speakers. To avoid feedback, try to position yourself behind the speakers. If feedback still occurs, move your microphone backwards until it stops. (For more tips, see our blog articles on how to fight feedback.)

The integrated Yamaha STAGEPAS 1K mkII systems are excellent for self-monitoring since the line array of speakers disperses the sound horizontally at an exceptionally wide 170 degrees, with an extended vertical throw for both seated and standing audiences. I’ve used a pair of the STAGEPAS 1K towers in close proximity many times, and they were excellent for both stage and venue sound.

Sound Engineers

If you’re lucky (or, in some cases, unlucky) enough to play in a venue that provides a house engineer, there are a couple of tips I’d like to share with you. Some engineers are exceptionally nice and incredibly talented, and will know the room and how to get the best sound for you. My advice is to set up quickly and quietly, and give them exactly what they need, with no fuss. Make a friend of the engineer and he/she will do their best to accommodate your needs. Upset them and they have the power to destroy your show. (It’s said that every mixing console has a “Suck” button on it … don’t make them push it!)

Above all, don’t be afraid to ask for what you need … within reason. After all, you’re the artist and it’s the house engineer’s job to help you shine.

Running Your Own Sound System

If you set up and run your own sound system, learn its inherent characteristics and features, and don’t be afraid to spend a lot of time at home dialing in sounds. You can then use your experience and listening skills to fine-tune those sounds at the venue. Getting the basic balance between your guitar and vocals is key. Creating the optimum guitar tone to support your voice starts with the guitar you use. For more information, see my blog posting “The Principles of Musical Architecture.”

The Videos

I recently played some shows at Tournez La Page in Hamamatsu, Japan, and these videos show two of my performances. I’d programmed all my guitar and vocal tones into my Line 6 Helix before leaving for the trip, and I chose to use my solid-body Yamaha Revstar 720B electric, rather than my Yamaha AC5R acoustic, so that I could improvise over live loops without the chance of feedback. Taike Oshiro and Yamaha Guitars in Japan were kind enough to let me use a pair of STAGEPAS 1K systems for the rehearsal and performance.

Two men standing with a guitar and microphones.
Me and Taike Oshiro at Tournez La Page.

All I had to do was position the two towers, run the left and right outputs of the Helix to a channel on each of the two STAGEPAS 1K systems and turn up the volume. No EQ was needed, and it sounded great in every part of the venue. As expected, the volume was reduced when the audience filled the room, but I adjusted that after the first song using the volume control on Helix. That was literally all the setup required!

The Wrap-Up

Nothing prepares you to deal with the rigors of live sound better than performing on a regular basis. One gig is worth a hundred rehearsals.

Do your stage prep and dial in your sounds at home ahead of time. Set up your sound system in a variety of places to get a perspective on what the ambient space will do to your tone. Don’t be afraid to use EQ, if needed, and ask a respected friend their opinion on the balance and “listenability” of your sound. Above all, be critical with your tones and prepare to be your very best at all times.

Photograph courtesy of the author.

 

Check out Robbie’s other postings.

 

Click here for more information about the Yamaha STAGEPAS 1K mkII PA system.

Click here for more information about the Line 6 Helix guitar processor.

Click here for more information about Yamaha Revstar guitars.

Click here for more information about Yamaha A Series A5 acoustic guitars.

Film Sound: Behind the Scenes

It’s the end of a long, stressful day, and you’re ready to unwind with a great movie in your home theater. The scenes rapidly unfold and take you on a journey of sight, sound and adventure.

But what you may not realize is that, in addition to the dialogue, pictures and music telling the story, there are layers of sound that are critical to the end result. In this article, we’ll take a look at what goes into those crucial elements.

Foley

The dictionary definition of the term Foley (named after sound effects pioneer Jack Foley) refers to the “addition of recorded sound effects after the shooting of a film.” Those who help create such sounds are called Foley artists.

When shooting a film, the objective on set is to use microphones to solely (or, at least, primarily) capture the dialogue of the actors (a process called field recording), with all the other audio — doors slamming, sirens wailing, glass breaking, etc. — added afterwards. This approach allows for additional control over each element later at the mix stage.

During post-production, a Foley artist would watch the film on a screen and recreate the sounds in perfect time to the action. For example, if the visual was of someone walking down a hallway, they would put on a pair of shoes similar to those used by the actor or actress onscreen, place a microphone near the floor and painstakingly record each footstep in perfect synchronization to the picture. Done correctly, the viewer wouldn’t have any awareness that the sound of those shoes were actually recorded and mixed into the picture independently.

Man with close cropped salt and pepper beard and mustache with receeding hairline looking into the camera with a slight smile.
Scott Gershin.

But, like most other aspects of film-making, the process has evolved over time. For one thing, the work now usually occurs in specialized “Foley studios” that are outfitted with every manner of sound-mimicking devices, such as boxes filled with different kinds of material to simulate different floor surfaces. For another, the process has become even more specialized. “Foley today tends to be just those sounds created by human interaction, such as footsteps created by different shoes on different surfaces, picking things up, putting on a jacket, moving through brush, or fidgeting with something in your hands,” explains veteran Hollywood sound supervisor / sound designer Scott Gershin, whose list of credits includes Night Crawler, Pacific Rim, Shrek and American Beauty.

Sound Effects and Sound Design

Gershin emphasizes, however, that Foley is just one of the tools in the sound designer’s toolbox. “We also cut in sound effects, which range from gunshots and explosions to vehicles and car chases, as well as the simple sound of something like a doorbell or a chime that rings when a car door is opened. In addition, we may be called upon to design sounds that don’t exist in nature, such as creatures, robots, exotic energy weapons, starships, etc., using sound effects in a stylish way to create emotions and storytelling. This can be things such as how fan blades evolve into a Huey helicopter in Apocalypse Now, or a slow motion scene that suspends time, or a scene where everything is being seen through a distorted reality.”

An integrated approach is often the best one. “Many times,” Gershin says, “sound designers will work with Foley artists and use Foley stages to create elements in their design, such as shooting pennies across the room to be used as bullet sounds.”

Walla

Then there’s walla, which is different than either the dialogue recorded by the actors, or Foley, or sound effects. Gershin explains: “We bring in a “walla group,” which typically consists of eight to fifteen actors who, while watching picture, vocalize the sound of a background crowd in the scene, such as patrons in a restaurant, or outdoor street markets, or people just standing talking on the corner. They may also do chants and even sing-alongs in any accent or language.” It then becomes the job of the film’s dialogue editor to glue it all together and make it sound like it all happened at the same time.

Of course, with animated movies like Shrek or The Book of Life, there is literally no production sound at all. So every element — from the voices of the characters to the sounds they make to the environment itself — has to be created from scratch in the studio.

Think about your favorite action scene from any recent movie. Likely, it encompasses all of the above: Foley, sound effects, sound design and walla, along with dialogue and music. All of these separate elements would be combined together on the final mix stage, and the mixers would have control over each to create a finished product.

If it’s done right, you won’t think about any of it, leaving you to just focus on the story. And that, after all is said and done, is the ultimate goal of any great movie.

Check out the video!

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha AV products.

Creating Opportunity

The stars seem to align sometimes. Things just seem to happen in this cosmic way: You’re in a certain place, you meet someone, and then something happens as a result, which leads to other things happening. But it’s not just about recognizing opportunity and taking advantage of it when it comes your way; it’s about making opportunities for yourself. You need to put yourself in the right situation and right headspace. That’s what gives you a chance at succeeding.

Those aren’t my words. (I wish they were!) They came from the lips of famed British producer Stephen Lipson (Jeff Beck, Paul McCartney, Annie Lennox, Pharrell Williams), who I had the pleasure of interviewing some years ago.

Middle aged man behind a sound board and surrounded with studio equipment.
Stephen Lipson.

It brings to mind the old adage, “The harder I worked, the luckier I seemed to get.” In Stephen’s case, he spent years cutting his teeth as a session guitarist but found himself growing frustrated at the lackluster sounds the engineers of the era were getting, sparking in him a desire to master the craft of audio recording. He eventually crossed paths with a businessman who owned a jingle company and wanted to build a recording studio. Despite his lack of technical knowledge, Lipson wasted no time volunteering himself for the job, learning on the fly what was required and trusting his instincts and his ears.

Would you call that luck? Perhaps partially. But I would maintain that Stephen’s vision and dogged work ethic — not to mention his willingness to put his butt on the line if he failed — had far more to do with his ultimate success than dumb luck.

Looking back on my own career, I realize that it was an opportunity I created that unwittingly led to my position here as editor of the Yamaha blog. Ever since I was a teenager, I was fascinated with synthesizers, and the way that they could make sounds out of electronic circuits rather than being struck, plucked, blown into or otherwise physically assaulted. By the time I was in my twenties, I owned one of the early portable analog synths and spent hundreds of hours tweaking its dials, turning its knobs and painstakingly writing out “patch charts” of the sounds I was fashioning.

Young man standing to the side of a large synthesizer.
Proudly posing with my prize possession, circa 1981.

That experience led to my landing a part-time job at a music store when I moved to London in the mid-1970s. This particular shop specialized in keyboards, and I spent most of my days there learning how to program the synthesizers they had in stock — an important part of the job, since obviously the sales staff had to know the products they were selling. At one point, the store bought a used modular synth from one of its customers — an enormous contraption that took up half a wall and required the interconnection of dozens of cables to get even the simplest bleep or bloop out of the damn thing! When it failed to sell after a couple of months, the store manager, needing the space, offered it to me at a discount price, and I snapped it up … even though the small “flat” (Brit-speak for “apartment”) I was living in at the time barely had room for the few sticks of furniture I owned.

A few years later, when I returned to the States, I found myself teaching a synth programming class at a studio in New York. One day in 1983, a client walked in the door with an odd-looking synthesizer he’d recently bought in Japan, asking a question I’d soon hear a lot:

“How the heck do I program this thing?”

The synth was a Yamaha DX7, and I had no answer for him.

But I was determined to find one. The first step was to get my hands on a DX7, but the problem was that it wasn’t yet available in the U.S. So I turned to a friend of a friend of a friend who would soon be traveling to Japan, and he offered to buy one for me and arrange to have it shipped back. It cost a small fortune, but I was nothing if not stubborn: having (figuratively) wrestled a huge modular analog synth to the ground — at least to the point where I understood how it worked — there was no way I was going to let this new-fangled digital synth with the strange green and orange membrane switches defeat me.

Yamaha DX7 synthesizer.
Yamaha DX7.

A few weeks later, the instrument arrived … complete with an owner’s manual written in Japanese. It might as well have been ancient Greek for all the good it did me, so I simply started pushing buttons and moving sliders, painstakingly trying to figure out what each combination of button-pushes and slider moves accomplished.

It was grueling, sometimes extremely frustrating work, but slowly I began to make sense of it all. When I felt I had a good understanding of at least the basics of FM (Frequency Modulation) programming, I called the musician who had first made me aware of the instrument and gave him a couple of lessons. By then, the DX7 had made its way to our shores and was well on its way to becoming the best-selling synthesizer of all time, so I found myself with no lack of interested clients. Giving them all private lessons would be too time-consuming, so I decided to start teaching classes in FM programming, which led to my writing a book based on the course curriculum, which led to a decade-long relationship with Yamaha as a consultant, sound developer and technical writer. Eventually, I morphed into a fulltime music journalist … which led to my becoming an editor. Ultimately it was this unusual confluence of skills that led to me landing the very fun job of helping bring this blog to you.

Did I know any of this at the time? Of course not. But it was the drive in me — along with an insatiable curiosity, an unwavering belief in myself and a willingness to work hard — that led to all the exciting things that followed. So if you’re waiting for that big break to come your way, I suggest that you instead consider taking matters into your own hands. After all is said and done, creating your own opportunity is the surest way to get those stars to align.

Photographs courtesy of Stephen Lipson and the author.

 

Check out Howard’s other postings.

How to Clean Clarinet and Oboe Tone Holes

Most woodwind tone holes are covered by pads, but some clarinet and oboe tone holes are instead covered by the fingertips of the musician while the instrument is being played. This makes them much more susceptible to the buildup of debris — something that can have a negative impact on tone color and pitch. Excess cork grease, dirt, and skin oil on the musician’s fingers will accumulate over time until the venting of the tone hole is significantly obstructed.

Graphic of arrow on a closeup of the tone hole of a windwood instrument indicating the dirty residue.
Grimy residue.

Fortunately, the solution is simple. This grimy residue can easily be removed with a cotton swab or a pipe cleaner — generally no cleaners or solvents are necessary. Simply insert the swab tip into the tone hole and turn in a circular motion until all of the residue is gone. Making a habit of washing your hands before playing will also help ensure that the instrument delivers optimum timbre and pitch.

Graphic of a cotton swab in a woodwind tone hole with arrow showing movement in a circular direction.
Move the swab in a circular motion.

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha wind instrument care and maintenance kits.

Click here for more information about Yamaha clarinets.

Click here for more information about Yamaha oboes.

The Perfect Pairing: Yamaha MusicCast and Home Automation

When smart home devices work together, the possibilities are endless. Every kind of household routine — cooking, relaxing, exercising— can benefit from having the lights set a certain way, the thermostats adjusted to a particular temperature, the home security system armed or disarmed.

And then, of course, there’s music.

Any audio system offers households a wealth of benefits: tunes to keep you company while cooking dinner, soothing serenades as you get ready for bed, high-energy beats to get the blood pumping during a workout. Whatever the activity or occasion, music can help set the mood and get you in the right frame of mind.

When your system is wireless, adding audio accompaniment to your daily routine gets even easier. That’s where Yamaha MusicCast comes in: No matter where you are in your home — in fact, even if you’re outside on the patio — as long as there’s a MusicCast speaker nearby, you can stream the right type of music to suit the situation.

For example, while preparing a meal for a dinner party as you listen to a lively jazz playlist, you might also want the lights above the sink and stove set to a high intensity, the heat lowered, and the front door unlocked for your guests as they arrive. Once the buffet is set, the music, lights, temperature and security settings can change to evoke the perfect party atmosphere. The environment can change again after guests have departed: soft music, dim lighting, curtains drawn and the gas fireplace activated to help you settle in for the night.

Integrating Yamaha MusicCast products with your home automation system gives you expanded control and the ability to add music to every scenario. One simple command from a smartphone or tablet, wall-mounted keypad or handheld remote can get the entire house ready for whatever activity is planned. No need to peck through a playlist to find the perfect musical accompaniment; no need to fiddle with dimmer, thermostats or your alarm system. You won’t even need to touch the switch of your gas fireplace!

Ready to learn more? Read on!

Home Control Scenarios

Here are a few suggested music-related home control scenarios you might want to try:

Good Morning: The simple alarm clock pales in comparison to home automation integrated with MusicCast. Simply program your system to stream a choice piece of music to your bedroom speakers at a volume loud enough to wake you … while at the same time the bedroom lights gradually brighten, the motorized window shades open and the thermostat adjusts to a warmer temperature.

Treat Yourself: When you’ve got the place to yourself, relish it. Play the music you like as loudly as you like. Reminisce with ’80s hair bands or satisfy your craving for the classics. Nobody will mind. Sit in the dark — or not. Crank up the heat. You’ll hear no complaints. It’s your time, and a MusicCast-enabled home automation system can make you feel like a king (or queen) for a day — or even just a couple of hours — with perfectly curated music at the heart of it.

Put On Your Game Face: Pay tribute to your favorite sports team. On game day, tap the pre-programmed button to stream the school fight song to your MusicCast speakers throughout the house, tune the big screen TV to the channel showing the game and unlock the doors for all your friends and neighbors to come join you.

Party Time: Through the intelligence of your home control system, you can have only the lights and MusicCast speakers in a certain room or rooms respond to a Party command. Or, as the revelry builds, you might want the effect to spread to speakers and lights throughout the entire home.

Happy Holidays: If there’s a holiday or special event, you’ll want music. Oh, and festive lighting. Maybe even a few houseguests. With MusicCast and a home automation system working together, your house can get into the spirit of the season in the blink of an eye. Cue Christmas music and turn on the twinkling tree lights; on Valentine’s Day, go for a compilation of love songs plus red mood lighting and a crackling fire to rev up the romance. MusicCast plus home control makes every celebration even more special.

Control Options Galore

In the world of home control, just as in the world of music, it’s good to have options. That’s why Yamaha has teamed up with many leading providers of home control systems, including Control4, RTI, URC, Elan® (now Nice), Josh.ai, Crestron and others. Being able to choose from a variety of control systems to mate with your MusicCast products allows you to weave in any assortment of smart devices you desire, plus it ensures a level of comfort and convenience essential for any household. Best of all, integrating MusicCast with home automation can bring a whole new level of ease and enjoyment to your lifestyle.

Check out these related blog articles:

Smart Home Integration — From DIY to CI Guy

The Changing Face of Home Audio

How to Enjoy Great Outdoor Sound Without Disturbing Your Neighbors

Take the Party Outside!

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha MusicCast.

Click here for more information about Yamaha MusicCast wireless multi-room audio products.

Why Compress?

The compressor is right up there with EQ as the most commonly used signal processor in the studio, both during recording and especially when mixing. In most contemporary mix sessions, almost every track gets compressed to some extent.

Choices, Choices

No matter what DAW you use, each channel strip will have a slot reserved for a compressor. What’s more, all DAWs offer a variety of compressor choices, for the simple reason that each compressor type behaves and sounds differently. If you open the pulldown menu in Steinberg Cubase, you’ll see that you can choose between three different compressors: Standard, Tube and Vintage:

Screenshot.
Cubase channel strip compressor options.

We’ll talk a little more about each of these shortly. Note that Cubase also offers several other individual compressor plug-ins that you can insert directly into the channel.

Crushing It

Compressors were developed originally as tools to control the dynamic range of audio signals (that is, the difference between the loudest and quietest parts) by reducing peaks. While that’s still their primary function, they have other uses as well, which we’ll discuss a little later in this article.

A typical compressor reduces peaks that exceed a user-selectable amplitude (volume) threshold. Any signal that’s louder than the threshold gets attenuated by a user-specified amount, which is expressed as a ratio:

Screenshot.
Everything above the threshold (the red line) gets compressed.

For instance, if you set the ratio to 2:1, the compressor will attenuate every decibel (dB) of signal that exceeds the threshold by two decibels. If you have a peak that goes over the threshold by 4 dB, it will be reduced by 8 dB, and so on.

With the dynamic range reduced, you can turn the track up, and the whole thing will sound louder. That’s because the quieter parts will be closer in volume to the louder ones. Vocals in particular have especially wide dynamic ranges and are almost always compressed during the mixing process, and often during recording too:

Two screenshots.
Uncompressed vocal track (top), compressed vocal track (bottom).

Many Flavors

Most compressor plug-ins are based on the circuitry of analog hardware compressors. Many provide accurate models of particular classic units, utilizing digital algorithms that emulate the behavior of the originals very closely as onscreen knobs are “turned” and virtual switches are “pressed.” Plug-in emulations of hardware compressors also bring with them — at least in theory — the flavor of the original units’ analog tonality.

Screenshot of three compressor plug-ins.
Three of the Cubase compressor plug-ins.

Different hardware compressors add varying colors to the sound, depending on their circuitry. Those colorings are dictated not only by a particular model’s proprietary circuitry, but also by which type of compressor they are, generically speaking. Here are the main types:

VCA (Voltage Control Amplifier) compressors are the most common. These solid-state units are versatile and can be used for most compression applications. Depending on how they’re set, VCA compressors can handle everything from applying transparent dynamics control to squashing a source with a lot of color. The Cubase Standard compressor is modeled on this type.

FET (Field-Effect Transistor) compressors offer the fastest attack times and therefore excel on sources with sharp transients such as drums, percussion, electric guitars, and basses. They can even create subtle distortion at extreme settings. The Cubase Vintage compressor is modeled on this type.

Optical (Opto) compressors make a copy of the input signal, turn it into light, and then detect the level with a photosensor. They tend to offer warm sound and relatively slow attack times. The Cubase Tube compressor is modeled on this type.

Variable Mu compressors are tube-based units known for their warm sound.

You can use compressors both correctively and creatively. For example, aggressive compression can bring additional intensity and liveliness to a track. If you’re using a plug-in that’s a hardware compressor emulation, you can also use it to give a sterile digital track some analog-like characteristics.

Side by Side

One of the most powerful ways to use a compressor is in a so-called “parallel” configuration. The basic idea is that you don’t compress the original track, but instead send a copy of it to a separate channel (in Cubase, via an Effects Track), then compress that copy heavily.

Here’s how it works: First, set the desired level of the uncompressed track. Then slowly bring up the level of the heavily compressed one until you’ve achieved the degree of compression you want. Many compressor plug-ins, including those offered by Cubase, provide a mix (“wet/dry”) control that can be used to create a similar effect.

Many mixing engineers swear by this technique. It’s used a lot on drum tracks and vocals but can be applied to any source that you want to make sound more squashed. In fact, the only time parallel compression doesn’t work well is if you’re looking for transparent dynamic control, where you don’t want the effect to be sonically apparent.

In the Zone

While most compressors work across the whole frequency spectrum, specialized tools called multiband compressors allow you to set up several frequency “zones” (most commonly, four) and apply compression separately to each. As a bonus, these can be used to not only compress, but also shape frequency content:

Screenshot.
The Cubase multiband compressor.

For example, say a vocalist sings a lot louder during a chorus because she has to sing in a higher range, but when she does so, it creates harshness in the upper midrange. You could use EQ to reduce those offending frequencies, but that would affect them for the whole song and might not sound good when she’s singing more quietly in the verses and bridge. Much better to use a multiband compressor to affect only that one frequency area, with the threshold set high enough so that the attenuation only happens when her voice gets louder during the choruses.

The bottom line is this: Whether you’re using them to control dynamic range, add excitement, change tonal color, soften transients or reduce particular frequency ranges at specific amplitude levels, compressors are potent creative tools in the studio.

Check out our other Recording Basics postings.

 

Click here for more information about Steinberg Cubase.

Spotlight on STAGEPAS 1K

Introducing STAGEPAS 1K: an all-in-one portable PA system that allows you to quickly and easily transform any location into your stage, combining professional level sound quality with a setup so simple it enables you to focus on your music and get the most out of your performances.

Audio equipment elements lined up.
STAGEPAS 1K components.
Closeup of the mixer controls.
STAGEPAS 1K mixer.

STAGEPAS 1K includes a high-output thousand-watt amplifier and an array of ten 1.5″ high-frequency speakers, plus a large 12″ subwoofer, with a five-channel digital mixer tucked inside. The mixer offers three channels of mono mic/line/instrument inputs and a stereo input with dual 1/4″ jacks and an 1/8″ mini jack, plus support for wireless playback from Bluetooth® devices such as smartphones and tablets. It provides a wealth of sound-shaping tools, including 1-knob EQ for fast setting of optimized multi-band EQ, industry standard Yamaha SPX reverb, and selectable master output settings for common applications such as speech, music and dance. You can even remotely control the mixer from your Android™ or iOS device using the free Yamaha STAGEPAS Editor app, allowing you to make adjustments wirelessly from the stage or from the audience. The app also provides eight scene memories so you can save your settings and easily recall them for your next performance.

It may be feature-packed, but STAGEPAS 1K is lightweight enough to be easily carried by anyone, simple enough to set up in less than a minute, and durable enough to withstand harsh environments. No speaker stands or additional gear is required: everything is provided. It even comes with its own cover, which not only protects the unit but also has pouches for both spacers and the speaker array as well as storage pockets for microphones, cables, etc., thereby streamlining system setup and teardown — and leaving you more time for rehearsing and relaxing pre- and post-performance.

Want to know more? Check out the videos:

 

Click here to learn more about Yamaha STAGEPAS 1K.

Piano and Digital Keyboard Warmup

It’s one of the secrets of the pros, but unfortunately, students and budding performers rarely consider the need to warm up their body, mind and fingers before a session at the keys. In this article, we’ll take a deep dive into this important, yet often overlooked subject.

Clear Your Mind

When it comes to playing keyboards (or any instrument, for that matter), your mental attitude is as important as your physical condition. So take a moment to relax your mind before you start to practice or play. You want to be able to focus completely on what you’re doing, and if you’re playing with other musicians, you need to be able to zero in on what they’re doing without any mental distractions. Stop thinking about those chores and errands you need to run, or that thing that happened earlier in the day that bothered you, or that misplaced pedal or cable. Whatever it is, turn off your mind from all of that and get into a place of focus and concentration for the task at hand.

Stretch, Stretch and Then Stretch Some More

I like to start out by doing a simple hand stretching exercise. Hold your hands out in front of you and simply extend your fingers as widely apart as you can. (Think “jazz hands”!)

Two hands side-by-side with fingers and thumb splayed out.

Hold the extended position for 5 – 10 seconds and then relax. Repeat this a few times, and then shake your hands vigorously to get the blood flowing. Next, curl your fingers up into a tight fist, keeping your thumb out:

Hand palm up with fingers curled as if forming the beginning of a fist.

Make sure all your finger joints are bent. Hold this position for five seconds, then open and relax the hand. Repeat a few times and then shake your hands as described in the preceding paragraph. Try combining both exercises: Do the stretch, then bring your hand into a fist and squeeze gently, shaking your hands vigorously in-between.

Playing the keyboard involves more than the fingers, so it’s important to think about your arms, shoulders and neck as well. Start by rolling your head lazily in a clockwise direction a few times, then switch it up and go counter-clockwise. Don’t strain, just do it in a very relaxed manner. Then do some shoulder crunches, where you lift your shoulders up high towards your head and then relax them. Here’s a video that goes into greater detail on ways to stretch and work out kinks in your shoulders and neck.

Next, lift your arms up high so you feel both your upper arms and shoulders stretching nicely. Don’t force it; the idea is to lightly stretch and work the muscles. Then bring your arms out to your sides, parallel with the ground. Hold them there for a few seconds, and then bring them behind you, just a little bit. You’ll really feel this one! Rest for a moment, then bring your arms completely in front of you, reaching as far forward as you can. Be sure that you’re breathing normally during all of this: don’t hold your breath during each exercise.

This may seem like a lot, but you can easily execute all these moves within just a few minutes, and doing so will really help relax you and get you ready for the playing to come.

Keyboard Finger Stretches

There are also a number of great exercises you can do at the keyboard to help stretch your hand and work each of your fingers. Here’s one that’s both simple and effective:

1.  Place your right hand with your thumb on Middle C and your fingers above the adjacent five white notes (C to G):

Hand placed on Yamaha piano keyboard to demonstrate correct finger placement.

2.  Now lift and then play Middle C with your thumb slowly. Repeat, being sure to lift the thumb high off the key each time before playing it again. Be sure that you are not pressing down on any of the other white keys.

3.  Relax the thumb and then do the same movements with your index finger on D.

4.  Repeat this concept for each of the other fingers. You’ll find the ring finger on F to be the hardest to execute cleanly.

5.  Do the same with your left hand, placing your pinky on the C below Middle C.

Here’s an audio clip of me doing this exercise, with each finger playing the note three times before moving to the next one:

This next exercise is more advanced, and is recommended for intermediate to advanced players:

1.      Place your right hand with the thumb on Middle C, and the third (middle) finger on G:

Hand on Yamaha piano keyboard demonstrating finger placement.

2.      Play those notes at the same time and hold them.

3.      Next, play E-flat with your second (index) finger, and B-flat with your fourth finger. Make sure they sound at exactly the same time. When you press down those notes, lift your thumb and middle finger up high off the keys. In this way you are both stretching your playing fingers widely apart and stretching the released fingers up high, working the muscles in two directions at once.

4.      Next play the middle finger again on the G while your fifth finger (the pinky) plays the C above it. Again, be sure they strike at the same time, and lift the second and fourth fingers high off the keys.

You don’t need to do this fast: the idea is to concentrate on stretching the fingers apart and accurately sounding the double notes together. Those of you familiar with chords and harmony will notice that you’re playing a C-minor seventh chord. You can do this exercise going through all the types of seventh chords, as shown below:

Musical annotation.

Here’s an audio clip of me playing each of these different chords:

Note that the major seventh chord shape will be the hardest to do, as it involves the most stretching of the fingers. Advanced players can try this exercise in all twelve keys. Good luck with it!

Additional Tips and Tricks

–  If you live in a cold climate, or your keep your air conditioning cranked, think about running your hands under warm water for a few minutes before starting — this will help loosen the muscles. I know a pianist who used to soak their hands in a bowl of warm water before every performance, for the same purpose.

–  Sit in a chair that has arms, and place your own arms so that your wrist and hands fall freely to the front of the chair’s arms:

Closeup of a man's arm resting on the armrest of a rolling desk chair.

–  Now lift your hands up slowly so you feel your wrists getting stretched:

Closeup of the back of a hand with wrist bent to bring back of hand closer to camera.

When you return your arms back in place, push a little further down to curl them under so you stretch the forearm and wrist muscles a bit in the opposite direction.

–  Always pay attention to your posture. Keep your back straight, your shoulders relaxed, and hold no tension in your arms or body. (Something that applies to life in general, not just when you’re sitting at a keyboard!)

Photos courtesy of the author.
All audio played on a Yamaha P-515.

 

Check out our other Well-Rounded Keyboardist postings.

Click here for more information about Yamaha keyboard instruments.

Tips and Tricks for the Road Dog

I count myself among the lucky ones who have never seriously damaged their basses while practicing, performing or traveling. No snapped headstocks or broken tuners; no cracks, gouges, scratches or major dings; no broken pots, snapped toggle switches or mangled jacks. I will admit, however, to once scrubbing mold stains off a bass following a major water leak in my band’s basement rehearsal studio. The instrument cleaned up nicely, faint blue cheese odor not withstanding. But I digress …

Actually, “luck” is the wrong word to use. My basses have survived as well as they have by design. They are the embodiment of a serious investment of my money, time and passion, so when it comes to taking them out of the house, the last thing I want to do is be careless or lazy. Through habitual vigilance, you too can protect your bass from mishaps while traveling between shows, setting up and breaking down, and even during performances. Most of my approach is just common sense. Your bass is meant to be played, not looked at, but it’s an extension of you, so there’s nothing wrong with being overzealous about protecting it.

Your Bass Needs a Case

This may be stating the obvious, but nothing will protect your bass like a case. They’re not all made the same, but any case is better than no case at all. I’ve read that Jaco Pastorius used to carry his bass around with wild abandon, both indoors and out, but you’re not Jaco. (Who among us is?) Weather can damage a mere mortal’s bass quickly, as can an unexpected slip on a step, sidewalk or parking lot. With one hand on your bass and nothing else to protect it from a sudden fall (except your body), real damage is only one misstep away. It’s not worth the risk. Get a case.

Gig Bags vs. Hardshell Cases

In the battle between gig bags and hardshell cases, there are pros and cons to each. Neither one will likely save your bass if it’s dropped from a great height, but some protection is always better than none, and both types can protect your bass from less serious calamities.

Soft shell case, known as a gig bag.
A gig bag.

Gig bags are lighter and more ergonomic than their hardshell counterparts due to softer handles and adjustable shoulder straps that can be tweaked to your specific needs. The ones with ample padding will protect your bass from most minor mishaps, and as a bonus, they often come with separate compartments for carrying cables, cords and even small effects pedals to prevent them from grinding up against your bass. Some gig bags even have internal bracing and/or straps that stabilize your bass to keep it from jostling around.

If there’s a bass inside, it’s critical that you always check to make sure the zippers are closed before you pick up your gig bag — in fact, my advice is to check twice! This way, you’ll never have to worry about your bass freefalling. And just because a bag is padded doesn’t mean you should stack anything on top of it. A gig bag isn’t going to offer much protection from something (or someone) heavy sitting on it, or something falling on it. It’s more like an egg carton than a crate.

Electric bass guitar in an open hard shelled case.
A hardshell case.

Hardshell cases are more substantial than gig bags, and therefore heavier, bulkier and more unwieldy. The better ones are form-fitted with built-in structural support behind the neck to keep your bass wedged tightly in place. These structural properties enable you to stack other items — within reason — on top without putting your bass in jeopardy. Other instrument cases, drums, or even a small combo amp can usually be placed on top of a hardshell case, as long as whatever it is won’t bounce around or concentrate weight in a small spot.

If you want to stand a hardshell case up on its end, and it has your bass inside, make sure to do so with the headstock end of the case up — basses can withstand a lot of mistreatment, but they don’t like standing on their heads. Make sure you close the case’s latches first, or your bass will come tumbling out when you go to move it!

A hardshell case may show the scars from the blows it saves your bass from, but your instrument will live to play another day. A gig bag, on the other hand, may look fine on the outside, but it will be less able to ward off damage under similar circumstances.

Travel Tips

If your band travels to gigs together, be sure there’s enough space in your vehicle for all your equipment. Squeezing your bass in between, say, a guitar combo amp on casters and your drummer’s hardware bag isn’t worth the risk.

Too much space can be a problem too: if you travel in a huge van, make sure to tie down your gear to prevent it from shifting or falling … or, worse yet, conking you on the head if the driver makes a sharp turn. (This actually happened to one of The Beatles’ early drummers. Afterwards, he decided that the life of a musician was not for him, and he quit the band. Yes, this set the stage for Ringo eventually taking the drum seat, but it’s still definitely not a good thing to have happen. Again, I digress …)

Load-In, Set-Up, Performance and Load-Out

Protecting your bass on the road is largely predictable. Where things can go horribly wrong is during load-in and set-up, as well as during your performance and load-out afterwards. A cable that gets caught around a sound man’s foot can suddenly yank a bass that was leaning up against an amp and send it crashing to the floor. A drummer forgetting to fully extend the legs on a cymbal stand can send sharp metal crashing toward your bass’s neck. (Or, worse yet, your neck!) Every venue, every stage and every recording studio is different, and you have to be aware of every potential hazard — from falling down (or up) dark steps to banging your headstock into low ceilings, low-hung lights and/or speaker arrays, to tripping over cords and stage monitors.

What scares me most is leaving my gear when I’m not playing. I always set up my amp and outboard pedals first before taking my bass out of its case. If there’s time between soundcheck and the show, I put the bass back in its case; if not, I always use a guitar stand with a latch to securely hold it upright, as opposed to just leaning my bass up against my amp.

Thankfully, bass players are rarely expected to be the center of attention on stage, which is fine with me. So, during a gig, I try to avoid flopping around on the floor, jumping off drum risers or showboating in any way. Regardless of your flamboyance level, using strap locks on your bass strap is a no-brainer!

When the gig ends, I pack up my bass and put it back in its case before doing anything else — that way, it can’t get banged up during load-out. And I make sure to carry it with me to the bar (instead of leaving it unattended onstage) so I can keep an eye on it. That way, I can prevent the greatest damage of all — theft — while enjoying a well-deserved frosty one.

 

Check out Michael’s other blog posts.

Click here for more information about Yamaha basses.

How To Set Up a Student Percussion Kit

Beginning percussion kits are perfect for students in elementary or middle school. These snare, bell and combo kits offer the portability, quality and sound that music educators and students need to get started in the band room.

In this article, we’ll explain the setup processes for all three types of student percussion kits. All are quick and easy, so your students can start playing right away!

Snare Drum Kit Assembly Instructions

1.      Take the snare stand out of the case. There are two parts to the snare stand: the bottom and top halves.

2.      Take the bottom half of the stand and loosen the bottom wing screw to unfold the legs.

3.      Spread the legs wide enough so the stand does not wobble, then tighten the bottom wing screw.

4.      Loosen the upper wing screw on the bottom half of the stand:

Closeup of connector.

5.      Insert the top half of the stand into the bottom half of the stand:

Shows the two tubes being connected where there is the one on bottom has a screw with a little handle for turning and tightening.

6.      Tighten the wing screw when the stand is at the desired height.

7.      Unfold the snare drum basket.

8.      Take the snare drum and place it on the basket. Adjust the tension handle (shown below) to make the snare drum basket wider or narrower as necessary:

Intersection of the connections and levers for adjustment.

9.      Check to make sure that the snare drum is only touching the rubber grips and not the metal part of the snare drum basket:

Closeup of snare drum on stand.

10.  To change the angle of the snare drum, use the wing screw below the tension handle and adjust it to the angle that best suits your playing:

Closeup of a connection.

11.  For quieter practice, follow these same steps and insert the practice pad instead of the snare drum.

Bell Kit and Combo Kit Assembly Instructions

Assembly for a bell or combo kit is similar to the snare drum kit assembly described above. In most combo kits, the snare drum and bells use the same bottom half of the stand; all you have to do is switch out the top half of the stand. It’s easy to tell the two apart: the top of the bell stand has four rubber grip points, while the snare stand has three.

Bell Assembly Instructions

1.      Take the bell kit stand out of the case. There are two parts to the bell kit stand: the bottom and top halves.

2.      Take the bottom portion of the stand and loosen the bottom wing screw to unfold the legs.

3.      Spread the legs wide enough so the stand does not wobble, then tighten the bottom wing screw.

4.      Loosen the upper wing screw on the bottom half of the stand:

Closeup of connector.

5.      Insert the top half of the stand into the bottom half of the stand:

Shows the two tubes being connected where there is the one on bottom has a screw with a little handle for turning and tightening.

6.      Tighten the wing screw when the stand is at the desired height.

7.      The top half of the bell kit stand unfolds in an upward motion:

Connection made.

8.      Once unfolded, make sure the wide end of the stand is on the player’s left:

View of snare stand assembled to hold drum.

9.      Note that there’s a threaded screw in the center of the stand, which aligns with the hole on the bottom of the bells. Make sure the bells touch the rubber grips to avoid any rattling.

TP 10crop2

TP 11

10.  To use this stand with a tunable practice pad instead of bells, align the bottom hole on the pad with the threaded screw in the center of the top half of the bell stand:

Closeup of connection.

11.  Twist to the right until the pad is securely fastened:

Drum in place viewed from above.

The kit is now all set and ready to play. See you in the band room!

 

Click here for more information about Yamaha student snare kits, student bell kits and Total Percussion combo kits.

Navigating Moral and Legal Obligations

Peter Warshaw, fine arts director for the Leander (Texas) Independent School District, gives presentations about suicide awareness to music educators.

Warshaw has lost two students as well as his wife to suicide, so he knows firsthand about the warning signs and the grief.

Music educators might have more personal relationships with their students than math or science teachers, so they may occasionally learn sensitive details about their students’ lives. What should they do with this information, and do they have obligations to help students in certain situations?

Peter Warshaw

Because of various pressures during adolescence, students are at risk for mental health issues. Therefore, teachers should learn to recognize the signs of depression and suicidal thoughts, says Warshaw, a former band and orchestra teacher. Some school districts provide training.

Warshaw helped prevent one student from attempting suicide because he alerted the parents. “If someone had suicidal ideation, I would go with the student to the counselor,” he says. “If the student is mad at me, that’s the price I’m willing to pay to keep [him or her] potentially alive.”

Child Abuse

Barry Morgan

If a student mentions physical, emotional or sexual abuse, a teacher must report it to the authorities even if the student shared details in confidence.

“[Almost] all 50 states have some type of what we call the ‘mandated reporter statute,'” says Barry Morgan, the solicitor general of Cobb County, Georgia, and a former music educator in the Cobb County School District. “If we suspect child abuse, then we are to report it. There are criminal actions if you don’t follow the letter of the law.”

Rules vary by state, but a teacher who learns about suspected abuse must report the information to a specific school or law enforcement official within a prescribed time period. Then law enforcement will investigate.

Belligerent Students

Sometimes students act out in class. In some instances, problems outside the classroom may be to blame.

“Where kids will choose to vent is a safe space, and for a lot of them, [that’s] the band room,” Warshaw says. “They’re not lashing out at us. It’s almost always about something outside — a bad interaction with a classmate, maybe their boyfriend or girlfriend just dumped them, or it can be something else that is significant — maybe something is going on at home.”

Communicate about repeated disruptive events with your principal. “Make a written record through email: ‘This happened in my class today; this is what I’ve done,'” says Morgan, who runs legal clinics for music educators. “If things come to a head, and the teacher is accused of overreacting, he can show the steps taken and how he has followed policy and procedure.”

Occasionally, a student needs to be removed from the band program. See if the school administrators will intervene. “The last thing you want is to take a kid out of the program, and the principal forces you to take that kid back,” Morgan says.

Only remove students from the program as a last resort. “Band may be the only reason why they’re coming to school,” Warshaw says. “How arrogant of me to take that away from them. I may be making the problem worse.”

Alone Time with Students

Whatever the circumstances, avoid spend­ing one-on-one time with students because it may appear inappropriate.

“False allegations are easy to make and sometimes very difficult to disprove,” Morgan says. “I hate it that teachers have to put themselves in a position to see all of the possibilities out there, but in this day and time, they do.”

Band students often trust their instruc­tors, so they may feel like they can open up about their problems. “I would encourage them to talk to someone else — usually a counselor,” Warshaw says.

If you need to speak with a student privately, ask another teacher to be present or record the conversation if it’s legal in your state.

“Tell the student, ‘I’m recording this con­versation, not because I’m going to share it with anybody, but because I record all of my conversations with students,'” Morgan says. “It might stifle the students’ willingness to really talk about what their issues are, [but] you have to protect yourself.”

 

This article originally appeared in the 2019 V3 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Denis DiBlasio: Jazz Saxophonist, Music Educator and Storyteller

Denis DiBlasio is a natural improviser. He was about 10 years old when his music teacher wrote down a blues scale in F.

“He said, ‘Just make up stuff and use these notes,'” DiBlasio says. “I must have played that thing for two years. I just beat that thing to death.”

After spending so much time on the F scale, “I was upset when I found out there were 11 others. I thought I was ready for the road,” he jokes.

Humor and self-deprecation are big parts of the DiBlasio persona. He can poke fun at himself, knowing his reputation as one of the leading jazz saxophonists of his era is secure. DiBlasio spent many years playing with legendary bandleader Maynard Ferguson and is currently the executive director of the Maynard Ferguson Institute of Jazz Studies at Rowan University in Glassboro, New Jersey, where he also leads the jazz studies and composition program. In addition to teaching and playing the baritone sax, DiBlasio is a flautist, arranger and composer.

“Fun is a Great Motivator”

Denis DiBlasio performing on stage

DiBlasio stepped into music rather than being pushed into it — though his parents were always supportive and enjoyed hearing him play. “I didn’t have a piano-playing mother who was like, ‘You need to do this, or you need to work like that,'” he says. “What was really important is that I was left on my own to figure it out, to play with it on my own. It was always my thing.”

Music appealed to DiBlasio for a simple reason, one that might seem radical in today’s overscheduled world. “I just think it was something that was fun, like other things were fun,” he says. “I don’t want to say practice wasn’t a chore, but there were times when I practiced a lot, and there were times I didn’t. I was a kid. I’d put it down for about a month, fool around, play sports, and I’d pick it up later.”

DiBlasio is quick to note that fun isn’t the same thing as a free-for-all. “I knew early on that the better you became, the more fun it was,” he says.

Learning to play an instrument takes discipline, and being a professional means many days consumed by hours of practice. But DiBlasio emphasizes that the point of all that work was always enjoyment.

“Fun is a great motivator,” he says. “[But] fun doesn’t mean you’re goofing around. You’re working hard. You’re working really hard. Coltrane practiced 11 hours a day. He didn’t do it because he hated it. He did it because he was driven. He loved it. Call it love, call it fun, call it whatever.”

DiBlasio didn’t commit to a life in music until he needed to choose a major in college at Glassboro State College (now Rowan). Other options included becoming a marine biologist or a veterinarian. He quickly realized that he didn’t want to be a vet. “There was too much math in it,” he says with a laugh. “I didn’t realize it was science. I thought you just played with animals.”

“All Juiced In”

So DiBlasio stuck with the sax. “The more you stay involved, the more you get involved,” he says. “Before you know it, you’re all juiced in with all these different activities, and you know a lot of people. … You have a big, wide-open group of friends. And it kind of went from there.”

Denis DiBlasio playing the fluteAfter getting his master’s in studio writing and production at the University of Miami, DiBlasio earned a spot in Ferguson’s high-profile band. Even though he was a full-time touring musician for only about five years, DiBlasio continued to play on and off with Ferguson for decades.

DiBlasio describes Ferguson as a “musical big brother.” The bandleader’s career started in the 1940s and continued up to his death in 2006. Ferguson was, at different times, a session player for Paramount Pictures, a close associate of counterculture figures Timothy Leary and Ram Dass, an inventor of new brass instruments, a successful recording artist, and, of course, a bandleader who played all over the world and developed a reputation for nurturing young talent.

Part of the way DiBlasio keeps Ferguson’s memory alive is by telling stories. “Just go to YouTube and type in my name,” he says. “I posted about 30 stories about Maynard.”

DiBlasio has embraced the video-sharing site. He’s posted instructional videos on a range of topics. They’re short, funny and loaded with great suggestions. In fact, DiBlasio says that people who find him on YouTube often reach out to ask him to teach or perform. “They don’t know who Maynard is, and they definitely don’t know about my career,” he says. “But they’ve seen the videos.”

DiBlasio credits his time in Ferguson’s band with launching the rest of his career. “Everything kind of blew up after that, doing clinics and concerts and teaching,” he says.

But it’s not as simple as saying he became a teacher and enjoyed his happily ever after. It’s work.

“Nothing’s Wrong with Them!”

Denis DiBlasio sitting at piano and instructing two students playing the trumpet

DiBlasio says that every five to seven years, he has to come up with a whole new way of teaching. “The way I’m teaching now has nothing at all to do with the way I used to teach,” he explains. “The 19-to-22 age range isn’t the same as 19 to 22 was when I started.”

For DiBlasio, teaching is a partnership with each student. In the same way that he changes the way he performs based on who he’s playing with and the audience, he changes the way he teaches based on what his students know and care about and their life experiences. “You have to tune in to them,” he says.

He remembers when students knew jazz greats like Buddy Rich, Count Basie, Duke Ellington and Woody Herman. But for many students today, “Count Basie might as well be Beethoven,” DiBlasio says.

He sometimes sees new teachers taken aback by how little their students seem to know about jazz, but DiBlasio sees this inexperience as an opportunity. “There are an awful lot of people who are interested in music but don’t know much about it,” he says. “As a teacher, you’re trying to bring them into it.”

DiBlasio says a typical reaction of a new teacher is: “These kids don’t know Count Basie. What’s wrong with them?”

DiBlasio practically roars his rhetorical response: “Well, nothing’s wrong with them! They’re fine!”

“Making Small Adjustments”

Denis DiBlasio playing the sax while standing and his back arched back

But DiBlasio readily admits that he went through a painful awakening. A few years after he started teaching, he complained to his wife. “I was resenting it,” he says. “I was saying, ‘These kids don’t get it.'”

At the time, his wife, Hilda, was teaching preschool children with learning disabilities or behavioral challenges. DiBlasio recalls that she lovingly dressed him down: “She told me, ‘You only know your topic. You know what it is. You don’t know what teach­ing is. Everybody knows content. Ninety percent of teaching is getting their attention.'”

Hilda went on to explain that a different tactic is needed with 3- to 5-year-old students with attention deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD). “She told me, ‘You want to teach them to count? You have to figure out how to make them want to,'” he said.

DiBlasio tells the story gleefully. “If you want pity, don’t marry a smart woman.”

But the humor masks a devotion to teaching and a huge heart for his students. It takes constant self-care to keep teaching fun. “Having a great attitude about teaching doesn’t mean that all your days are going to be great,” he says. “You have to work at liking it. It’s like tuning an instrument or paddling a canoe. It only looks like it’s going straight, but really you’re making small adjustments all the time. That’s what teaching is, at least for me. … If you’re not flexible as a teacher, you’re done.”

Like playing jazz, teaching involves listening and reacting. “You’re a psychiatrist one day, a coach the next day, the next one you’re their friend, the next one you’re their dad,” DiBlasio says. “If your radar is up and picking up their signals, you find yourself changing a lot. That’s what’s exhausting. Not that they don’t deserve it. They’re good kids; they’re great kids. I love it.”

Photos by Rob Shanahan

This article originally appeared in the 2019 V3 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Case Study: Peers Support Peers at a United Sound Chapter in Missouri

Socialization is typically a by­product of a music program. However, in one music class at Parkway Central Middle School in Chesterfield, Missouri, socialization is the goal.

Paul Holzen

Parkway Central hosts a chapter of United Sound, a national not-for-profit program that provides musical performance experiences for students with special needs through peer mentorship.

Parkway Central’s band director, Paul Holzen, says that 20 of his band students volunteer to be “Peer Mentors” and build trusting, caring relationships with exceptional students who might not otherwise have a chance to participate in a band program. They’re not molding special education students into musicians; they’re including them in the band as peers and as “New Musicians.”

“Music is just the vehicle we’re using to build these relationships,” says Holzen, who was named a GRAMMY® Music Educator of the Year Semifinalist in 2019.

Come, Be Friends With Us

Students with intellectual or developmental disabilities might spend most of their days in their own classroom. United Sound broadens their horizons and makes them feel part of the greater school community. “The band room is where friends [are found]; if we can open the door and say, ‘Come, be friends with us,’ then we’ve maybe made a lifelong change,” says Julie Duty, founder of United Sound.

Kacey Ruckstaetter’s daughter, Alaina, has been playing cornet as a United Sound musician for the past two years at Parkway Central and has built peer relationships with students who are not in her other classes. “As she walks the halls, students give her a high five and say, ‘Hello,’ because they know her from band class,” Ruckstaetter says.

For the first 15 minutes of the United Sound class, Peer Mentors encourage New Musicians to exchange personal stories. “They’ll ask them, ‘How are you doing?'” Holzen says.

Once the socializing is done, it’s time for music. Learning to play an instrument helps students with their artistic, cognitive and physical development, Holzen says. For at least one United Sound musician, learning the clarinet has strengthened her facial muscles, and her speech therapist has noticed the improvement, he adds.

Haleigh Stiens, Parkway Central’s essential skills and special education teacher, sees her students enjoying increased independence, applying social skills and relying less on adults. “I have a very wide range of students,” she says. “It’s astounding to see how much they’ve grown.”

Peers Supporting Peers

United Sound peer mentors pose with a new musician

United Sound has 85 chapters — 18 at middle schools, 62 at high schools and five at universities — in 25 states. No matter the level, all chapters are 100% student-led. United Sound provides training and materials for teachers, student volunteers and the New Musicians.

Recently completing its second year, Parkway Central’s United Sound chapter meets weekly and has six New Musicians, each one taught by three Peer Mentors. “The students do all the work,” Holzen says. “They get to know their New Musician and develop a relationship.”

Working as a team, one mentor might model playing the instrument while another points to the music.

Directors just starting a United Sound chapter should place their trust in the Peer Mentors, Stiens says. “United Sound is really built on peers supporting peers and allowing them to cultivate a relationship without constant guidance,” Stiens says. “It’s beautiful to watch.”

Each year, Holzen appoints a president and a vice president among the Peer Mentors and communicates solely with them. They, in turn, communicate with the other mentors. Holzen’s system gives students a new perspective on leadership, understanding and awareness, important qualities for middle school students. “I’m helping them to be leaders, and it’s going down the chain,” says Holzen.

As far as teaching methods, Peer Mentors take their cues from Stiens and Holzen. “The best thing a mentor can do in the beginning is watch how teachers interact with their students,” Stiens says.

Stiens says that she has witnessed middle schoolers zoning out in the classroom, but it’s different with the United Sound Peer Mentors. They zone in, pay attention, listen, solve problems and create a bond with their musician.

Before student volunteers can begin teaching, they’re put through the paces of a training program. First, they watch two United Sound videos. Then, Stiens shares specific information about the musicians they’ll be mentoring. Some of her students are nonverbal, some have the use of only one hand, some don’t like loud noises, and some have vision impairments. She discusses strategies, communication and motivation. “I typically try to convey that each student is capable of achieving the same skill, but it will be in their own way,” Stiens says.

Overcoming Challenges, Reaping Rewards

United Sound is just a fraction of Parkway Central’s band program. Holzen is one of two band directors and the school’s fine arts department chair. Holzen and co-director Chris Higgins collaborate frequently as they teach 250 band students in 6th, 7th and 8th grades.

Starting the United Sound chapter as part of Parkway Central’s overall band program had several challenges. But once overcome, the rewards were significant.

The biggest problem was having too many students who wanted to be Peer Mentors. “I had lots of students interested in participating,” Holzen says. “I hope to always have that problem.”

Another challenge was persuading the Peer Mentors to embrace their instructional roles. Even giving simple fingering directions was difficult for them at first. “They’re not used to doing that,” Holzen says. “This challenge gets gradually easier.”

Holzen’s personal goal is to help all of the New Musicians move forward and feel like they are accomplishing something while feeling as though they belong.

Although United Sound meets during Parkway Central’s weekly structured enrichment periods and not during one of Holzen’s traditional band classes, the United Sound New Musicians are members of his band. When the band hosts its two yearly concerts, the New Musicians perform not as a separate ensemble but shoulder to shoulder with their Peer Mentors, who write musical parts specifically for them.

“If you only learned two notes all year, we’ll write you a modified part to this song that plays B flat and A at exactly the right time,” Duty says. “Every time that B flat comes around, you’re going to play that B flat. Everybody’s playing a part that meets them right where they are.”

Like any young musician learning an instrument, United Sound performers have practical challenges too. Initially Alaina had difficulty learning proper breathing technique to get sound from her cornet. “She persevered, and with the help of the band director and her Peer Mentors, after a year and a half, she finally succeeded in playing the cornet,” Ruckstaetter says.

Now United Sound is the highlight of Alaina’s week. “All weekend she would let the family know how excited she was about going to United Sound on Mondays,” Ruckstaetter says. “She enjoyed it so much that the program made an impact on our entire family.”

Alaina’s cornet playing has inspired her younger brother, who plays the trumpet, to apply to be a Peer Mentor next year. “He is so excited about the opportunity to work with students like his sister and help them learn [to play] band instruments and get to know them through United Sound,” Ruckstaetter says.

This article originally appeared in the 2019 V3 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

 

Use Creativity to Make Rehearsals More Meaningful

A few times each semester, the band room at Hill Country Middle School in Austin, Texas, would fall completely silent.

Cheryl Floyd

As students walked to rehearsal, they saw signs reminding them that their rehearsal would involve no talking from anyone — not even the teacher.

After students took their seats, the instructor gestured for students to begin playing with information projected on a slide at the front of the classroom. On those silent rehearsals days, the room was filled only with the sound of music, not with voices. “It’s a big game,” says Cheryl Floyd, retired director of bands at Hill Country Middle School and now a Yamaha Master Educator.

Though Floyd’s silent rehearsals were effective for helping students focus on the music, they also required a high degree of trust between the students and instructor. “You have to have a routine for how you do things,” says Floyd, whose students looked forward to silent rehearsals as special occasions.

Music educators can use a variety of tactics to maintain a smooth flow during rehearsals. Floyd along with University of Illinois professors Dr. Stephen G. Peterson and Dr. Elizabeth Peterson share their best practices for managing the musical classroom.

Different Techniques for Different Age Groups

Rehearsal management techniques can vary quite a bit based on the ages and musical experiences of the students. Generally, the younger the students, the more energy they will have, and the more direction they will need.

To keep young musicians engaged, Beth Peterson, who is the assistant director of bands at Illinois, recommends directly modeling what the students need to do. “With beginning band, I would model with my trumpet all the time,” she says. “I would play a two-measure phrase and have them echo me.”

Stephen Peterson, who is currently director of bands at Illinois, has taught high school, college and graduate levels. “When I used to have problems with a [high school] student, you … never deal with that student in front of the whole group,” he says. “There’s no way you’re going to win that situation.”

With college-aged students, Peterson notes that students are serious about music and can often focus on musical aspects of the rehearsal. “They are adults, and I treat them as adults,” he says.

Though older students can often have an easier time maintaining focus, Floyd believes that younger students are up for a challenge. “They are a blank slate when they come to you,” she says of middle school students.

The Role of Music Selection

Dr. Elizabeth Peterson

According to Floyd, the music itself can also influence the level of energy in the room. Her students’ rowdiest days would often happen when the band rehearsed pep tunes for foot­ball games. “That’s what it’s supposed to do — stir up the crowd!” she says.

Consequently, Floyd planned for these days, knowing that the rehearsals would be less productive.

Beth Peterson agrees that music selection can be a factor in classroom management and recommends that teachers present about a dozen pieces to their students at the beginning of the term, then settle on three or four that prove to be the best fit once they get a better feel for their group.

“There’s no reason you have to determine what to play at your first concert the first week of school,” she says. “New teachers come in with a few pieces they know, and then they get down the road, and the music might be too hard, and they get stuck.”

Peterson says that when selecting music, it’s so important to include pieces written by a diverse group of composers — women and persons of color. “This will help all students know that they are being represented and included,” she says.

Change Challenges to Strengths

When teachers have some talkative students in their ensembles, don’t view them as problems, Floyd says. Use those students’ strengths. “Say, ‘Who’s the loudest here?’ and have [that student] be the keeper of the pulse,” she says.

In addition to extraneous talking, classrooms face a new challenge: technology. While cell phones can be a major distraction, Floyd recommends using them for the advantages they offer.

“You can have [students] record themselves, even when they can just play ‘Hot Cross Buns,'” Floyd says. “They think that’s amazing.”

Phone apps for metronomes or tuners can also be helpful.

Internal Motivation

Dr. Stephen Peterson

During the 2018 Music for All Summer Symposium at Ball State University in Muncie, Indiana, the Petersons each gave a presentation on rehearsal techniques in which they explained some ways to motivate students. Stephen Peterson recommends moving away from a top-down approach and instead engage students.

“If something’s out of tune, you might say, ‘What’s wrong here?’ [or for rhythm problems,] ‘Who’s responsible for this rhythm?’ ‘Who’s slowing down?'” he says. “It’s all about a higher level of learning where they’re involved in the process instead of waiting for answers.”

Teachers may also need to work individually with some students to come up with creative solutions to unique problems that arise. For example, Beth Peterson coached a student-teacher on how to motivate a child who was misbehaving. “[The student] wanted to switch instruments, so she set up a contract with him,” Peterson says.

After the student showed positive behavior in class, fulfilling his end of the contract, the teacher allowed him to switch instruments to the tuba.

Often, teachers must find out what motivates students and then use that internal motivation to keep rehearsals running smoothly. For example, Floyd keeps her students from talking during silent rehearsals by making them a special occasion. “You can’t do [a silent rehearsal] every day,” she says. “It would lose its charm.”

Because students put a premium on silent rehearsals, they naturally hold themselves and their peers accountable. “If anybody does talk, the other kids will put their fingers in front of their lips,” she says. “They don’t want the magic to be broken.”

In the end, finding the magic of classroom management takes both consistency and flexibility to set expectations for the entire class and handle the needs of individual students.

 

This article originally appeared in the 2019 V3 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.

Setting Up Jazz Figures on the Drum Set

How do you treat figures on the drum chart in big band and small group jazz? I want to provide some clarity for those of you who are jazz band educators who do not play the drum set. I also want to help folks who are interested in applying their drum set skills to big band or small group jazz playing.

The term “figures” simply refers to the written musical notes on the sheet music. For almost all instrumentalists, the task is to play exactly what is written on the sheet. For the drummer, a figure may mean one of three things: 1) play the exact figure, 2) do not play the figure or 3) play prior to the figure and then play the figure (more commonly referred to as “setting up” the figure). These scenarios can be daunting for inexperienced drummers because it can contradict much of their prior concert band training.

The decision to approach these figures in one of these three ways will differ depending on the director’s and the drummer’s tastes as well as the skill level and needs of the ensemble. Sometimes the figures should be played as written on the snare or bass drum; other times, the figures can be ignored altogether. Often, figures will be set up with fills.

Here are a few simple but effective mechanisms I have learned that have been helpful to both students and band directors when setting up jazz figures.

In Big Band for Figures Beginning on the Offbeat

To set up a figure beginning on the “&” (offbeat), I recommend playing the two eighth notes preceding the figure, and then the written note. (See Sample 1 below.)

With students, I begin teaching this concept using the “&” of beat 2 (4/4 time), as I find it is most accessible to the inexperienced jazz drummer. To set up a figure beginning on the “&” of 2, the drummer would play “(1) & 2 &,” which sets up and then plays the written figure. The two preceding eighth notes can be played on the snare drum, with the written figure accented with bass drum and cymbal.

Sample 1

If the desired musical effect is simply to accent the note without a setup, the time continues on the cymbal, and the note is played traditionally by the snare drum or bass drum.

I teach the “&” of beat 2 first, followed by the “&” of 3 and then the “&” of 4. I save the “&” of 1 for last because it requires starting the setup in the measure before the figure, potentially challenging for inexperienced drummers.

In Big Band for Figures Beginning on the Beat

To set up a figure starting on beat 2, stopping on beat 1 and leaving a space before playing beat 2 is a traditional approach. A drag, flam or even rolling into beat 2 can add some additional color, but stopping the beat before is very effective. (See Sample 2.)

NEW ARRIVAL: The Stage Custom Birch Drum Set

In working with novice drummers, I have found that teaching beat 2 first is effective because stopping on beat 1 feels natural for many musicians. Once beat 2 becomes comfortable, I teach 3, then 4 — saving beat 1 for last. As with the offbeat figures, setting up beat 1 requires stopping in the bar before the figure, potentially tricky for some.

Sample 2

With small group jazz drumming, the figures are treated differently because, in general, the volume level of the group is lower than a full big band.

Many times, just lightly playing the exact figures with either the snare drum or bass drum gets the desired musical effect without setting them up. However, if the music calls for a figure to be set up, the same system I described for the big band works in a small group setting as well.

By playing the two eighth notes prior to an offbeat figure and stopping one quarter note before a figure on the beat, setting up and playing figures becomes an easy process. This system is also helpful when reading a chart for the first time as it provides a clear approach to playing the figures.

For those of you working with drummers, this system gives you a way to break down this skill into easy and repetitive tasks.

Ultimately, deciding how to approach figures in the drum chart is a collaborative process between the band leader and the drummer and should always be communicated openly.

This article originally appeared in the 2019 V3 issue of Yamaha SupportED. To see more back issues, find out about Yamaha resources for music educators, or sign up to be notified when the next issue is available, click here.